Home

Acronis True Image 2013

1. Overwrite options 7 Click Proceed on the Summary window to start recovery 8 After the recovery finishes exit the standalone True Image 2013 Now you can be reasonably sure that your rescue CD will help you when needed 144 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 3 1 Selecting video mode when booting from the rescue media When booting from the rescue media the optimal video mode is selected automatically depending on the specifications of your video card and monitor However sometimes the program can select the wrong video mode which is unsuitable for your hardware In such case you can select a suitable video mode as follows 1 Start booting from the rescue media When the boot menu appears hover the mouse over True Image item and press the F11 key 2 When the command line appears type vga ask without quotes and click OK WWW ACRONIS COM Truelmage 2013 by Acronis To start click a task SOO aril Enter Linux kernel command line quiet vga asH You can turn on MouseKeys to control the mouse pointer using the numeric keypad Press left ALT left SHIFT NUM LOCK or CTRL M or F10 and control the pointer using the numeric keypad keys 3 Select True Image in the boot menu to continue booting from the rescue media To see the available video modes press the Enter key when the appropriate message appears 4
2. Py System Clean up Add Logical Drive 4 ayy System Components g Recycle Bin Q2 Select the logical drive a Temporary file a Hard Disk Free Space Data Destruction M Drive Free Space My Computer amp Local Disk C ca New Volume D I Recently Used Documet Windows Run List E Opened Saved Files His g User Credentials Windows Prefetch Dire cy New Volume E Remove Computers The Computers setting is used for cleaning up the registry search strings you have used for finding computers in the local network These strings keep information on what has interested you in the network These items should also be deleted to maintain confidentiality The Computers setting is similar to the Files setting It is a string that can contain any number of full or partial computer names separated by semicolons The deletion of computer search strings is based on a comparison with the Computers setting value according to Windows rules If you simply need to delete all local network computer search strings suitable in most cases just leave the default value of this setting To restore the default settings Select the Find Computer List component Make sure the Enable check box is selected Select the Computers setting make sure its text box is clear As a result all computer search strings will be deleted from the registry After entering the Computers sett
3. 6 Select the system partition usually C on the What to recover screen If the system partition has a different letter select the partition using the Flags column It must have the Pri Act flags 80 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 In case of Windows 7 the System Reserved partition will have the Pri Act flags You will need to select for recovery both the System Reserved partition and the System partition Flaco O Pe Required steps Whatto recover Settings of Partition C Select the items to recover Partition Flags Cap Used Sp Type Disk1 A V CA NTFS Unlabeled C PriAct 100GB 3 348 GB NTFS E D MBR and Track 0 MBR and Track 0 Next gt Cancel 7 At the Settings of partition C or the letter of the system partition if it is different step check the default settings and click Next if they are correct Otherwise change the settings as required before clicking Next Changing the settings will be needed when recovering to the new hard disk 81 of a different capacity Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 Carefully read the summary of operations at the Finish step If you have not resized the partition the sizes in the Deleting partition and Recovering partition items must match Having checked the summary click Proceed Fecovary wizard CE Ben G Recovery Wizard Required steps Summary
4. Select the appropriate partition s check box then click Next 8 4 5 2 Decrease size Select a partition that will receive free space after Acronis Secure Zone is reduced in size You can also select an unallocated space to reduce the size of the secure zone To select a partition Select the appropriate partition s check box then click Next 8 4 5 3 Acronis Secure Zone protection Here you can set up password protection for the Acronis Secure Zone in order to prevent it from unauthorized access The program will ask for the password at any operation relating to the Acronis Secure Zone such as data backup and recovery mounting images or validating backups in the Acronis Secure Zone resizing and deleting the Acronis Secure Zone Password settings Do not protect choose this option if you do not want to use password protection for the secure zone Set password choose this option if you need to protect the Acronis Secure Zone with a password Type the password in the Password field m Retype the previously entered password in the Confirm field You can also select a secret question that will be asked in case you forget the password Select a secret question from the list and enter an answer to it m Click Next to continue Manage Acronis Secure Zone Wizard GO Manage Acronis Secure Zone Wizard Required steps Set or change the password for Acronis Secure Zone V Action Selection Do not prote
5. 175 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 After the image is created burn it to CD or DVD If you did not check the Burn to CD option at the previous step After booting from the CD DVD you can find the True Image 2013 plug in in Go System Storage Adding drivers BartPE supports adding two types of drivers storage drivers and network drivers For instructions on how to add drivers refer to PE builder driver help at http www nu2 nu pebuilder help english drivers htm There is also an option to add storage drivers for RAID or SCSI devices during BartPE boot up You need to press F6 and point to the diskette with the drivers Common storage drivers are available at http nu2 nu pebuilder drivers When you boot from the newly created BartPE media True Image 2013 can be found here Go gt System gt Storage gt True Image 2013 8 2 3 Creating WinPE based rescue media To create a WinPE based rescue media you need to purchase and install True Image 2013 Plus Pack Acronis Plug in for WinPE can be added to WinPE distributions based on any of the following kernels Windows Vista PE 2 0 also suitable for Windows XP SP2 with KB926044 or later Windows Vista SP1 PE 2 1 also suitable for Windows XP SP2 with KB926044 or later Windows 7 PE 3 0 also suitable for Windows 8 Attention Acronis Plug in for WinPE cannot be added to WinPE distributions based on the Windows 8 kernel PE 4 0
6. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds VMware and VMware Ready are trademarks and or registered trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners Distribution of substantively modified versions of this document is prohibited without the explicit permission of the copyright holder Distribution of this work or derivative work in any standard paper book form for commercial purposes is prohibited unless prior permission is obtained from the copyright holder DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID Third party code may be provided with the Software and or Service The license terms for such third parties are detailed in the license txt file located in the root installation directory You can always find the latest up to date list of the third party code and the associated license terms used with the Software and or Service at http kb acronis com content 7696 Acronis patented technologies Technologies used in this product are covered by the following U S Patents U S U S Patent
7. To be able to create or modify PE 2 x and 3 0 images you must have Windows Automated Installation Kit AIK installed If you do not have Windows AIK installed on your PC prepare as follows 1 Download and install Windows Automated Installation Kit AIK for Windows Vista and Windows XP with Service Pack 2 or later PE 2 0 http www microsoft com Downloads details aspx familyid C7 D4BC6D 15F3 4284 9123 67983 OD629F2 amp displaylang en AIK for Windows Vista SP1 PE 2 1 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 94bb6e34 d890 4932 81a5 5b50c 657de08 amp DisplayLang en AIK for Windows 7 PE 3 0 http www microsoft com DOWNLOADS details aspx familyid 696DD665 9F76 4177 A811 39C 26D3B3B34 amp displaylang en optional Burn the Windows AIK to DVD or copy to a flash drive Install the Microsoft NET Framework v 2 0 from this kit NETFXx86 or NETFXx64 depending on your hardware Install Microsoft Core XML MSXML 6 0 Parser from this kit 5 Install Windows AIK from this kit It is recommended that you familiarize yourself with the help documentation supplied with Windows AIK A good starting point is the Create an image section of Getting Started for IT Professionals white paper To access the document select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Documentation gt Getting Started for IT Professionals from the Start menu For more information on customizing Windows PE see the Windows Preinstallation Environme
8. You can place both files and folders into the Sync folder 5 7 2 How to sync with a local folder You can sync any two folders of your choice on one computer These include folders on computer s hard disks removable or remote storage devices USB flash drives USB hard drives NAS Network Attached Storage devices If you synchronize with a folder located on an NAS or USB drive make sure that connection to the NAS is established or that the USB drive is attached to your computer before creating a new sync To synchronize two local folders 1 Start True Image 2013 and then click the Synchronization tab 2 Click Sync local folders 3 Inthe opened window click Browse and specify the first folder to sync Create local sync Select folders to synchronize Browse Browse Cancel 4 Specify the second folder in the same way 5 Click Create sync You can also create a new sync from Windows Explorer Right click the folder you want to synchronize and then select Synchronization gt Sync with gt Local folder Select the folder for synchronization in the opened Select folder window Here are some notes on this type of sync One of the synced folders can reside on a remote SMB Server Message Block share It does not matter if the share is mapped or not Hint By using a shared folder you can sync two computers without necessity to install T
9. You cannot change the backup scheme when backing up to optical media such as a DVD BD In this case True Image 2013 by default uses a custom scheme with only full backups This is because the program cannot consolidate backups stored on optical media You can exclude hidden or system files and folders from backup as well as files matching the criteria you specify For more information see Excluding items from backup p 73 If you would like to assign a specific name to the backup type the name in the Backup name field instead of the default one You can also add useful information to the backup name To do so click the down arrow to the right of the destination and click Browse Select the items you want to add in the right field of the File name line add date the backup creation date will be added add time the backup creation time will be added add user name the current user name will be added add machine name the computer name will be added add task name the name of the task that includes the backup will be added add task run number the sequence number of the task run will be added Click Disk backup options to set the options for the backup being configured For example when your data disk contains sensitive information you may want to protect the information by encryption You can also choose to validate the backup immediately after its creation though it can be done later For more information see
10. Difference between methods Create only incremental versions after the initial full version Create a full version after every 5 incremental versions Old version cleanup rules Delete version chains olderthan 7 gt days Store no more than 11 recent version chains Keep size of the backup no morethan 1 z Do not delete the first version of the backup Turn off automatic cleanup E Save the settings as default ww Reset to initial settings OK Cancel True Image 2013 allows you to choose the following backup schemes Single version p 60 select this scheme if you want to use the smallest backup storage Version chain p 61 this may be the optimal scheme in many cases Incremental select this scheme if you want to create only incremental backups after an initial full backup this is the default scheme Differential select this scheme if you want to create only differential backups after an initial full backup Custom p 61 select this item if you want to set up a backup scheme manually 3 13 2 Single version scheme This backup scheme is the same for both disk backup and file backup types except scheduler settings The program creates a full backup version and overwrites it every time according to the specified schedule or when you run backup manually Backup scheduler setting for disk backup monthly Backup scheduler setting for file backup daily Result you have a
11. Disable Indexing Service Turn off the hibernation mode 7 6 Trying system changes safely In this section What is Try S DeCld 6 seccc sszcceccardecvasncqsesveacdes tasnneeesttactestadeesieeeeaceesaaaeeae 152 Starting the Try MOE s cecccccscccdss nsaceees se sRiessasdcecessesededeadaceeedseendessacdevendes 154 Stopping the Try MOdC cceceeeessssececeeecessesseaeeeeeescesseseeaeeeceeeeessestaaeess 154 Try amp Decide options and notifications ccsccesssecsescesssseesseessseesees 155 Try amp Decide typical use cases 7 6 1 What is Try amp Decide The Try amp Decide feature allows you to create a secure controlled temporary workspace on your computer without requiring you to install special virtualization software You can perform various system operations without worrying that you might damage your operating system programs or data If you make virtual changes that you want to keep you may apply them to your original system Among the operations you may attempt with this feature is to open mail attachments from unknown senders or visit websites that might contain potentially troublesome content For example if you visit a website or open an email attachment that puts a virus on your temporary duplicate you can simply destroy the duplicate and no harm will be done the virus will not appear on your machine It is important to remember that if you download e mail from a POP mail server create new files
12. Disk 2 Disk 3 Model 16 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 16 GB VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 25 GB VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 Interface SCSI SCSI SCSI T C J y 1668 C 3 15 96 GB NTFS E Primary Logical Dynamic M Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported True Image 2013 does not support cloning of dynamic disks Select the source disk and click Next to continue Viewing disk and partition information _ amp Columns selects the columns to display You can change the width of a column by dragging its borders with the mouse Disk properties duplicated in the context menu opened by right clicking objects displays the selected partition or disk properties window This window contains two panels The left panel contains the properties tree and the right one describes the selected property in detail The disk information includes its physical parameters connection type device type size etc partition information includes both physical sectors location etc and logical file system free space assigned letter etc parameters 191 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 5 5 Selecting a destination disk After you select the source disk you have to select the destination where the disk information will be copied to The previously selected source becomes grayed out and disabled for selection re Clone Disk Wizard R
13. How does manual clean up of Acronis Nonstop Backup storage work You can clean up Acronis Nonstop Backup storage by deleting the backed up data for a certain period of time For example you started Acronis Nonstop Backup of your system partition on August 15 2011 It has been protecting your partition since that day Let s suppose that today is December 15 2011 and your Acronis Nonstop Backup storage is almost full You decide to clean up unnecessary data to free up some Storage space To clean up the storage click the gear icon in the Nonstop Backup box to open the Operations menu and then select Clean up True Image 2013 displays a window allowing you to select a period of time for deleting the backup versions created during that period Let s suppose that you did not make important changes to the system during a period from September 1 to December 1 Select the period and click OK The program will delete all backup versions created during the selected period and consolidate the remaining backup versions to keep their consistency Let s consider some cases to explain which data is deleted and which data is kept First let s consider a system file for example notepad exe It was backed up during the initial full backup on August 15 and naturally did not change since then In this case the file will remain in Nonstop Backup after clean up And now suppose you installed a game on September 15 played for some time and then uninstalled the game o
14. If you have backups that are not shown in the backups list on the Backup and recovery tab for example backups created by a previous Acronis True Image Home version you can add them to the list Click Browse for backup on the Backup and recovery tab This opens a window where you can browse for backups on your computer To add an existing backup to the backup list select the backup and click the Add to backup list button 3 12 Deleting backups and backup versions You may want to delete backups and backup versions you no longer need True Image 2013 stores information on the backups in a metadata information database Therefore deleting unneeded backup files in Windows Explorer will not delete information about these backups from the database and True Image 2013 will consider that they still exist This will result in errors when the program tries to perform operations on the backups that no longer exist So you must only remove obsolete backups and backup versions by using the tools provided by True Image 2013 To delete an entire backup Find the corresponding backup box on the Backup and recovery tab of True Image 2013 Click the gear icon to open the Operations menu and then click Delete When you delete an entire backup all its versions will be deleted as well To delete a specific backup version 1 On the Backup and recovery tab find the corresponding backup box and click the Recover button or click the gear icon and t
15. In case of setting a limit on the number of backup versions the actual number of versions can exceed the maximum number of versions by one This enables the program to detect quota violation and start consolidation Similarly if you pre set a backup version storage period for example 30 days the program will start consolidation when the oldest backup version is stored for 31 days 3 13 4 3 Examples of custom schemes 1 File backup Daily incremental version weekly full version Case You have files and or folders you work with every day You need to save your daily work results and want to be able to recover data state to any date for the last three weeks Let s see how you can do this using a custom backup scheme 1 On the Backup and recovery tab click Other backups and then select File backup 2 Inthe File Backup window select files and or folders you want to back up and specify the backup destination For more information see Backing up files and folders 3 Click Turn on for the Schedule item In the Scheduler window click Daily and specify a start time for the backup operation For example if you finish your everyday work at 8 PM specify this time or a little later 8 05 PM as the start time Click Incremental next to the Backup scheme item Incremental is the default backup scheme In the File Backup Options window make sure that the Backup scheme tab is selected Choose Custom scheme instead of Incremental schem
16. One serial number allows you to install True Image 2013 ona limited number of computers The Standard edition of the product can be activated on 1 computer only For the Family Pack edition the limit is 3 computers If during activation True Image 2013 detects that the limit is exceeded it displays an appropriate error message In such a case you can either buy a new serial number or move the license to your new computer from another one on which the product is already activated If you want to move the license perform the following steps To move the license from another computer 1 Inthe window with the error message click Move license from another computer 2 Onthe opened Web page follow the instructions on the screen To perform this step you need to have Acronis account If you do not have an account yet then create it first You also have to register your serial number if you have not done it Then you need to choose from the list a computer from which you want to move the license Note that on the chosen computer the product will be deactivated 1 1 9 Program workspace In this section Get started TaD cestas ernearen aaea aea eaae iae areke iaee Re 18 Backup and recovery tab sssssssssssssssssrrsssrrrssrrrssrrrssrtnrssrennssrennssrennsstt 19 Synchronizadon TAD earo dicecessssscessesacecevesindevesticcaves E 23 Tools and utilities t bi ssriinnssniotesicnsroiornrsntinenssernnentsspieenspenia tietan 25 Wizards and noti
17. To delete obsolete versions you can set automatic cleanup rules See details in How to clean up your space on Acronis Cloud p 119 When you turn off the storing versions option all versions except the latest one are deleted from the Cloud If you use a trial version of True Image 2013 all stored versions including the latest one are deleted from the Cloud when the trial period expires Each user turns the option on and manages file versions independently of other users If you sync some data with a friend who uses a different Acronis account you can decide for yourself whether to turn on the option or not Version storages allocated on the Cloud are also separate 5 9 1 Reverting to a previous file version If you store sync history on the Acronis Cloud you can revert the current version of a synchronized file to its previous version This is useful when you want to undo some undesirable sync operation To revert to a previous file version 1 On the Synchronization tab of the main screen find the sync box with the needed file Then click the Acronis Cloud link 2 After the list of sync items opens in your Web browser select the file which you want to revert to a previous version Then click the gear icon at the right hand side Select View versions in the opened menu 3 Select the version to which you want to rollback The version s exact date and time will be displayed Your current version will be reverted to the s
18. case with notebooks the procedure will differ You will usually need to resize the partitions manually during recovery to the SSD For instructions see Recovering a disk with a hidden partition p 89 7 5 6 What to do if your SSD does not have enough space for all HDD content Now let s see what can be done when the occupied space on your old hard disk exceeds the size of your SSD In this case you need to move your data files from the old hard disk to another location for example to another hard disk drive If your notebook has space only for a single disk your options are limited You can move the data files you rarely use to an external hard disk Alternatively you can create zip archives of such files and then delete the original files In addition you can clean up the hard disk Choose to delete the System Restore points on the More Options tab of the Disk Cleanup window After freeing up space on the old hard disk check whether the occupied space is less than the SSD size If so perform the migration procedure described earlier Take note that for stable operation Windows needs to have several GB of free space on the system partition After you migrate the system you can try to tweak some of the Windows settings This will reduce the disk space required for Windows In most cases you can safely perform the following Turn off System Restore You don t need it because you have True Image 2013 for restoring your system
19. mpt3lboat E Sector 337 367 Position 0 View Hex Hard disk content search The Search menu allows you to search a hard disk for a line and to go to a disk sector according to its absolute offset Selecting the Search item in the same menu will give you access to functions of searching lines in the disk being edited You can do the same by pressing the Ctrl F key combination Search parameters are set in the Search dialog window To begin searching Asearch line can be set both as a char Text field and numeric hexadecimal value Hex field When you type text in the Text field it will be automatically converted to hexadecimal value in the Hex field and vice versa Check the Case sensitive parameter to consider a letter case If you selected a search mode without letter case matching not only the case but also elements of the above characters will be ignored for Roman character sets Check the Search at sector offset parameter to search for a given line at a given offset inside the sector m Click OK to begin searching After the search process is finished the current position will be moved to where a line was found or will remain the same if no lines were found You can search for the next line from the current position by selecting the Search again item in the Search menu or by pressing the F3 key Go to sector You can go to the necessary sector according to its absolute offset by selecting the Go
20. 1 Click the gear icon on the box of the online backup from which you want to delete data and select Open Web application 2 After the Files tab on the Acronis Cloud Web site opens select the required online backup in the Backups area 3 Select files and folders you want to delete by selecting their check boxes Having finished selection click the Delete button 7 Useful information In this section Protecting your SYStOM ccccsesssessssssssesseseseseseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeees 138 Deciding where to store your backups ecscecesessecesseeeecesseeaeeeseeeaeens 140 Making sure that your rescue media can be used when needed 142 Testing that your backups can be used for r COVELY s sccceceeeeeees 146 Migrating your system from an HDD to an SSD ccssssceessseeeessseeees 146 Trying system changes Safely ccccsscsccccecessesssseeeeeeesessessaeeeeeesseesees 151 SGHEGUIIM Bitict acts fectes roen oaeee eea e ee a e ages EEES 157 Searching backups and their content sccccccecsssssssececeeeeessestaaeees 160 Choosing columns for viewing in wizardS sssssssssrsssrssrrsssrssrrssrrssree 166 Backup infOrmatiOn c ccccccescccecsescececssscececsescececseseecscssssececssseeesesseaeens 166 TIMEOUT Settings cessisse reese ete eede eesi eee ee eden 166 7 1 Protecting your system To protect your system please take the necessary precautionary measures 1 To pro
21. True Image 2013 by Acronis RTM User s Guide Table of contents 1 G tting started escccse ccciiscensccctaccdssecuensecsa covdvveconscssedcnssdsccnssoauyeedeasvecucscauvs cies svesesceauedbassecobecedans 7 1 1 WARPO MUGUION sc neea aa e a Ee E EE EEA E SEEE EER 7 1 1 1 What is True Image 2013 by Acronis cccsssssessesesesssscsscsessssesesscsessesesscsesessesssecsessesesscscaeseeseseeseseeaesees 7 1 1 2 Whatis True Image 2013 Plus Pack by Acronis ccccccsscsscsssssessesesscsscescsessessessessesscseesessessesaesaesaeeeeess 8 1 1 3 True Image 2013 basic CONCEPTHS ccsscsccscsscsscsscssessesesssssssscsscsecssesessesssssessssecsessessessessessssesoeesesaessesaesaseasenees 8 1 1 4 New in True Image 2013 by Acronis cccccscsesssssssessesscsscssesecssesessessecseseesecseesesaussesssseesesaeeeesaeesesaeeaeesonees 10 1 1 5 FAQ about backup recovery and cloning cccesesssssscsscesesecssesecsesssssessesecsessessesseesesseseceeeseseessessesseeseeeees 11 1 1 6 System requirements and supported media cccesssseesesecsscsesseessssessesecsecsesssesecseseesesseenesaussessesaeseseree 12 1 1 7 Trude Image 2013 installatiOMisssscsscccticasevessssasconconcesessenssieisecsisatdeadaceksanssiovieeiacobabenscaruecaucsrsvevaiens EEA ERE 15 1 1 8 TRUE liAg eS 2013 ACLIVAE OMe ayeicy cass tease vatoncsas se tuahecccessusescavasesecavedaas a Aaa a aa Aaaa Ai aa EAEE A ER ENE 16 1 1 9 Program WOP
22. Version 6 9j2012 v Source and destination Switch to disk mode E gy MBR VMware VMware Virtual S 1 Zz Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 200 GB T y eua NTF Les Local Disk C amp 100 2 GB rtual S1 h Partition properties Hide MBR Use Universal Restore gP Disk recovery options Recover now Cancel 1 Select the corresponding check box of the partition to recover If you backed up an entire disk you can choose to recover the entire disk at once by clicking Switch to disk mode To be able to select partitions again click Switch to partition mode 2 Inthe recovery destination field below the partition name select the destination partition Those partitions where the partition to be recovered can fit are marked by black lettering Unsuitable partitions are marked by red lettering Note that all data on the destination partition will be lost because it is replaced by the recovered data and file system To recover an image to the source partition without resizing at least 5 of free space is required on the partition Otherwise the Recover now button will be unavailable 3 After you finish with your selections click Recover now to start recovery Sometimes you need to recover the MBR Master Boot Record For instance it may be necessary when Windows does not boot after recovery To recover the MBR either together with the partition or individually click Show MBR and then se
23. and to verify written verification the second column contains the pattern of data to be written to disk The pattern to be written is always a hexadecimal value for example a value of this kind 0x00 OxAA or OxCD etc These values are 1 byte long but they may be up to 512 bytes long Except for such values you may enter a random hexadecimal value of any length up to 512 bytes Your algorithm may also include one more value for writing that is designated as the complementary value the value that is complementary to the one written to disk during the previous pass If the binary value is represented by the 10001010 Ox8A sequence then the complementary binary value will be represented by the 01110101 0x75 sequence The Algorithm definition window offers you the template for the algorithm only You should define exactly what the software should write to disk to destroy the confidential data according to your algorithm To do this click your mouse on the line representing pass 1 and click Edit Wiping pass adjustment The Wiping Pass Adjustment window allows you to define the pattern to be written to disk hexadecimal value This is what the window control elements mean You may enter any hexadecimal value into the field under the Write pattern switch to write it to a hard disk during any pass during the first pass in this case By setting the switch to Write a random number position you will first select
24. oem extensions 4 8 1 Recovering your system with the help of Acronis Universal Restore Select on the Backup and recovery tab a backup containing your system partition Click the Recover button on the backup s box if the backup consists of a single version When there are several backup versions click Explore and recover Select the backup version you want to recover on the Disks and partitions tab and then click Recover 3 When the Disk Recovery window opens select the system partition s check box and choose the recovery destination 4 Select the Use Universal Restore check box Then click Settings to open the Drivers manager window 5 Ifthe target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as an SCSI RAID or Fibre Channel adapter for the hard disks specify where to find the driver or drivers for the specific hardware If the driver is stored on a diskette or CD select the Search removable media for device drivers box If some drivers are stored on a local hard disk or a network share click Add custom driver locations Then browse to the driver or drivers location After you finish specifying the drivers locations click OK Acronis Universal Restore does not support search for drivers on FTP servers In most cases Acronis Universal Restore will use three sources for drivers the removable media the drivers storage location or locations specified at this step and the Windows default driver s
25. As already mentioned users of the Enterprise and Ultimate editions of Windows 7 can boot from tib images of Windows 7 system partition This allows you to test bootability of the backed up system without actual recovery Booting can be done only when running True Image 2013 in Windows If you have Windows 7 Enterprise or Ultimate and want to test whether your Windows 7 system partition backup will recover to a bootable operating system proceed as follows 1 Open Acronis Boot Sequence Manager by clicking Boot Sequence Manager on the Tools amp Utilities screen 2 Click Add on the toolbar of Acronis Boot Sequence Manager and browse for the required tib file then click OK 3 Because actual booting is performed from VHD the program needs to convert the selected tib file so the appropriate dialog will appear 4 Click OK if you want to save the converted file to the default location with the same name or browse for another location Saving to another location allows you to change the name of the vhd file Booting is possible only when the vhd file is located on an NTFS formatted local hard disk If there is not enough space for the converted file in the selected location the program will notify you You can delete unnecessary files and click Retry or cancel the conversion and repeat the operation choosing another location for the converted file 5 After the conversion process finishes a new line with the vhd filename will be added
26. Select the desired algorithm from the drop down list The data destruction methods are described in detail in Hard Disk Wiping Methods p 219 of this guide Acronis DriveCleanser Pomeni ey Algorithm selection source selection To specify a data destruction method select a predefined method from the list A description of the Algorithm selection selected algorithm appears below the list To create and use your own algorithm select Custom To use a previously defined and saved custom method select Load from file Finish m Description Navy Staff Office Publication NAVSO Pub 5239 Information Systems Security INFOSEC Program Guidelines is issued by the Naval Information Systems Management Center Disk controllers use a variety of encoding techniques to convert the computer data to a format suitable for the magnetic data storage media Typically ST506 style disk drives use Modified Frequency Modulation MFM encoding SCSI and ATA IDE drives use a Run Length Limited RLL encoding scheme If you are uncertain as to the drive encoding technique use this pattern Optional steps Post wiping actions ez After you select an algorithm Acronis DriveCleanser will perform all the actions necessary to destroy the contents of the selected partition or disk After this is done you will see a message indicating successful data destruction 206 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 201
27. available for expanded boxes Recover files available only for disk backups opens the Backup Explorer window where you can select any version of the backup Back up now adds a new backup version to the existing backup or replaces the existing backup version depending on the backup scheme being used Open location opens the folder containing the backup files Edit settings allows editing of the current backup settings Recreate backup settings available only for backups manually added to the backup list allows configuring the settings for image file and e mail backups created by a previous Acronis True Image Home version This item may also appear for backups created on another computer and added to the backup list without importing their settings Without backup settings you will be unable to perform certain operations Specifically you cannot refresh the backup by clicking Back up now Also you cannot edit and clone the backup settings and schedule Validate starts backup validation Delete deletes all backup versions of the current backup at their location Be careful because the deletion cannot be undone More opens the following additional items Create shortcut creates a shortcut on the Desktop With the shortcut you can run a backup without starting True Image 2013 Consolidate versions you can delete the backup versions you no longer need while maintaining the consistency of the
28. file or e mail backup there is no need to configure the backup process from scratch The program allows you to copy all settings from an existing backup After that you only have to slightly correct the copied settings for your new backup and click Back up now To create a new backup based on an existing backup 1 Onthe Backup and recovery tab find the corresponding backup box click the gear icon to open the Operations menu point to More and then click Clone settings A new backup box named 1 the initial backup name will be created It will contain the same settings as the parental backup 2 On the cloned backup box click the gear icon to open the Operations menu and then click Edit settings 3 Change selection of items to back up You may modify backup name destination and other settings if needed Click the Save button 5 Tocreate the first backup version click Back up now on the backup box 4 Recovering data The purpose of data backup is to recover backed up data when the original is lost due to hardware failure fire theft or accidental deletion of files We hope that you backed up your system and data using the backup features provided by True Image 2013 If so nothing will have been lost The following sections describe how to recover disks partitions files and folders In most cases you will use Acronis Backup Explorer to recover files and folders For more information see Acronis Backup Explorer p
29. select all their check boxes in the list If the disk has several partitions and you want to back up the whole disk click Switch to disk mode in the upper right corner and then select the disk s check box To return to the partition selection click Switch to partition mode 2 Select a destination for backup you can leave the default destination when it suits you or browse for a destination after clicking the down arrow to the right of the current destination and selecting Browse When the backup destination is any removable media USB stick BD DVD the Make this media bootable check box becomes selectable Selecting the check box results in creating a bootable recovery environment on the removable media and adding a standalone True Image 2013 version You will be able to run True Image 2013 from the removable media on a bare metal system or the crashed computer that cannot boot If possible avoid storing your system partition backups on dynamic disks because the system partition is recovered in the Linux environment Linux and Windows work with dynamic disks differently This may result in problems during recovery If you need the backup to run on a schedule click the link to the right of Schedule turn on scheduling and set the required schedule For more information see Scheduling p 157 You can also change the default backup scheme by clicking on the appropriate link For more information see Backup schemes p 60
30. the new disk space will be proportionally distributed between cloned partitions 192 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Manual you will specify a new size and other parameters yourself E GO Clone Disk Wizard Required steps Choose data moving method from old to new hard drive V Clone Mode B C Asis Y Source Disk The data on your old hard disk will be moved to the new drive in its current state the size of the partitions will not Y Destination Disk be changed Move Method Proportional The size of the original partitions will be respectively changed to fit the new drive size If the new drive is smaller the partitions will be shrunk accordingly if the new drive is bigger the partitions will be enlarged proportionally Manual Allows you to set partition size manually es If you elect to transfer information as is a new partition will be created for every old one with the same size and type file system and label The unused space will become unallocated Afterwards you will be able to use the unallocated space to create new partitions or to enlarge the existing partitions with special tools such as Acronis Disk Director Suite As a rule as is transfers are not recommended as they leave a lot of unallocated space on the new disk Using the as is method True Image 2013 transfers unsupported and damaged file systems If you transfer data proportionally each part
31. the program will create a new full backup of the data to be protected on the new Nonstop Backup storage You can also include files and folders into Nonstop Backup by selecting them in Windows Explorer and choosing Include in Nonstop Backup in the shortcut menu that opens by right clicking on the selected item 3 7 2 Protecting your system continuously You can use Acronis Nonstop Backup for protecting entire system partition as well If you have sufficient storage space Acronis Nonstop Backup can simultaneously protect more than one partition To protect the system partition continuously 1 Click Other backups on the Backup and recovery tab and then select Nonstop Backup This opens the Nonstop Backup window Nonstop Backup p fase Configure nonstop backup process Source Switch to file mode y Local Disk C z x i 00 2 GB used FAT32 E T GB used FAT16 F vy Local Disk G None SD 2 68 of 18 68 User Destination L z NTFS z 186 45 GB of 186 54 GB free Backup name My System Add comment amp Nonstop backup options Start now Cancel 2 Click Switch to partition mode in the upper right hand corner of the Nonstop Backup window The partitions that exist on the local hard disks will appear in the What to back up area Select the system partition by selecting the appropriate check box 3 Select a destination for nonstop backup you can leave the default
32. verification ae Peter Gutmann s method 35 Peter Gutmann s method is very sophisticated It s based on his theory of hard disk information wiping see Secure Deletion of Data from Magnetic and Solid State Memory Bruce Schneier s method 7 Bruce Schneier offers a seven pass overwriting method in his Applied Cryptography book i pass No Algorithm writing method Passes Record OxFF one pass 0x00 and then five times with a cryptographically secure pseudo random sequence a frost sk Logical zeros 0x00 numbers to all sectors to wipe 8 9 Mounting an image True Image 2013 offers mounting for images and exploring for both images and file level backups Exploring images and file level backups lets you view their contents and copy the selected files toa hard disk To explore a backup in Windows Explorer double click on the corresponding tib file When you copy files from a backup being explored the copied files lose the Compressed and Encrypted attribute If you need to keep these attributes it is recommended to recover the backup Mounting images as virtual drives lets you access them as though they were physical drives Such ability means that a new disk with its own letter will appear in the drives list using Windows Explorer and other file managers you can view the image contents as if they were located on a physical disk or partition you will be able to use the virtual disk in
33. 1 Start True Image 2013 2 Click the Acronis Cloud link on the box of the default sync 7 A SyncMe Ww Automati Folder CAUsers tester SyncMe Participants GI RU TW VVOLKHOSK GI tester setsetst GI tw horne GI TESTER SETSETST Acronis Cloud Today at 5 57 AM 141 53 MB Click the Files tab and then select the sync from which you deleted the file After you select the sync a list of files and folders appears 5 Select the Show deleted check box and then select the deleted file you want to recover Synchronizations gt SynchMe gt Originals Recover T Show deleted items m Name Size Date m IE Add GPT png 54 Kb 06 30 11 12 11 PM 111 88 Kb 07 04 11 10 09 AM 2 0 0 8 8 G amp G s m 78 Kb 07 04 11 0 o 3 81 Kb 07 12 11 07 19 AM m I Clone1 png 67 Kb 06 30 11 11 59 AM m E Clone2 png 79 Kb 06 30 11 12 00 PA m IE Clone3 png 80 Kb 06 30 11 12 01 PAA 6 Click the Recover button to recover the deleted file to its folder 5 12 How to share folders You can share a folder with any person whose e mail address you know To get access to the shared folder this person does not need an Acronis account Sharing a folder is done on Acronis Cloud 1 Start True Image 2013 2 Click the Acronis Cloud link on the box of the default sync CAUsers tester SyncMe RU TW WOLKHOSK C tester setsetst G tw home Gl TESTER SETSETST Acronis Cloud Updated Today at 5 57 AM Total size 141
34. 26 In this section Recovering your system after a Crash cccecessssssseceeeeesessssssaeeeeeessesses 78 Recovering partitions and disks cccccsccccccecsssessnaeceeeesseesesssaeeeeeesseesees 82 Recovering partitions protected with Acronis Nonstop Backup 84 How to recover more than one partition at ONCE ceceesssseeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Recovering a disk backup to a different disk under rescue media 88 Recovering data from file level DACKUPS cccccscccceessceeeesseeeeeesteeeeeees 94 Recovering file versions ccccccecsscceeeessececeeseeeceesaececeesseeeescsseeeeeesaeeeeeses 95 Recovering to different hardware ccccccccssscccessseceseesseceeeesseeeeeesseeeeeees 96 Acronis Universal Restore ccccsccccsssseccceesneeecessueeecsecueeeeseceeeessseeeesees 100 How to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager 0s0sssessssseseeeees 101 About recovery of dynamic GPT disks and volumes ccssessetseeeeees 102 Backup protection dialog DOX ccccessseceeecessesssaeeeeeessessesnaeeeeeesseeeees 103 Arranging boot order in BIOS cccssscccceceessssssaeceeecessesssssaeeeeeesseesees 103 Recovery OPTIONS 22 2226 seccec se cedte Sedend R enc Sete eee eee ee 104 Restoring computer to factory settings c ccccsessecesseteeceeeeteeeeeeeeeees 108 4 1 Recovering your system after a crash When your computer fails to boot it is advisable to at first try to find th
35. 53 MB 4 A SyncMe w tomatic sync 3 Click the Files tab and then select the sync or online backup containing the folder you want to share 4 Select the required folder in the list and then click the gear icon at the right hand side Select Share folder in the opened menu 5 Type the e mail address of the person with whom you want to share a folder and optionally type a message to the invited person lt Share Folder Invitee s email address myfriend gmail com Personal message optional Hi have a look at my vacation photos Send Invite Close 6 Click Send invite to send the invitation e mail message To share your files and folders with unlimited number of people you can use public links For example you can create a public link to your file and publish it on a forum Anyone on the forum will be able to download or view the file By creating a public link you can share any folder in your system irrespective of whether it participates in a sync or not Please note that all files and folders you share with other people use your quota of space on Acronis Cloud For more information see How to create public links to files and folders p 123 5 13 How to create public links to files and folders You can create public links to files and folders on your PC as well as in the Acronis Web application Let s see how this is done on a computer with installed True Image 2013 You don t have to start the p
36. 7 047 380 U S U S Patent 7 275 139 U S Patent 7318135 U S Patent 7 366 859 U S Patent 7 462 11 U S Patent 7 603 533 U S Patent 7 650 473 U S Patent 7 831 789 U S Patent 7 895 403 U S Patent 7 934 064 U S Patent 7 953 948 U S Patent 8 005 797 U S Patent 8 069 320 U S Patent 8 074 035 10 Glossary of Terms A Acronis Secure Zone A secure partition for storing backups p 238 ona hard disk Advantages enables recovery of a disk to the same disk where the disk s backup resides offers a cost effective and handy method for protecting data from software malfunction virus attack operator error eliminates the need for a separate media or network connection to back up or recover the data Limitations 1 The Acronis Secure Zone cannot be created on a dynamic disk 2 The Acronis Secure Zone is not available as a location for backups in the recovery environment when you start True Image 2013 from bootable rescue media through Acronis Startup Recovery Manager or BartPE Acronis Startup Recovery Manager A protection tool that allows to start standalone version of True Image 2013 at boot time when F11 is pressed Acronis Startup Recovery Manager eliminates the need for rescue media Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is especially useful for mobile users If a failure occurs the user reboots the machine hits F11 on prompt Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and perfo
37. 8 2 Recovering your system with the help of Acronis Universal Restore under rescue media In most cases it is preferable to use your bootable rescue media for system recovery The rescue media must include Acronis Universal Restore add on Therefore you need to re create the rescue media after installing the True Image 2013 Plus Pack 1 Make your rescue media the first boot device in BIOS See Arranging boot order in BIOS p 103 2 Boot from the rescue media and select True Image 3 Click the My Disks link below Recover on the Welcome screen to start the Recovery Wizard Then choose the backup of the system disk for recovery Because drive letters in the standalone True Image 2013 may differ from the way Windows identifies drives you may need to specify the path to the backup file In such a case click Browse and select the disk and folder that stores the backup 4 Choose Recover whole disks and partitions and select the Use Acronis Universal Restore check box Choose recovery method Recover whole disks and partitions Using Acronis Universal Restore you ore able to recover the image ola system volume on any computer regardless of what hardware configuration it has Recover chosen files and folders Select files and folders to recover tor the orginal disk backup 98 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 If the target hardware has a specific mass storage controller such as an SCSI RAID or Fibre Cha
38. AEN raian En Ea Ee En a 3 13 9 Backup validation option ccccscsescssessssecssessssssssssessesecsessessesseseseessessessesausaeeaseeseess 3 13 10 Backup reserve COPY esesesesesssssreseseseses 3 13 11 Removable media settings 3 13 12 Backup COMMENT eneee aaar Eaa A E eda aaia V aaa laa E Ea Eaa Ea Rai 3 13 13 Screenshot sSettihgs ccccscsesscssssscscsscsscsscsesssssssscsscsesseesessessscsesssssseesseseessesausaeeaseeseees 3 13 14 Error handling mennat a a a a e a a AAE AE t 3 13 15 C mputer SAUTAOWN asoson Sestucecssencebensiassncosvncencanlastaeacetancvlsecsbarsdagensautadbiesseveonevslictiaryanceenietisenaceetle 3 13 16 File level security settings for backup 3 13 17 WiIndOWS account eissenrei initia er O E KEE E E 3 13 18 Performance of backup operation ccccccssesscssscssesscsecssesecsesscsssescsessesessessessesesees 3 13 19 Notifications for backup operation ccccsessccsscesessesecssesessssssssesscsessessessessessseeeeees 3 13 20 Excluding items from backup ccescesesessecesceseseeeeseeescseeecseecseeesceesaesseeesesesaeseeacaesaeaseaeseesaeeesaseetaeeeeeeaees 3147 Validating DaGKUPS cc erreser ieres an e de iaia leds eaae a i aaia HEKERE 3 15 Consolidating backup versions ccsssccccccecsssesssececececeesecneaeeeeecsseeseaeaeseesesseesesaeaeeeeeeesseseaaeas 75 3 15 1 Archive to consolidate ProtectiOn ccccccecsscsseseeceeeesseesssesesseseeeeseeessesseaesececsee
39. Backup options p 58 When you set up the backup as needed you can run it immediately by clicking the Back up now button If you want to run the backup later or on a schedule click the down arrow to the right of the Back up now button and select Later in the drop down list to save the settings you have made 3 5 Backing up files and folders To back up files and or folders click Other backups on the Backup and recovery tab and then select File backup This opens the File Backup window File Backup o a m Configure file backup process o Source E Categories Name Size 4 Desktop v O My Pictures E A tester J J Public Pictures jE Computer a Network p Libraries p Documents P Music v D Pictures m gt Videos J Estimated backup size calculating Destination LAMY backups 186 45 GB of 186 54 GB f NTF Nf Schedule Off Turn on Backup scheme Custom The scheme is based o Backup name MyBackup Add comment File backup options Back up now gt Cancel Let s consider how to use this backup type for backing up a folder 1 Select the folder on the directory tree in the What to back up area The right side will show the folder contents with all the files and subfolders selected There you can unselect the files you do not need to back up if any Select a destination for backup you can leave the default destination or browse for a destination after
40. Choose a video mode you think best suitable for your monitor and type its number in the command line For instance typing 338 selects video mode 1600x1200x16 see the below figure 333 336 339 33C 33F 342 345 348 34B 34E 351 354 357 35A 35D 368 363 366 369 36C 36F 372 375 378 Enter 1024x768x16 1286x1624x16 1792x1344x16 1152x864x 1466x185 1856x135 1686x185 x16 1926x1266x16 28048x1536x16 328x248x16 66x16 84x16 888x16 66x16 1446x988x16 726x486x16 726x576x16 8886x488x16 12886x768x16 a video mode VESA VESA VESA U VESA VESA ar 1152x864x16 1466x1656x16 U A 1856x1392x16 326x488x32 1366x768x32 1686x18658x32 1926x1268x32 VESA 2648x1536x32 1286x868x32 1446x968x32 726x486x32 726x576x32 VESA VESA 854x488x8 12 720x8 1928x1888x8 1288x888x8 1448x988x8 36E 720x488x8 720x576x8 374 8606x486x8 377 1280x768x8 5 Wait until True Image 2013 starts and make sure that the quality of the Welcome screen display on your monitor suits you To test another video mode close True Image 2013 and repeat the above procedure After you find the optimal video mode for your hardware you can create a new bootable rescue media that will automatically select that video mode To do this start Acronis Media Builder select the required media components and type the mode number with the Ox prefix 0x338 in our instance in the command line at the Bootable media startup parameter
41. Disk and partition backup This feature allows you to protect your computer by creating backups of your partitions including the system one and whole disks Online Backup This feature allows you to store your data in the secure Acronis Cloud which is accessible via the Internet If the backup list already includes an online backup this item changes to Edit Online Backup settings because you can run only one online backup at a time File backup This feature allows you to back up your files and folders Other backups E mail backup This feature allows you to back up your e mail messages and settings Nonstop Backup This feature continuously protects your partitions and files Create bootable media If your computer cannot start use bootable rescue media to run the standalone version of True Image 2013 and recover your system from a previously created system partition backup Browse for backup Click this item to browse for backups on your computer and add them to the backup list This may be useful when you have backups created by a previous Acronis True Image Home version which are not shown in the backup list Recover Click this item to recover data from your backups and then select the backup that contains the required data Show only my favorite backups ar This icon filters the backups which you have marked as favorite Expand all backup boxes This icon expands all collapsed backup boxes This
42. E E E AE E ent S 114 5 7 1 How to sync data between your COMPUTETS cccsessesssscesesscssessesssssssessesessessessesssssesssseseeeeesaeesesseeassesers 115 5 7 2 How to sync with a local folder s s sssensssnsssesesesssserenesesesesrusasasisrsrsrsrsrerenenesesesrarasastsrsrsrsrsrenenasesesrnnnnasanen 115 5 7 3 How to sync data with other people s ssssessssssssssresesesesesrssasesisrsrsrsrsrenenenesesrsrarasasisisrsrsrsrenenasesesrnennanenen 116 5 8 Synchronizing a mobile device a a ea eaer e Taaa eA Aa Ei iias 118 5 8 1 How to install True Image app on your mobile deviC s sssnsssssssesesesssesesensnsisisrsrsrsrsrenenesesesrnrnnnseses 118 5 9 Versions of synchronized files ccescecsecesssneecesseeeeceeseececeseeesececeeeseceseeesecsseeeaeeseeeaaeceeeeaaees 119 5 9 1 Reverting to a previous file version cccccccessesssssescsscsscsscssesecssessesessesecssesecsessesaesaeaeseeseseeseesausaesassaseneers 119 5 10 How to clean up your space ON Acronis Cloud cccceessssececececessesssaeeeeeeeseesesneaeeeeeesseeseaaeas 119 5 11 How to recover a deleted file 00 eccesceccsssneceesscececseeeecseeeeeececseeeeceseeeeecssseeeecsseeaeesseeaaees 121 5212 HOW to share TORES oinei AAEE RE A OAT NEOR 122 5 13 How to create public links to files and folders eee ecsessececececessesseaececeeesessestsaeeeeeessesseaeas 123 5 14 How to unlink a device from your ACCOUNL ccccccccecessesssnececeeecessesn
43. Ea ETAN Res 68 Removable Media SettingS cccccccssssssscecececsssessaeeeeeesesssssseaeeeeeessseeees 68 BaCkUpCOMMENE reises aene ernea Ee AN EKE EA a EEEE Ea REEKSE ITAA E ea 69 Screenshot settihg Seisin ten eaa ee EEEE A EEES EEan 69 Enor ailing smrti neee e E E a EEEa RESKONT O anats 70 Computer sSNUtAOWM esset kisenes eaei sn eei Ses peeigeeteeees ee a eieciwendeSecees 70 File level security settings for DACKUP cccceseessssececeeesessssseaeeeeeeeseesees 71 Windows ACCOUNT osi raare ni anra AEA A A AARS 71 Performance of backup operation cc cccccsssceseesseceeeesseceeeeseeeeessseeeeeees 71 Notifications for backup OPeratiON cccceccecsscesssecseeecsseeesseesssseessnees 72 Excluding items from DaCkUp ccccccssssececeeeceesesseaececeeesesseseaeeeeeeeseesees 73 3 13 1 Backup schemes Backup schemes along with the scheduler help you to set up your backup strategy The schemes allow you to optimize backup storage space usage improve data storage reliability and automatically delete the obsolete backup versions Backup scheme defines the following parameters Backup methods that will be used to create backup versions full differential or incremental Sequence of the backup versions created using different methods Version cleanup rules Disk Backup Options bojes Backup scheme Advanced Performance Notifications Exclusions Custom scheme x Save as Which scheme to choose
44. High the backup or recovery process will run faster but the performance of other programs will be reduced Be aware that selecting this option may result in 100 CPU usage by True Image 2013 Network connection speed limit If you frequently back up data to network drives or FTP think of limiting the network bandwidth used by True Image 2013 You can specify the network backup data transfer speed by choosing the following Limit transfer rate to enter the bandwidth limit for transferring backup data in kilobytes per second 3 13 19 Notifications for backup operation Sometimes a backup or recovery procedure can last an hour or longer True Image 2013 can notify you when it is finished via e mail The program can also duplicate messages issued during the operation or send you the full operation log after operation completion By default all notifications are disabled Free disk space threshold You may want to be notified when the free space on the backup storage becomes less than the specified threshold value If after starting a backup True Image 2013 finds out that the free space in the selected backup location is already less than the specified value the program will not begin the actual backup process and will immediately inform you by displaying an appropriate message The message offers you three choices to ignore it and proceed with the backup to browse for another location for the backup or to cancel the backup If the
45. June 2011 13 51 40 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Acronis Nonstop Backup Service 29 June 2011 13 51 26 1 2 3 4 Syncs All 29 June 2011 13 51 25 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 o o By default all logs are selected for viewing The right pane shows all major log entries in the collapsed state To expand a log entry for viewing individual log items double click it To collapse the expanded log entry double click it again You can scroll the log entries using the scroll bar on the right side of the window For some error events the log can have the How to solve the problem link Clicking the link takes you to an article of the Acronis Knowledge Base which may help you to solve the problem To view the logs for a desired period select the period from the drop down list You can select Today Last week Last month and Custom To view all logs select All To view the logs for a specific time interval select Custom and specify the desired interval You can enter the desired period start and end dates directly into the fields You can also select a time interval on the calendar To select click the start date and then the end date while keeping the Shift key pressed To view the logs for a specific event source select the desired event source in the dropdown list below Event source You can select the following event sources All shows all logged events All backups shows logs
46. OS or the Acronis component If you set for example 10 sec for Acronis rescue media the standalone True Image 2013 will launch 10 seconds after the menu is displayed m Click Next to continue 8 2 1 2 Bootable media startup parameters Here you can set bootable media startup parameters in order to configure rescue media boot options for better compatibility with different hardware Several options are available nousb nomouse noapic etc These parameters are provided for advanced users If you encounter any hardware compatibility problems while testing boot from the rescue media it may be best to contact Acronis Technical Support To add a startup parameter Enter a command into the Parameters field Having specified the startup parameters click Next to continue Additional parameters that can be applied prior to booting Linux kernel Description The following parameters can be used to load Linux kernel in a special mode acpi off Disables ACPI and may help with a particular hardware configuration noapic Disables APIC Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller and may help with a particular hardware configuration nousb Disables loading of USB modules nousb2 Disables USB 2 0 support USB 1 1 devices still work with this option This option allows using some USB drives in USB 1 1 mode if they do not work in USB 2 0 mode quiet This parameter is enabled by default and the startup messages are n
47. System disk I Acroni 1 9 2012 10 06 C Users tester AppData Local Temp Acro System Ch a B Acroni 1 9 2012 10 06 C Users tester AppData Local Temp Acro System disk L Acroni LKB 4 20 2012 11 0 SYNC 2013 Acronis True Image Home 201 73468A8BE8D8B647B26D1628 L Acroni LKB 4 20 2012 11 0 C Documents and Settings Administrator TESTER test L Acroni 1KB 4 20 2012 11 0 SYNC 2013 Acronis True Image Home 201 73468A8BE8D8B647B26D1628 L Acroni LKB 4 20 2012 11 0 C Documents and Settings Administrator TESTER test L Acroni 1KB 4 20 2012 11 0 SYNC A 2013 Acronis True Image Home 201 7346848BE8D8B647B26D1628 L Acroni LKB 4 20 2012 11 0 C Documents and Settings Administrator TESTER test L Acroni 1KB 4 20 2012 11 0 SYNC A2013 Acronis True Image Home 201 7346848BE8D8B647B26D1628 L Acroni LKB 4 20 2012 11 0 CADocuments and Settings Administrator TESTER test M By default True Image 2013 performs the search in all the sources where it can search information That is it searches files in all backups and their versions on all local storage devices True Image 2013 cannot perform search on network shares Acronis Cloud and devices that are recognized by Windows as Devices with removable storage The screen shows results of searches for files and folders in tib backups Double clicking on a filename opens the file You can recover the file by right clicking on its filename
48. Therefore it is recommended that you re create a full backup after disk defragmentation If you lose an incremental backup or it becomes corrupted all later incremental backups will be unusable 3 3 Backup file naming By default the program creates for each task a separate folder with task s name and then stores in the folder all backups for that task For example D My Backups System A backup file name has the following attributes name of the task type of the backup full inc diff full incremental differential number of backup if applicable in the form of b number of slice if applicable in the form of s number of volume if applicable in the form of v macros if applicable can be in any part of a name for example in the beginning or in the end If part of a name is not used the backup has only one volume this part is not added for example if the backup does not have volumes it will nothave the v suffix The b and s suffixes are always present Thus a backup name may look the following way note that 24 05 2012 in the following example is an optional macros my_documents_full_b3_s1_v1 24 05 2012 tib my_documents_full_b3_s1_v2 24 05 2012 tib my_documents_full_b3_s1_v3 24 05 2012 tib my_documents_full_b3_s1 v4 24 05 2012 tib my_documents_inc_b3_s2_v1 26 05 2012 tib my_documents_inc_b3_ s2_v2 26 05 2012 tib my_documents_inc_b3_s2_v3 26 05 2012 tib You may use numbers in the
49. To search for a backed up file you need to recover type the filename or part of its name in the search field on the main menu bar If the search is successful the program will open Acronis Backup Explorer and show the found file and backup s containing the file 1 1 9 3 Synchronization tab The Synchronization tab allows you to manage all aspects of your data synchronization process create new syncs turn the existing syncs on and off change their settings delete unneeded syncs and so on Every created sync is represented by a box similar to backup boxes A sync box contains short information about the corresponding sync process and allows you to manage this process Ariraelmage 2013 by Acrone cfnm 4 9 Acronis Getstarted Backup and recovery Synchronization Tools and utilities A vivolkhonsky 10 gmail com B B i eet New sync Sync local folders Manage shared Zt Sort by syncs 4 na Pictures Fold E Backup CAUsers tester Pictures 908 17 MB m M P B SyncMe older CAUsers tester SyncMe TESTER SETSETST Acronis Cloud Today at 1 25 AM 143 57 MB Sync toolbar This area contains the following items New sync allows you to select a folder to synchronize and send an invitation to the computer you want to synchronize your data with Sync local folders allows you to select two local folders to synchronize Manage shared syncs opens the Web page where you can manage your share
50. Try mode This may come in handy not only for those who for example like to play a lot of games but for professional software testers as well to use on their testing machines Web privacy Suppose you do not want anybody to know which Web sites you have visited or which pages you have opened we all have the right to privacy But the problem is that to make your Web surfing more comfortable and fast the system stores this information and much more cookies you have received search engine queries you have made URLs you have typed etc in special hidden files And such information is not deleted completely when you clear your temporary Internet files delete cookies clear history of the recently opened Web pages using the browser s tools So snoopers may be able to view the information using special software Well there are third party programs that can wipe all your Internet activity tracks but most of them will cost you money and time required for learning to use them Now you have a much easier way to use the Try amp Decide feature Just make a couple of clicks to turn on the Try mode before launching your Internet browser When you turn on the Try mode the program creates a virtual disk While the Try mode works all changes to your system including those made by the system itself will be saved on this virtual disk So you can surf the Web as you please After you have finished using the browser make a couple more clicks to dis
51. Upon event execution parameters You can set up the following parameters for the Upon event operation execution Event User logon the operation will be executed each time the current user logs on to the OS User logoff the operation will be executed each time the current user logs off the OS System startup the operation will be executed at every OS startup Additionally you can set a time delay to start backup after the system startup For example to start backup 20 minutes after system startup type 20 in the appropriate box System shutdown the operation will be executed at every computer shutdown or reboot This options is unavailable for e mail backups Additional condition fyou want to run an operation only at the first occurrence of the event on the current day select the Once a day only check box Description of the Advanced settings see in Scheduling p 157 7 8 Searching backups and their content In this section SG E EEE E ES Vere orale eis a ee acca 160 Using Windows Search with True Image 2013 ceeccesessteeeeeeeeees 161 7 8 1 Searching In addition to the ability to explore backups True Image 2013 provides search for files in your backups Enter a search string into the Search field at the top right of the True Image 2013 window You will be taken to the Acronis Backup Explorer screen The program shows search results True Image 2013 by Acronis o ke
52. a Saved Games File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 04 PM a Ji Users 7 J Searches File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 04 PM Default 7 a SyncMe File Folder 6 5 2012 5 56 28 AM d Public 7 a Test File Folder 6 5 2012 10 01 17 PM I Bb tester F Li Videos File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 03 PM All Users iv PrintHood File Folder 7 5 2011 5 13 25 AM E Defaul F E Recent File Folder 7 5 2011 5 13 25 AM JI windows A F SendTo File Folder 7 5 2011 5 13 25 AM b tester Selected to recover amp Bic roice Neen 1467 files and 206 folders L9 6B SA Recover This year S3un Tue l ELE Week ago The majority of user interface elements located on this tab are described in the Disks and partitions tab section Here we describe the items specific for the tab When you click an item short information on this item is displayed under the browser area The set of displayed parameters depends on the item s type Clicking the View versions link opens the View Versions window with a list of all versions of the file in the backup You can recover a desired version by its backup time By double clicking on a file in the right hand area you will recover the file to a temporary folder Then True Image 2013 will open the file using the associated application Time line Usually the time line at the bottom of Acronis Backup Explorer screen shows information on the backup versions stored in the selected backup The time line provides easy navigation through backup version
53. a way that True Image 2013 will keep daily backups for the last 30 days and weekly backups until all Nonstop Backup data destination space is used Note that if Acronis Nonstop Backup protects a non system partition and no changes have occurred for 5 minutes since the last backup the next scheduled backup will be skipped Acronis Nonstop Backup will wait for a significant data change and will create a new incremental backup only when such change has been detected In those cases the actual time interval will exceed 5 minutes In addition if for instance you are working in Word and do not use the Save operation for an hour changes in the Word document will not be backed up every five minutes because True Image 2013 checks file changes on the disk and not in the memory The consolidation will be performed every day between midnight and 01 00 AM The first consolidation will take place after the Nonstop Backup has been working for at least 24 hours For example you have turned on the Nonstop Backup at 10 00 AM on July 12 In this case the first consolidation will be performed between 00 00 and 01 00 AM on July 14 Then the program will consolidate the data every day at the same time If your computer is turned off between 00 00 and 01 00 AM the consolidation will start when you turn the computer on If you turn off Nonstop Backup for some time the consolidation will start after you turn it on again You may think that at these backup rates the
54. and recover a disk partition on a computer running any Intel or AMD based PC operating system including Linux Note that the Intel based Apple Macintosh is not supported 1 1 6 3 Supported file systems FAT16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 ReiserFS Linux SWAP If a file system is not supported or is corrupted True Image 2013 can copy data using a sector by sector approach The Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 ReiserFS and Linux SWAP file systems are supported only for disk or partition backup recovery operations You cannot use True Image 2013 for file level operations with these file systems file backup recovery search as well as image mounting and file recovering from images You also cannot perform backups to disks or partitions with these file systems 1 1 6 4 Supported storage media Hard disk drives Solid State Drives SSD Networked storage devices FTP servers CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R including double layer DVD R DVD RW DVD RAM BD R BD RE USB 1 1 2 0 3 0 FireWire IEEE 1394 and PC card storage devices True Image 2013 does not support the following dynamic volume types Mirrored and RAID 5 There are some additional limitations on operations with dynamic and GPT disks To perform operations with dynamic disks you need separately purchased True Image 2013 Plus Pack Creation of Acronis Secure Zone on dynamic disks is not supported Recovery of a dynamic volume as a dy
55. any compression which may significantly increase the backup file size Normal the recommended data compression level set by default High higher backup file compression level takes more time to create a backup Maximum maximum backup compression but takes a long time to create a backup The optimal data compression level depends on the type of files stored in the backup For example even maximum compression will not significantly reduce the backup size if the backup contains essentially compressed files like jpg pdf or mp3 Operation priority Changing the priority of a backup or recovery process can make it run faster or slower depending on whether you raise or lower the priority but it can also adversely affect the performance of other running programs The priority of any process running in a system determines the amount of CPU usage and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the operation priority will free more resources for other CPU tasks Increasing backup or recovery priority may speed up the process by taking resources from the other currently running processes The effect will depend on total CPU usage and other factors You can set up the operation priority Low enabled by default the backup or recovery process will run slower but the performance of other programs will be increased Normal the backup or recovery process will have the equal priority with other processes
56. backup Clone settings clones the current backup settings when you need to create several similar backups Clone the backup settings and then introduce the required changes Move click to move all the backup files to another location The subsequent backup versions will be saved to the new location If you change the backup destination by editing the backup settings only new backup versions will be saved to the new location The earlier backup versions will remain in the old location Remove from the list removes the current backup from the backup list shown in the My backups area This operation also turns off the scheduling of the removed backup if a schedule was set but it does not delete the backup files Clean up available for Nonstop Backup only opens the Cleanup dialog box where you can delete the backup versions you no longer need The backup chain will not be corrupted Open Web application available for Online Backup only opens the Acronis Cloud application In case of Nonstop Backup and Online backup the Operations menu will have less items The Operations menu of backups created on another computer and added to the backup list without importing the backup settings will also have less items Backup and recovery toolbar The toolbar at the top of the Backup and recovery tab contains the most frequently used commands for creating new backups managing the backup list validating backups etc
57. backup was created If you try to recover data from a password protected backup the program will ask for the password in a special window allowing access only to authorized users 3 13 7 Pre Post commands for backup You can specify commands or even batch files that will be automatically executed before and after the backup procedure For example you may want to start stop certain Windows processes or check your data before starting backup To specify commands batch files Select a command to be executed before the backup process starts in the Pre command field To create a new command or select a new batch file click the Edit button Select a command to be executed after the backup process ends in the Post command field To create a new command or select a new batch file click the Edit button Please do not try to execute interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause These are not supported 3 13 7 1 Edit user command for backup You can specify user commands to be executed before or after the backup procedure Inthe Command field type in a command or select it from the list Click to select a batch file Inthe Working directory field type in a path for command execution or select it from the list of previously entered paths Inthe Arguments field enter or select command execution arguments from the list Disabling the Do not perform operations until the comm
58. chances of your computer s recovery you must test that your computer can boot from the rescue media In addition you must check that the rescue media recognizes all your computer s devices such as the hard drives the mouse the keyboard and network adapter If you purchased a boxed version of the product that has a bootable CD please test this CD To test the rescue media If you use external drives for storing your backups you must attach the drives before booting from the rescue CD Otherwise the program might not detect them 1 142 Configure your computer to enable booting from the rescue media Then make your rescue media device CD ROM DVD ROM drive or USB stick the first boot device See Arranging boot order in BIOS If you have a rescue CD press any key to start booting from the CD when you see the prompt Press any key to boot from CD If you do not press a key within five seconds you will need to restart the computer After the boot menu appears choose True Image If your wireless mouse does not work try to replace it with a wired one The same recommendation applies to the keyboard If you do not have a spare mouse or keyboard contact Acronis Support They will build a custom rescue CD that will have drivers for your models of the mouse and keyboard Please be aware that finding the appropriate drivers and making the custom rescue CD may take some time Furthermore this may be impossible for some mo
59. clear the Hidden files and folders check box to enable disable overwriting of all hidden files and folders Select clear the System files and folders check box to enable disable overwriting of all system files and folders Select clear the More recent files and folders check box to enable disable overwriting of new files and folders Click Add specific files and folders to manage the list of custom files and folders that you do not want to overwrite To disable overwriting of specific files click the Add button to create an exclusion criterion While specifying the criteria you can use the common Windows wildcard characters For example to preserve all files with extension exe you can add exe Adding My exe will preserve all exe files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my To delete a criterion for example added by mistake click the Delete icon to the right of the criterion 4 14 7 Performance of recovery operation On the Performance tab you can configure the following settings Operation priority Changing the priority of a backup or recovery process can make it run faster or slower depending on whether you raise or lower the priority but it can also adversely affect the performance of other running programs The priority of any process running in a system determines the amount of CPU usage and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the operation priority will
60. click the Proceed button the selected partitions will be wiped permanently So the button is disabled until you select the Wipe the selected partitions irreversibly check box Click the Proceed button to start the listed operations Click the Options button to perform the optional steps Click the Cancel button to exit the wizard without performing any operations 8 8 1 5 Disk Editor read only mode Acronis DriveCleanser offers you another useful capability to estimate the results of executing a data destruction method on a hard disk or partition To view the state of your cleaned up disks or partitions click the Tools amp Utilities tab Then click the View current state of your disks link and choose the partition whose cleaning results you wish to view This opens an integrated Acronis Disk Editor in read only mode Different algorithms offer various levels of confidential data destruction Thus the picture you might see on a disk or partition depends on the data destruction method But what you actually see are disk sectors filled with either zeros or random symbols Acronis Disk Editor read only mode disk 1 sectors 337 367 10 104 884 7l Disk Edit Yiew Search Help P V a Q Cyrillic DOS 866 wi 37 A 6 wl LI m 6 tqa 4 re ere ams g g p w4 fQ fJ e3 Y E ofrx g gf ant l fnew l gf g7 E4 gfHP g J E gfH rBwI fQ fJIyesfY E orx IP ORT
61. create two vhd files corresponding to those physical drives True Image 2013 cannot convert tib files containing images of spanned and striped dynamic volumes 8 11 1 2 Converting Windows backup Windows Vista and Windows 7 users can convert vhd files created by Windows Backup into Acronis backups This may be needed if you want to keep the earlier Windows Backup files but decide to convert them into tib files to save storage space The converted tib files are smaller than the corresponding vhd files due to compression Do not move vhd files from the folder to where they were saved by Windows Backup by default the folder has the name WindowslmageBackup Otherwise the operating system may be unbootable after recovery of the system partition from the converted tib file The virtual to physical conversion is done as follows 1 Click Windows backup conversion on the Tools and utilities tab a 7 Qv Convert to Acronis Backup Required steps Select a Windows backup Archive selection fuchie location Name Created Com Rating Method Path Windows Backups a B Partition D Partition D 7 1 2011 6 49 19 PM Akk kk Fullbackup E My 4 m r Path E My backups Partition_D vhd Browse Next gt Cancel Select the vhd file to convert Specify the path to the tib file to be created By default the converted file will be created in the same location as the fil
62. custom scheme with only full backups This is because the program cannot consolidate backups stored on optical media If you want to run the backup on a schedule click the Turn on link to set up a schedule for more information see Scheduling p 157 To run the backup on the schedule click the down arrow to the right of the Back up now button and select Later in the drop down list The backup with the settings you have made will run according to the schedule You can also start the backup manually later on the Backup and recovery tab The program allows you to back up files by categories For more information see Data categories p 45 You can exclude hidden or system files and folders from backup as well as files matching the criteria you specify For more information see Excluding items from backup p 73 3 5 1 Data categories The program allows you to back up files by categories When selecting the file category ies you automatically select for backup all files of associated types found on the computer s hard drives You can use the following default categories Video Music Images Finance E Books and Documents Furthermore you can add any number of custom categories containing files and folders The new categories will be saved and displayed along with the above You can change the contents of any custom or default file category edit the category or delete it The default file categories cannot be deleted To add a cus
63. data destruction method The data destruction methods are described in detail in Hard Disk Wiping Methods p 219 of this guide Clicking Proceed after you select the desired method will start the operation execution if the Proceed button is unselectable click Finish on the sidebar and select the Destroy the selected files and folders irreversibly box to enable the Proceed button 8 8 2 3 Shredding summary The final window displays a brief summary the list of selected files and or folders to be destroyed and data destruction method used Note that after you click the Proceed button the selected files and folders will be destroyed permanently So the button is disabled until you select the Destroy the selected files and folders irreversibly check box Click the Proceed button to destroy the selected files and or folders permanently Click the Options button to perform the optional steps Click the Cancel button to exit the wizard without performing any operations Shredding operation progress The operation status window reports about the state of the current operation The progress bar indicates the level of completion of the selected operation 212 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 In some cases the operation may take a long time to be completed If this is the case select the Shutdown the computer after completion check box When the operation finishes True Image 2013 will turn the computer off 8 8 3 S
64. disk and the SSD Mount the SSD into the slot where the hard disk was For some SSD brands you may need to insert the SSD into a PCI Express slot Use Windows DiskPart utility to create a partition on the SSD Press Win R or select Start gt Run and type cmd to open the command line prompt then type diskpart select disk N where N is the number of your SSD clean create partition primary align 1024 active format fs ntfs quick exit exit Switch off the computer and remove your system hard disk Boot from your Acronis rescue media Validate the backup to make sure that it can be used for recovery To do this click Recovery on the left pane and select the backup Right click select Validate Archive in the shortcut menu and then click Proceed After the validation finishes right click the backup and select Recover in the shortcut menu Choose Recover whole disks and partitions at the Recovery method step and then click Next 10 Select the system disk at the What to recover step 11 Click New location and then select the SSD as the new location for your system disk then click Accept 12 At the next step click Proceed to start recovery 13 After the recovery is complete exit the standalone version of True Image 2013 14 Try to boot from the SSD and then make sure that Windows and applications work correctly If your system hard disk also contains a hidden recovery or diagnostic partition as is quite often the
65. file and e mail recovery processes respectively After you installed the application all options are set to the initial values You can change them for your current recovery operation only or for all further recovery operations as well Select the Save the settings as default check box to apply the modified settings to all further recovery operations by default Note that disk recovery options file recovery options and e mail recovery options are fully independent and you should configure them separately If you want to reset all the modified options to their initial values that were set after the product installation click the Reset to initial settings button In this section Disk recovery mode 2 ccceceessssececeeeseesesaeeeceeeceseesenaeceeeessesseseeaeeeeeesseeeees 105 Pre Post commands for recovery cccsscecesscecsseceeseceeseccsseeeesaeeecaeeceees 105 Validation OPtion cccccsessssccececesseseseeaecececeseeseceaeceseceseesssneaeeeeeesssesees 105 COMPUTER restart erise cishdsccensncvectssadscecbsasseneushdseuessaavestesideccessateees 106 File recovery OPTIONS cccssssccececsseesessececeeecessesenaeceeeessesseseeaeenseeeseeees 106 Overwrite file options ccccsccsssssceceeecessesseaeceeeeecessessaaeeeeeessesseseaaeess 106 Performance of recovery operation ccccccccssesssseceeeeesessesseaeeeeeessessees 107 Notifications for recovery operation sssssssssrresssssserrnrrssssrrerrnsess
66. folder 77 a ii Computer Name Size Type Date E Desktop a My_system tee i 3420837 KB TIB file 18 Aug 10 11 43 40 Lib adm Mysystem l 3421060 KB TIB file 18 Aug 10 11 51 16 E My Documents Mysystemq 2 10996 KB TIB file 18 Aug 10 12 12 38 3 Floppy Disk Drive A My_systema 3 13779 KB TIB file 18 Aug 10 12 15 34 amp Local Disk C My_systemay4 13821 KB TIB file 18 Aug 10 12 16 34 3 New Volume D My_systema s 16796 KB TIB file 18 Aug 10 12 18 52 4 ce New Volume E J My backups amp 3 DVD Drive F MTiX_W Gu Network File name My_system X l Add date date x Save as type Acronis backup tib X The left pane shows the storage locations available on your computer After you select a suitable location assign a name for the file that will contain the remaining data being backed up You can enter the name manually for example tail_end tib or use the file name generator a button to the right of the line Then click OK and True Image 2013 will complete the backup If backup versions belonging to the same backup chain have been saved to different destinations True Image 2013 may prompt you for the locations of previous backup versions during data recovery This may occur when the selected backup version does not contain the files you want to recover or contains only a part of them This may also happen when you recover a backup that was split on the fly 3 11 Adding an existing backup to the list
67. folders to shred File selection ats Delete Il Create new folder m My Computer Name Date Type ja gt Ele Floppy Disk Drive A a d LANGUAGE 3 11 2010 1 File folder a a amp Local Disk C V CABRK DLL 1 1 2007 6 5 Application exter gt A p SRecycle Bin Tl 3 CGLPT9X VXD 1 1 2007 6 5 Virtual device dri gt EI Documents and Setting E CGLPTNT SYS 1 1 2007 6 5 System file gt FLUE Perttogs V DEFAULT BAR 1 1 2007 0 0 BAR File l l a Program Files 7 default br1 3 11 2010 1 BRI File 7 7 _ descript ion 1 1 2007 6 5 ION File D ial ProgramData om pa V FRERES32 DLL 1 1 2007 6 5 Application exter D op ProgramDataTechSmith V G HISTORY 1 1 2007 6 5 Text Document Hk Recovery a a V KEYBOARD 1 1 2007 6 5 Text Document p Eg System Volume Informs i O nio BaR 1 1 2007 0 0 BAR File gt IJt totalemd 7 REGISTER 1 1 2007 6 5 Rich Text Docum D EI Users E7 _ SFXHEAD SFX 1 1 2007 6 5 SFX File DEE Windows 7 EI SHARE_NT 1 1 2007 6 5 Application gt Clc New Volume D 7 BJ TCUNINST 1 1 2007 6 5 Application gt El New Volume E V TCUNINST WUL 1 1 2007 6 5 WUL File Z TCUNZUB DLL 1 1 2007 6 5 Application exter E ATATA chan IMINNIEE Annliestinn h 4 m tja m r Next gt Cancel 8 8 2 2 Data destruction method selection File Shredder utilizes a number of the most popular data destruction methods Here you need to select the desired
68. for all your backups All syncs shows logs for all your synchronization Backup validation shows logs for the validation operation m lt Sync name gt shows logs for a specific synchronization you select by its name lt Backup name gt shows logs for a specific backup you select by its name Etc The buttons with up and down arrows at the top and bottom of the calendar allow you to browse the months being shown in the calendar The color marks in the calendar show information about the days when operations completed with errors red marks warnings yellow marks and success green marks The current day is highlighted Clicking a marked day shows the logs for that date To delete a log entry select it right click and select Delete in the shortcut menu To delete all log entries select Delete all You can also save a log entry to file by selecting Save To save all logs to file select Save all The three buttons to the left control event filters the white cross in the red circle filters error events the exclamation mark in a yellow triangle filters warnings and the green check mark filters information message events To reset all the filters to their default values click Reset all filters At the upper right corner there are the Save all to file and Delete all buttons They do the same operations as the corresponding shortcut menu items 9 7 Acronis Customer Experience Program Acronis Customer Experience
69. free more resources for other CPU tasks Increasing backup or recovery priority may speed up the process by taking resources from the other currently running processes The effect will depend on total CPU usage and other factors You can set up the operation priority Low enabled by default the backup or recovery process will run slower but the performance of other programs will be increased Normal the backup or recovery process will have the equal priority with other processes High the backup or recovery process will run faster but the performance of other programs will be reduced Be aware that selecting this option may result in 100 CPU usage by True Image 2013 4 14 8 Notifications for recovery operation Sometimes a backup or recovery procedure can last an hour or longer True Image 2013 can notify you when it is finished via e mail The program can also duplicate messages issued during the operation or send you the full operation log after operation completion By default all notifications are disabled Free disk space threshold You may want to be notified when the free space on the backup storage becomes less than the specified threshold value If after starting a backup True Image 2013 finds out that the free space in the selected backup location is already less than the specified value the program will not begin the actual backup process and will immediately inform you by displaying an appropriate message The
70. free space becomes less than the specified value while the backup is being run the program will display the same message and you will have to make the same decisions To set the free disk space threshold Select the Show notification message on insufficient free disk space check box In the Size box type or select a threshold value and select a unit of measure True Image 2013 can monitor free space on the following storage devices Local hard drives USB cards and drives Network shares SMB NFS The message will not be displayed if the Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode check box is selected in the Error handling settings This option cannot be enabled for FTP servers and CD DVD drives E mail notification You can specify an e mail account that will be used for notifying you of the backup process To specify the e mail settings Select the Send e mail notifications about the operation state check box Enter the e mail address in the E mail address field You can enter several e mail addresses in a semicolon delimited format Enter the outgoing mail server SMTP in the Outgoing mail server SMTP field Set the port of the outgoing mail server By default the port is set to 25 Enter the user name in the User name field Enter the password in the Password field To check whether your settings are correct click the Send test message button Additional notification
71. gets stolen To unlink a device Go to yourAcronis account page at http www acronis com my index html 1 Log into your account 2 Click Synchronization in the left hand side of the screen The Computers tab in the Manage synchronization area is displayed by default 4 Acronis c Business Virtualization Home and Home Office Partners Support Company My Account My Account Manage synchronization Personal Profile id Computers Shared synchronizations Ki My Orders The following computers are linked to your account M My Products amp Downloads E Computer name Windows logon My Support Requests GI RU TW VVOLKHOSK VVOLKHONSKY Uniink Online Backup GH TESTER SETSETST TESTER Unlink for Home for Business i Product Registration 3 Click Unlink to the right of the name of the computer you want to unlink 4 Click OK in the confirmation message Unlinking the computer Removes it from the Computers list Removes it from all syncs in which the computer participates Blocks the sync participant certificate 5 15 How to revoke an invitation to share a sync You can revoke an invitation to share a sync you sent to another person This can be done anytime Revoking does not depend on whether the person already accepted the invitation or not This operation is performed on Acronis Web site Go to your Acronis account page at http www acronis com my index h
72. image i Backup settings transfer 3 Disk management Create a file containing backup settings and move it to another computer Add new disk Create partitions on your new hard disk drive to be able to use it in Import backup settings Windows Export backup settings Acronis Extended Capacity Manager Use your more than 2TB capacity hard drive even if your OS does not support it View current state of your disks as Backup conversion a Image mounting y Convert an Acronis backup to a Windows backup and vice versa This tool allows you to access an image as an ordinary disk Acronis backup conversion Mount image Windows backup conversion Unmount image 1 1 9 5 Wizards and notification area icons When you use the available True Image 2013 tools and utilities the program will in many cases employ wizards to guide you through the operations Wizards have a sidebar listing all the steps both required and optional needed for completing the operation For example see the Manage Acronis Secure Zone wizard screen shot below Manage crore Secure one Wand E Manage Acronis Secure Zone Wizard ESS Summary V Space allocation Location Disk 3 Size 5 426 GB Finish Password None The current disk state 16GB New Volume E al 16 00 GB NTFS After iv 16GB New Volume E ACRONIS SZ 10 57 GB NTFS 5 425 GB NTFS B Primary Logical Dynamic
73. incremental backup to such a backup the program will ask for the password in a special window allowing access only to authorized users In this case you must specify the correct password for the selected backup file Only then will you be able to proceed with the selected operation 4 13 Arranging boot order in BIOS BIOS has a built in setup utility for initial computer configuration To enter it you have to press a certain key combination Del F1 Ctrl Alt Esc Ctri Esc or some other depending on your BIOS during the POST power on self test sequence that starts immediately after you turn your computer on Usually the message with the required key combination is displayed during the startup test Pressing this combination takes you to the menu of the setup utility that is included in your BIOS The menu can differ in appearance sets of items and their names depending on the BIOS manufacturer The most widely known BIOS makers for PC motherboards are Award Phoenix and AMI Moreover while items in the standard setup menu are mostly the same for various BlOSes items of the extended or advanced setup heavily depend on the computer and BIOS version Among other things the BIOS menu allows you to adjust the boot order Computer BIOS allows booting operating systems not only from hard disks but also from CD ROMs DVD ROMs and other devices Changing the boot order may be required for example to make your rescue media CD DVD or USB s
74. invitation to the sync If the owner revokes the invitation synchronization stops and the sync box is removed from the sync lists on the Web and in the True Image 2013 main window If you do not want to participate in a sync anymore you can simply unsync the corresponding folder In this case you will be able to resume synchronization later To leave the sync once and for all 1 Goto your Acronis account page at http www acronis com my index html 2 Login to your account 3 Click Synchronization in the left hand side of the screen 125 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 Click the Shared synchronizations tab in the Manage synchronization area Ji Acronis rc Business Virtualization Home and Home Office Partners Support Company My Account MyAccount Manage synchronization Personal Profile Computers Shared synchronizations My Orders These are synchronizations that you share with others Synchronizations Mine 1 Joined 2 My Products amp Downloads Synchronization My Support Mine 1 Requests Online Backup My project 1 Remove all participants forH 3 RAAR Joined 2 for Business iy Vacation Leave Y Product Registration Product Updates iy New project Leave Subscriptions 5 Select under the Joined heading the synchronization you want to leave and click Leave to the right of the sync name 6 Click OK in the confirmati
75. is installed from its own setup file True Image 2013 must be installed on your computer before the True Image 2013 Plus Pack can be installed True Image 2013 Plus Pack adds the Acronis Universal Restore option for use during recovery True Image 2013 Plus Pack also installs Acronis WinPE ISO builder and provides support for dynamic disks Here are the features of True Image 2013 Plus Pack in more details Support of dynamic disks operations with dynamic disks expand the range of hard drive configurations supported by True Image 2013 Dynamic disks offer greater flexibility for volume management and may provide benefits in computers with more than one hard drive Users of True Image 2013 Plus Pack have the Universal Restore feature available to them Acronis Universal Restore lets you restore an image of a Windows operating system to a different hardware environment You can restore information on independent computers regardless of the hardware used on the independent computer This may come in handy for example after replacing a damaged motherboard or when deciding to migrate your system from a desktop to a laptop For more information see Acronis Universal Restore p 100 Acronis WinPE ISO builder This program adds True Image 2013 plug in to WinPE Windows Preinstallation Environment distributions based on any of the following kernels WinPE 1 5 2 x 3 0 To be able to create or modify PE 2 x and 3 0 images you must have Windo
76. it after clicking the Edit icon Having finished editing click the Save icon to save the changed comment or the Cancel icon to cancel the changes To remove the comment click the Delete icon Files and folders tab The Files and folders tab shows the backed up files and folders contained in the selected backup version The left hand area of the tab shows a directory tree and the right hand area the contents of a selected directory tree item The tab shows the files and folders states of when the current backup version was created You can switch between the backup versions by using the time line at the bottom of the screen For more information on using the time line see Time line To recover files and or folders 1 Onthe time line select the backup version from which you want to recover your files folders The version s exact date and time will be displayed near the backup name Your data will be recovered to the state it was at this point in time 2 Select the corresponding check boxes of the files and folders you want to recover see selection rules below Short information about the selected items their number and total size will be displayed near the Recover button 3 Click the Recover button You can also recover files and folders by dragging them to your Desktop or into a selected folder in Windows Explorer You cannot recover files by dragging them to an FTP recordable CD DVD or other optical media as well as mou
77. maximum size Position Before partition After partition You can create one or more partitions on the unallocated space with Acronis Disk Director Learn more about Acronis Disk Director ok Cancel 6 Select the next partition s check box 7 Select the unallocated space on the destination hard disk The program creates a partition occupying the entire unallocated space Recovering VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 Version Today at 1 39PM Source Switch to disk mode New Volume D NTFS v D a 19GB l c anes bares VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 Partition properties New Volume G NTFS v gt 2 9 GB L cd Mew Vome S VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 oe 10 GB Saem Reserved VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 Show MBR Local Disk C pei VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 16 GB gP Disk recovery q jy New Volume D VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 VMware Virtual S 1 0 VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 SS 5 k gt ogee Space VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 0G 87 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 Click the Partition properties link and make the settings for the partition Select a disk letter and partition type When you finish the settings click OK to confirm them and return to the main Disk Recovery window Partition Properties gt taka Specify the partition properties kd Partiti
78. may need to download the chipset and the hard disk controller drivers from the Web site of your motherboard manufacturer to add them during recovery want to replace my old desktop PC with a notebook Will True Image 2013 be able to transfer Windows programs and data to the notebook Yes this can be done First back up your old PC and then recover the backup to the notebook with use of Acronis Universal Restore provided by the separately purchased True Image 2013 Plus Pack You will need to select the Use Acronis Universal Restore checkbox when configuring recovery During recovery with Universal Restore you may need to provide drivers for the chipset hard disk controllers etc of your new computer For more information see Recovering to different hardware p 96 want to migrate my old system hard disk to an SSD Can this be done with True Image 2013 Yes True Image 2013 provides such a function For procedure details see Migrating your system from an HDD to an SSD p 146 What is the best way to migrate the system to a new disk cloning or backup and recovery The backup and recovery method provides more flexibility In any case we strongly recommend to make a backup of your old hard disk even if you decide to use cloning It could be your data saver if something goes wrong with your original hard disk during cloning For example there were cases when users chose the wrong disk as the target and thus wiped their system d
79. names of your backups but this will not affect our internal numeration If you use our way of naming like adding full_b3_s5 to a name of your backup the program adds our attributes after your name so the name would look as follows my_documents_full_b3_s1_full_b3_s1i tib If you are creating a new backup and there is already a file with the same name the program does not delete the old file but adds to the new file the number suffix for example my_documents_full_b3_s4 1 tib In case of consolidation we rename consolidated backup making it first in the chain and rename all other archives so chain naming wouldn t broken For example you have the following backup files backup_full_b1_s1 tib backup_inc_b1_s2 tib backup_inc_b1_s3 tib backup_inc_b1_s4 tib backup_inc_b1_s5 tib backup_inc_b1_s6 tib and want to consolidate the first three files The resulting backup will be named as backup_full_b1_s1 tib because it becomes a full backup and the first in the chain All other backups will be named backup_inc_b1_s2 tib backup_inc_b1_s3 tib backup_inc_b1_s4 tib etc If you are cleaning up chains without consolidation by deleting whole chains the program will not rename all other backups and will continue backup counting not resetting it For example you had backups backup_full_b1_s1 tib backup_inc_b1_s2 tib backup_inc_b1_s3 tib backup_full_b2_s1 tib backup_inc_b2_s2 tib backup_inc_b2_s3 tib You decided to delete th
80. on a schedule click the Turn on link to set up a schedule for more information see Scheduling p 157 To run the backup on the schedule click the down arrow to the right of the Back up now button and select Later in the drop down list The backup where you have made the settings will run according to the schedule You can also start the backup manually later on the Backup and recovery tab 3 7 Using Acronis Nonstop Backup Acronis Nonstop Backup provides easy protection of your disks and files It allows you to recover entire disks individual files and their different versions The main purpose of Acronis Nonstop Backup is continuous protection of your data files folders contacts etc though you can use it to protect partitions as well If you choose to protect an entire partition you will be able to recover the partition as a whole using the image recovery procedure You cannot use Acronis Nonstop Backup for protecting data stored on external hard drives How it works Once you start Acronis Nonstop Backup the program will perform an initial full backup of the data selected for protection Acronis Nonstop Backup will then save changes in the protected files including open ones every five minutes so that you will be able to recover your system to an exact point in time Usually the different states of the protected data will be backed up at 5 minute intervals for 24 hours The older backups will be consolidated in such
81. or Advanced CMOS setup If the utility does not detect the system drive it has failed and you need to replace the drive If the utility correctly detects your system hard disk drive then the cause of the crash is probably a virus malware or corruption of a system file required for booting If the system drive is healthy try to recover the system using a backup of your system disk or system partition Because Windows does not boot you will have to use Acronis bootable rescue media You will also need to use a system disk backup when recovering the system after replacing the damaged hard disk drive 4 1 2 Preparing for recovery a Scan the computer for viruses if you suspect that the crash occurred due to a virus or malware attack b Boot from the rescue media and validate the backup you want to use for recovery This is necessary because when a backup is validated in the recovery environment the program sometimes declares it corrupted though it has been successfully validated in Windows This may be due to the fact that True Image 2013 uses different device drivers in Windows and in the recovery environment If True Image 2013 considers the backup corrupted it will not proceed with recovery 4 1 3 Recovering your system After you have performed the steps described in Preparing for recovery p 79 begin the system recovery procedure Here we will explain how to recover a corrupted system to the same hard disk System recovery to
82. or more incremental or differential backup versions Backup version chain continues till the next full backup version if any Bootable media A physical media CD DVD USB flash drive or other media supported by a machine BIOS as a boot device that contains standalone version of True Image 2013 Bootable media is most often used to recover an operating system that cannot start access and back up the data that has survived in a corrupted system deploy an operating system on bare metal create basic or dynamic volumes on bare metal back up sector by sector a disk that has an unsupported file system C Consolidation Combining two or more subsequent backup versions p 238 belonging to the same backup p 238 into a single backup version The consolidation procedure allows you to delete the backup versions you no longer need from any backup chain while maintaining the consistency of chain s backups A chain to be consolidated consists of a full backup and one or more incremental backups Consolidation keeps whichever backups you choose and deletes any backups that are not selected Note that consolidation may take a lot of time and system resources including disk space Acronis Nonstop Backup uses a different consolidation mechanism In such cases the program consolidates the metadata information it uses for managing the backed up data This is because the metadata information volume is much less
83. performance Such a replacement may raise a number of questions Because SSDs are still somewhat expensive the size of your new SSD will usually be less than that of your old hard disk This may cause a problem if your hard disk contains the operating system programs and data Another question concerns the alignment of SSDs To get the optimum performance from an SSD and to prolong its life the partition offset must meet certain criteria For more information see SSD support p 14 We presuppose that before purchasing the SSD you estimated the approximate space occupied by your operating system and applications and that you selected an SSD that has a reasonable reserve Capacity First of all make sure that True Image 2013 detects your new SSD both in Windows and under the Acronis rescue media If there is a problem see What to do if True Image 2013 does nor recognize your SSD p 147 Let s consider two cases 1 Your new SSD is big enough to accommodate your old system disk without additional preparations 2 The occupied space on your old hard disk exceeds the size of your SSD In the first case different options for migrating your system may be available If your system disk consists of a single partition not counting the hidden System Reserved partition existing in many installations of Windows 7 you can try to migrate to the SSD using the Clone tool For more information see Cloning a hard disk p 188 However we rec
84. starts Rescue Media Builder Allows you to create a bootable rescue media with Acronis products or their specified components installed on your computer Acronis Secure Zone Allows you to store your backups in a special safe partition on your disk Boot Sequence Manager Allows you to add Windows 7 system partition images to the booting list and then manage the list This tool is available for Windows 7 Ultimate Enterprise editions only Backup settings transfer Import backup settings Allows you to get backup settings from another computer Export backup settings Allows you to copy the settings of your backups and move them to another computer Backup conversion Acronis backup conversion Use the feature to convert a backup file format from tib to vhd The vhd files can be used for example in Windows Vista and Windows 7 operating systems for mounting disk images without using True Image 2013 Windows backup conversion Use the feature to convert a backup file format from vhd to tib The latter is the native file format of Acronis backups Clone disk Use Clone disk wizard if you need to clone your hard disk drive by copying the partitions to another hard disk Security and privacy Acronis DriveCleanser Acronis DriveCleanser utility provides for secure destruction of data on your hard disk File Shredder With the File Shredder you can quickly select unnecessary files and folders and destroy them permanen
85. storage will fill in no time Do not worry as_ True Image 2013 will back up only so called deltas This means that only differences between old and new versions will be backed up and not whole changed files For example if you use Microsoft Outlook or Windows Mail your pst file may be very large Furthermore it changes with each received or sent E mail message Backing up the entire pst file after each change would be an unacceptable waste of your storage space so True Image 2013 backs up only its changed parts in addition to the initially backed up file 3 7 1 Protecting your data continuously Let s consider how you can use Nonstop Backup for protecting your data Nonstop Backup o a Configure nonstop backup process kd Source Switch to partition mode 4 Al Desktop Name Size ran T amp Local Disk C FAT32 E m Libraries pex E c FAT16 F cw exFAT G cow New Volume H cog New Volume 1 ce NEW VOLUME J cow New Volume K cm New Volume L cm New Volume S 4 m r m ip size 143 5 ME Destination D L ENT NTF z 186 45 GB of 186 54 GB free Backup name My Documents Add comment amp Nonstop backup options Start now Cancel To protect your data continuously 1 5 Click Other backups on the Backup and recovery tab and then select Nonstop Backup This opens the Nonstop Backup window Select on the directory tree in the What to back up area an item to be protected by Non
86. the drive as follows 1 2 3 4 O 00 Oy UT 11 Insert your flash drive into a USB port Press Win R or select Start gt Run and type cmd to open the command line prompt Type diskpart to start Windows DiskPart utility Type list disk to list all disks attached to the machine ISKPART gt list disk Disk 08 Status Sine _ Fros yn Opt Disk 0 Online 75 GB 45 GB Disk 1 Online 149 GB 1400 KB Disk 2 Online 3936 MB OB Based on the size we can assume that in the above example the USB memory stick is disk 2 Take extreme care to get the disk number right You don t want to wipe the wrong drive Type select disk number to select your flash drive Type clean to remove any formatting from the selected disk Type create partition primary Type select partition 1 to select the only partition now on the flash drive Type active to mark the partition as active Type format quick fs fat32 to format the disk in FAT32 otherwise the drive will not be bootable Type assign to assign a drive letter 12 Type exit to exit Windows DiskPart utility 8 3 Creating factory bootable media This functionality is available only if the computer has an Acronis Secure Zone that has a backup of the computer s factory configuration This backup is normally created in Acronis Secure Zone by a hardware supplier who delivers computers to end users Factory bootable media is a special type of rescue bootable media that incl
87. the only thing you have is the image being recovered If the image is corrupted you will not be able to recover the system 7 2 Deciding where to store your backups True Image 2013 supports quite a few of storage devices For more information see Supported storage media Some of the supported storage locations are discussed below Hard disk drives Since hard disk drives are now quite inexpensive in most cases purchasing an external hard drive for storing your backups will be an optimal solution An external drive enhances the security of your data because you can keep it off site for example at home if you back up your office computer and vice versa You can choose various interfaces USB FireWire eSATA depending on the configuration of your computer ports and the required data transfer rate In many cases the best choice will be an external USB hard drive especially if your computer supports USB 3 0 If you plan to use an external USB hard drive with your desktop PC connecting the drive to a rear connector using a short cable will usually provide the most reliable operation This reduces the chance of data transfer errors during backup recovery Home file server NAS or NDAS If you have a Gigabit Ethernet home network and a dedicated file server or NAS you can store backups on the file server or NAS practically like on an internal drive If you decide to use an external hard drive NAS NDAS etc you will need to check whethe
88. the progress and resultof True Image 2013 operations Integration settings You can select the Acronis components that should be integrated into Windows Acronis console in Windows Control Panel available for Windows 7 users only Select this item to replace Windows Backup with Acronis console in the Windows Control Panel In such a case you will be able to manage your backups without running True Image 2013 The Acronis Recovery tab in the Properties window Select this item to add the Acronis Recovery tab to the Properties window To open the window in Windows Explorer right click the required file or folder and then click Properties The Acronis Recovery tab allows you to view and recover versions of the selected file or folder If you rename a file or folder protected by Acronis Nonstop Backup or included into a regular backup the versions of the renamed item on the Acronis Recovery tab will disappear They may reappear after certain time Shortcut menu commands In Windows Explorer right clicking on a file folder partition or disk opens the shortcut menu Along with Windows commands this menu may contain Acronis commands such as Back Up Acronis Recovery etc Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 1 1 9 8 Login menu Clicking Login opens a window for logging in to your Acronis account After you log in the Login item is replaced by the e mail address of your account Clicking the e mail address of yo
89. the remaining partition click the Partition properties link below the recovery destination field The Partition Properties window appears Partition Properties l Ar Specify the partition properties o Partition Letter F z Label Type Partition size Used space 19GB Total size 25597 0 New Volume F 25 GB Preserve source partition size 25 GB Unallocated space Size 20 Expand partition to maximum size Position Before partition After partition e You can create one or more partitions on the unallocated space with Acronis Disk Director Learn more about Acronis Disk Director OK Cancel 5 You can resize the partition by dragging its right border with a mouse on the horizontal bar on the screen To assign the partition a specific size enter the appropriate number into the Total size field Remember that you need to leave as much unallocated free space after having resized the partition as will be needed for the remaining partition Select a disk letter and partition type When you finish the settings click OK to confirm them and return to the main Disk Recovery window Specify the partition properties Partition Letter F Label Type Primary z Partition size Used space 19GB Totalsize 153467 MB New Volume F f a 15GB Preserve source partition size 25 GB Unallocated space Size 102523 Expand partition to
90. to the Acronis Boot Sequence Manager To use the VHD for booting the partition with the converted vhd file must have sufficient free space Tib files are converted into dynamic VHDs with the maximum size that equals the size of a partition backed up into a tib file When you boot from a dynamic vhd file the VHD is automatically expanded to the maximum size If the physical host partition of the vhd file does not have enough free disk space for the maximum size of the dynamic VHD the boot process will fail Furthermore you need to have additional space for the paging file Pagefile sys as the paging file is created on the host partition outside the virtual one Microsoft states that you should estimate approximately 5 GB of available space in addition to the maximum size of the vhd file So the estimated free space is the size of your system partition plus 5 GB From the above it follows that you cannot boot from the vhd file if it is located on your system partition 6 Reboot the computer and select the new entry in the Acronis Boot Sequence Manager list for booting then click OK If Windows boots normally you can be quite sure that the backup will recover to a bootable Windows 7 operating system 7 After making sure that the tib image is bootable you can remove its entry from the Acronis Boot Sequence Manager list To do so select the entry and click Remove on the toolbar True Image 2013 will ask to confirm removal You may also w
91. usually C and specify the backup destination For more information see Backing up partitions and disks 3 Click Turn on for the Schedule item In the Scheduler window click Monthly and specify for example the 1st and 15th days of the month This will result in a backup version in about every 2 weeks Then specify a start time for the backup operation Or Oy a 10 11 Click Incremental next to the Backup scheme item Incremental is the default backup scheme In the Disk Backup Options window make sure that the Backup scheme tab is selected Choose Custom scheme instead of Incremental scheme In the Backup method box select Differential from the drop down list Click Create a full version after every n differential versions and type or select 3 In that case the program will first create the initial full backup version no matter how you set up a backup process the first backup version will always be the full one and then 3 differential versions each one in about two weeks Then again a full version and 3 differential versions and so on So every new full version will be created in two months To limit storage space for the versions click Turn on automatic cleanup Click Keep size of the backup no more than defined size type or select 100 GB and click OK When the total backup size exceeds 100 GB True Image 2013 will clean up the existing backup versions to make the remaining versions satisfy the size lim
92. validates in addition to the initial full backup version and the selected incremental backup version only the most recent differential backup version in the chain and all subsequent incremental backup versions if any between the differential backup version and the selected incremental backup version Version of synced file A state of a file which is located in a sync folder after each modification of this file File versions may be stored on Acronis Cloud
93. version We strongly recommend that you create new bootable media after each product upgrade 1 1 8 True Image 2013 activation Touse True Image 2013 you need to activate it via the Internet Without activation the fully functional product works for 30 days If you do not activate it during that period all the program functions become unavailable except the recovery You can activate True Image 2013 either on your computer or from another computer if your computer is not connected to the Internet Activation on a computer connected to the Internet If your computer is connected to the Internet you can activate the product either automatically or from within the program To activate the product automatically 1 Start the installation procedure See details in True Image 2013 installation 2 At the Serial number step select the Activate True Image 2013 automatically check box In this case True Image 2013 will try to perform activation during the first start after installation To activate the product from the main screen 1 Start True Image 2013 2 Onthe main program screen click Activate now on the information bar If the computer where you install True Image 2013 does not have Internet connection or if the program cannot connect to Acronis Activation Server you may select one of the following actions Try again select this option to try to connect to the Acronis Activation Server again Retry automatically later T
94. version whenever you need it You can access files in the Acronis Cloud from all your computers and mobile devices You can also access the Cloud using a Web browser without having to install our application 5 2 How we ensure security of your data You may want to be sure that your personal files won t get into the wrong hands You may be especially concerned about your mobile device because all of your synced data will be transferred through the Internet Let us assure you that your data will be safe First of all we use encrypted protocols SSL TLS to transfer all data through both the Internet and LAN To access the synced data sign in to your account by providing the e mail address and password for that account Furthermore we store your data on our servers in encrypted form Only you have access to your encrypted data 5 3 Acronis server login To start using the data synchronization feature or online backup you must enter the e mail address and password of your Acronis account Also we recommend that you name your computer You may type any name you like not necessarily the name assigned for the operating system Enter your Acronis account credentials E mail Password Forgot your password Create account Computer name Login Cancel If you do not have Acronis account click Create account and fill in the registration form on Acronis Web site If you have forgotten your password click For
95. you were searching for IP Music E Advanced Search W Recently Changed Searches DB Public 165 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 9 Choosing columns for viewing in wizards You can change the way the columns are represented in various wizards To sort items by a particular column click the header another click will switch the items to the opposite order To select columns to view right click in the right pane and select Choose Columns in the shortcut menu Then flag the columns you want to display You can also change the display order of columns using the Move Up and Move Down buttons You can change the width of a column by dragging its borders with the mouse 7 10 Backup information The backup information window provides detailed information about the selected backup Path the location where the backup is stored In case it is an incremental or differential backup the location may be different from the location where the full backup is stored Backup method may be full incremental or differential For more information about types of backup see Full incremental and differential backups p 39 Backup file type either Acronis tib or zip compressed type Zip extension belongs only to files and or folders backups while tib extension may belong either to disk partition or file folder backups Created the date and time when the backup was created Co
96. 193 Cloning SUMMALY 0esscccceeeceesesssececeeecesseseuaeseceescessessaaeeeeeessessessaaeess 195 8 5 1 General information You might find that your hard disk does not have enough space for the operating system and installed applications preventing you from updating your software or installing new applications In this case you have to transfer the system to a higher capacity hard disk To transfer the system you must first install the new disk in the computer If your computer doesn t have a bay for another hard disk you can temporarily install it in place of your CD drive or use a USB 2 0 connection to the external target disk If that is not possible you can clone a hard disk by creating a disk image and recovering it to a new hard disk with larger partitions On program screens damaged partitions are marked with a red circle and a white cross inside in the upper left corner Before you start cloning you should check such disks for errors and correct the errors using the appropriate operating system tools For best results install the target new drive where you plan to use it and the source drive in another location e g in an external USB enclosure This recommendation is especially important for laptops We strongly recommend that you create a backup of the entire original disk as a safety precaution It could be your data saver if something goes wrong with your original hard disk during cloning For information o
97. 2 Acronis DriveCleanser offers you another useful capability to estimate the results of executing a data destruction algorithm on a hard disk or partition It features an integrated Disk Editor hard disk browsing tool The aforementioned algorithms offer various levels of confidential data destruction Thus the picture you might see on a disk or partition depends on the data destruction algorithm But what you actually see are disk sectors filled with either zeros or random symbols Creating custom algorithms of data destruction Acronis DriveCleanser gives you the opportunity to create your own algorithms for wiping hard disks Although the software includes several levels of data destruction you can choose to create your own This is recommended only for users familiar with the principles of data destruction used in secure disk wiping methods To create a custom hard disk wiping algorithm select and click the Custom line from the drop down list in the Algorithm selection window In this case some new required steps appear in the DriveCleanser wizard and you will be able to create a data destruction algorithm matching your security requirements 3 Acronis DriveCleanser Required steps Your algor A Wiping Pass Adjustment V SEED Please selecta Change parameters for the custom algorithm pass V Algorithm selection pass Note that Algorithm Definition Operation Saving Custom Algorithm write All the dat
98. 3 allows you to back up messages accounts and settings for Microsoft Outlook 2003 2007 2010 Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail and Windows Live E mail backup is a subset of file level backups that backs up predefined folders and requires minimum user selections However if need be you can select Microsoft Outlook components and folders individually E mail Backup Anm Configure e mail backup process kd Source E My e mail Specify credentials for this location v Windows Contact Js PEES Name Size 7 J Windows Contacts Destination P a Schedule Off Turn on Backup scheme Custom he scheme is based cremental method Backup name Windows Contacts Add comment g E mail backup options Back up now X Cancel You can select the following items Messages contained in PST DBX Database Files E mail accounts For Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 2007 2010 m Mail Folders Calendar Contacts Tasks Notes Signatures News Folders m User Settings Address Book For Microsoft Outlook Express m Mail Folders Address Book select Windows Address Book True Image 2013 provides backup of IMAP Internet Messages Access Protocol mail folders for Microsoft Outlook This means that you can back up folders stored on a mail server For Microsoft Outlook Express and Windows Mail only backup of local e mail folders is available Take note that True Image 2013 doe
99. C iv Name Size Date E m M Documents and Settings 03 05 08 08 49 AM m E Users 07705411 12 18 PA If you selected several files and folders they will be placed into a zip archive 4 After the File Download window opens click Save to start download File Download Do you want to open or save this file di Name Documents and Settings ZIP Type Compressed zipped Folder 28 6MB From cloud wr us2 acronis com aed Geel While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this file What s the risk 5 By default the data will be downloaded to the Downloads folder You may change the download path 6 After the download finishes you may click Open folder to open the Downloads folder 6 6 2 Selecting a version to recover By default True Image 2013 selects the latest versions with respect to the date you specified However for any file you can select a specific version of the file to recover To recover a specific file version 1 Inthe backup contents select the file which version you want to recover then click the gear icon at the right hand side Select View versions in the opened menu 2 Inthe window that appears select the required version and then click Recover Disk info png x Choose a version today 03 36 AM Latest 24 Kb 24 Kb 33 Kb today 02 21 AM Oldest 24 Kb Delete p
100. Center When you have created backups the Backup and Restore window will show the Nonstop Backup box and the box of your oldest disk or partition backup You can recover the backed up data refresh the backups and pause start Nonstop Backup directly from the Control Panel If you want to resume using Windows Backup click Turn on Windows Backup on the left pane This will remove True Image 2013 from the Control Panel and replace it with Windows Backup If later you decide to integrate True Image 2013 into Windows 7 again click a gear icon and select Integrate True Image into Windows Furthermore the Start menu acquires the following True Image 2013 items Windows DVD Maker E Windows Fax and Scan e Windows Media Center Windows Media Player amp Windows Update tester A XPS Viewer i Documents a Accessories J Acronis DM Truel Pictures Music 4 Acronis Web Site User s guide Is ties Games Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Run Search programs and files P2 Enma These menu items allow you to use the main program features tools and utilities without starting True Image 2013 The True Image 2013 button on the Windows taskbar becomes much more informative and functional Its shortcut menu gets additional items You can use the shortcut menu to start Nonstop Backup and Online Backup In addition the button shows
101. D Drive D Acronis Media a FAT32 E cy FATI6 F J Mac 6 5 2012 10 01 PM m Folder Project Select Folder 3 Ifyou want to store data versions on Acronis Cloud click Yes in the Confirmation window otherwise click No Confirmation e Do you want to use Acronis Cloud 4 Onthe created sync box click the Settings icon 03 and then select Share JB New project nomate sre Woes Folder CAUsers tester New project ts G TESTER SETSETST Acronis Cloud A Sync now ed Today at 10 59 PM M Pause Total size 3111 MB Share F Sync with 4 Ie Pictures Aem Fold LANew folder f Cleanup options C Users tester Pictures View log Ur Today at 5 34 AM KORR 908 17 MB l 5 Type the e mail address of the user or users who you want to invite Use commas as separators if you invite several users Optionally you can type a message to the invited person 6 Select the I agree with the terms of use check box and click Send m Invitation to Sync Invite your friends to join this sync E mail addresses vladimirvolkhonsky acronis com Message for the recipients optional Please join this sync to start working on our new project I agree with the terms of use Send Cancel Steps to perform by the invited person 1 Find and open the e mail message with invitation to sync 2 To join the sync click Accept invitation You will be taken to the appropriate
102. FS Primary Logical Dynamic M Acronis Secure Zone F Unallocated Unsupported To resize change the volume type change the label of the existing volume right click on it and select Edit in the shortcut menu This will open the Partition Settings window Clone Disk Wizard Required steps Clone Mode Y Source Disk Destination Disk Move Method Change Disk Layout Select partitions on your new hard disk from the list below a Please specify settings for the partition being created Size Min 3 33 GB ES 4 5 Partition C 2457 GB NTFS F Unallocated space E Used space D Free space Partition size 24 97 GB SMB Free space before o Free space after fo MB Partition letter C File system Partition label NTFS Select the type of partition Primary Mark the partition as active Logical z You can do this by entering values in the Free space before Partition size Free space after fields by dragging partition borders o 194 r the partition itself Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If the cursor turns into two vertical lines with left and right arrows it is pointed at the partition border and you can drag it to enlarge or reduce the partition s size If the cursor turns into four arrows it is pointed at the partition so you can move it to the left or right if there s unallocated space near i
103. Image creation mode A Back up sector by sector Back up unallocated space E Pre Post commands v ii Backup splitting v amp Validation v Backup reserve copy v E gt Removable media settings y amp Backup comment v is Screenshot settings y s Error handling z Computer shutdown v Windows account y Save the settings as default e Reset to initial settings OK Cancel Note that options of each backup type are fully independent and you should configure them separately If you want to reset all the modified options to the values that were set after the product installation initially click the Reset to initial settings button In this section BaCkKUp SCHEMES 1 25202 Gi cede ea ee eee aeea e ere e e anei Eaa 60 Single version SCHEME 2 cciscs icetstenreedscesaeedeeancedesteddeeseneedeisaeedeveneedenteate 60 Version chain Scheme i sescecescscectissencecsseencedevsencedsvetecdevsnigedsveeneedevimneedstienee 61 Custom Schee S erasini raea EAn AE OUE ARAE NETSA ATRAS ARTENA AAAA 61 iMmagecreation MO desrei aae enaa e eee e Eie Eae 65 BaCkKUp Prot ctiOi reiser neesii Eea eNe aE EEEa REEK OEE EAE ieee 65 Pre Post commands for DaCKUP s ccsscccesscecssececssececseeceseeecssececasecesers 66 BaCkuUp Splitting tserte nenes aaee iaei Ee ceeauvesesecudesstenueedebeeuieloeuneeeseeeeuee 67 Backup Validation Option iinei tosenn eane eeaeee a aeia Rae 67 BackUp reserv CODY ooren erene Ee e EEEa RESKO E
104. Inthe Arguments field enter or select command execution arguments from the list Disabling the Do not perform operations until the command execution is complete parameter enabled by default will permit the recovery process to run concurrently with your command execution The Abort the operation if the user command fails enabled by default parameter will abort the operation if any errors occur in command execution You can test the command you entered by clicking the Test command button 4 14 3 Validation option Validate backup before recovery The preset is disabled Before data is recovered from the backup True Image 2013 can check its integrity If you suspect that the backup might have been corrupted enable this option Check the file system after recovery The preset is disabled Having recovered a partition from an image True Image 2013 can check the integrity of the file system To do so enable this option Limitations on use of this option Check of the file system is available only when recovering partitions using FAT16 32 and NTFS file systems The file system will not be checked if a reboot is required during recovery for example when recovering the system partition to its original place 4 14 4 Computer restart The preset is Disabled If you want the computer to reboot automatically when it is required for recovery select the Restart the computer automatically if needed for the recovery check box
105. KS pase ox cciss ous seacs ena parai raria ni rE a Eaa ra ues sdaveedasedeasuadiavtousisevsvensdatasssvedeisnusiata saa shieva cicvuvene 18 OW CO PRETE T E EEE E A A E 37 Backing Up data sississsesssisssssssrasssassvssst ssstsssssstasssi stts stvo tiss sbb vESSsESEUNSSEVSSKASSVESSVESSE SEUNSSEKSSNASSE S 38 3 1 The difference between file backups and disk partition images cccccccesscecsseceesecesseeeees 38 3 2 Full incremental and differential backups ssssnnnssssesnnennnssssesnneennssssesrnensnssnseennnennsssseeennenno 39 33 Backup file namiNp sssini nae ea aaa a e aE O Ea aE daN e 39 3 4 Backing up partitions and disks ccccccccccseessessseceeeceseesecseaecececessesesaeseceeeessceseaeaeeeeessssesenaaes 42 3 5 Backing up files and folders ccccessecececeeessesssaecececsceeseauaeceeceusseseauaeeeeeessseseaaeaeeeseceseeseaaeas 44 3 5 1 Data CALCRONOSS ssscsscececsendscueesdecansstyscenvzs ded sacess vasssesea Eada Aaaa Aa Eeee aana iania 3 5 2 Support for Zip format 3 6 Backing up e mail ici2sccccccsseetic dec ieieene eesdd ccs he incceescedecieaeincnees di decebeesncncecdedecb EE eE REE eat 3 7 Using Acronis Nonstop Backup cccssccccccscsssessssesecececsssesseaeeeeecseseseaeaeeesecessesesaeaeeeeeeessesenaeas 48 3 7 1 Protecting your data CONTINUOUSIY cccceessesssssesesssssssscssesecssesecsussesseseesecsecsesaussesssseeseseeceesaessessesaesseenees 50 3 7 2 Protecting your system CONTINUOUSL
106. Operations Number of operations 2 1 Deleting partition Hard disk 1 Drive letter C File system NTFS Volume label Size 100 GB 2 Recovering partition sector by sector Hard disk 1 Drive letter C File system NTFS Volume label Size 100 GB Optional steps Options 7 Options Proceed J Cancel 9 When the operation finishes exit the standalone version of True Image 2013 remove the rescue media and boot from the recovered system partition After making sure that you have recovered Windows to the state you need restore the original boot order 4 2 Recovering partitions and disks You can start recovering a partition or disk from an image backup both on the Backup and recovery tab and in Acronis Backup Explorer To start recovery from the Backup and recovery tab select the box of a backup containing the partition image you need to recover Click the Recover button or the Recover icon if the backup box is collapsed This opens the Disk Recovery window 82 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If you want to recover the partition to the state it was at an earlier date click the gear icon to open the Operations menu and then click Recover files This opens Acronis Backup Explorer and you can select the image backup version created on that date Clicking Recover after selecting the required version opens the Disk Recovery window Disk Recovery a b Recovering System C 1 Y
107. Program CEP is a new way to allow Acronis customers to contribute to the features design and development of Acronis products This program enables our customers to provide us with various information including information about the hardware configuration of your host computer and or virtual machines the features you use most and least and the nature of the problems you face Based on this information we will be able to improve the Acronis products and the features you use most often If you choose to participate the technical information will be automatically collected every 90 days We will not collect any personal data like your name address phone number or keyboard input Participation in the CEP is voluntary however but the end results intended to provide software improvements and enhanced functionality to better meet the needs of our customers Note that you will be able to leave the program any time Click the Learn more link to read the participation terms To make a decision Choose Yes want to participate in the program if you want to join the program Choose No do not accept if you do not want to join the program Copyright Statement Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 All rights reserved Acronis Acronis Compute with Confidence Acronis Recovery Manager Acronis Secure Zone Acronis True Image Acronis Try amp Decide and the Acronis logo are trademarks of Acronis International GmbH
108. Rating Method Images a a my_systern Nonstop Backup Storages Ca iF Nonstop backup File Backups ia a amp Pictures B Pictures 3 1 11 11 21 34 AM WW Ww Full backup _ m Path F Pictures tib Browse When recovering files with the rescue CD you are able to select only a new location for the files to be recovered Therefore just click Next at the Location selection step After the Destination window opens check that all your drives are shown under My Computer If you store your backups on the network you should also check that you can access the network If no computers are visible on the network but the Computers Near Me icon is found under My Computer specify network settings manually To do this open the window available at Tools amp Utilities gt Options gt Network adapters Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If the Computers Near Me icon is not available under My Computer there may be problems either with your network card or with the card driver provided with True Image 2013 Geren kej G Recovery Wizard Required steps Select new file destination g My Computer Name Date Type gt k System Reserved C No items to display gt Local Disk D gt New Volume E ai New Volume F gt i RECYCLE BIN gt J My backups gt System Volume Informal Destination gt J Time Explorer Storage gt Jl Trial recovery gt Computers Near Me lt m J
109. Repeat Step 4 for all other drivers you need to add Commit the changes using the Dism command with the Unmount Wim Commit option Dism Unmount Wim MountDir C winpe_x86 mount Commit Do not exit the command prompt After the custom WIM is created proceed to adding Acronis Plug in 1 2 4 Select Acronis True Image 2013 Plus Pack Acronis WinPE ISO Builder from the Start menu Specify the path to the created winpe wim file In our example the path is C winpe_x86 winpe wim Specify the full path to the resulting WIM file including the filename or leave the default path and filename C winpe_x86 AcronisMedia wim Check your settings in the summary screen and then click Proceed To create a PE image ISO file from the resulting WIM file 1 Replace the default boot wim file in your Windows PE folder with the newly created WIM file For the above WIM file creation example type copy C winpe_x86 AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot wim Use the Oscdimg tool To create an ISO file type oscdimg n bc winpe_x86 etfsboot com c winpe_x86 ISO c winpe_x86 winpe_x86 iso Burn the ISO to a CD using a third party tool for example Nero and you will have a bootable Windows PE disc with True Image 2013 and your hardware driver or drivers 8 2 4 How to prepare a USB flash drive for Acronis Media Builder If Acronis Media Builder does not recognize the USB flash drive you want to make bootable prepare
110. Save file s to Specify the location of the resulting ISO image Once you select the media click Create to start creating the media 8 4 Working with Acronis Secure Zone The Acronis Secure Zone is a special partition for storing backups on the same computer that created the backup The current True Image 2013 creates the zone as a FAT32 partition When you click Acronis Secure Zone on the Tools and utilities tab the program searches for the zone on all local drives If the zone is found the wizard will offer to manage it resize change the password or delete it If there is no zone you will be prompted to create it In this section ACrONIS SECULE ZONE 2 cc200 0 ccccceceeccceverscssssencccoscenctesceatocssectevsssceansseeses 183 Acronis Secure Zone location ccccccccccccsccsseseseccceseusesueecceceeeseuaeeuseeees 184 Selecting Partitions ccccccccssssssssececeeecessessaeeeceeecesscseeaeeeeeessessesssaees 185 Size Of Acronis Secure ZONE csccccesssececesntececeesueeeeseueeecseaeeeeeeueeeenenas 185 Managing Acronis Secure ZONG 0c0seseseseeeeeseesseeeseseseeeseeeesessesseeeeees 186 Acronis Secure Zone SUMMALY cccssssssssssssssssseseeeseseseaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaes 188 8 4 1 Acronis Secure Zone The Acronis Secure Zone is a secure partition that lets you keep backups on a managed machine disk space This lets you recover a disk where the disk backup resides When you create an Acronis Secu
111. The backup versions are similar to file versions The file versions concept is familiar to those who use a Windows Vista and Windows 7 feature called Previous versions of files This feature allows you to restore a file as it existed on a particular date and time A backup version allows you to recover your data in a similar way This could be useful when trying to find damaged or deleted files Simply browse through the backup versions in the Acronis Backup Explorer until you find the backup version containing the required files Additionally you can recover different saved versions of the found files There is one more type of incremental backup version If you mount a partition in the read write mode the program assumes that the mounted image will be modified and creates an incremental version to capture the changes This type of incremental version has somewhat different properties For example it cannot be consolidated Disk cloning This operation migrates or copies the entire contents of one disk drive to another disk drive This may be necessary for example when installing a larger capacity disk The result is two identical drives with the same file structure The Disk Clone tool effectively copies all of the contents of one hard disk drive onto another hard disk drive The operation allows you to transfer all the information including the operating system and installed programs from one hard disk drive to another without having to
112. This may be used when a partition locked by the operating system has to be recovered Enabling the option allows rebooting the computer without user interaction during recovery 4 14 5 File recovery options You can select the following file recovery options Recover files with their original security settings if the file security settings were preserved during backup see File level security settings for backup p 71 you can choose whether to recover them or let the files inherit the security settings of the folder where they will be recovered to This option is effective only when recovering files from file folder backups Set current date and time for recovered files you can choose whether to recover the file date and time from the backup or assign the files the current date and time By default the file date and time from the backup will be assigned 4 14 6 Overwrite file options Choose what to do if the program finds a file in the target folder with the same name as in the backup This option is available only while restoring data from file level backups Selecting the Overwrite existing files check box will give the files from the backup unconditional priority over the files on the hard disk though by default the more recent files and folders are protected against overwriting If you want to overwrite those files and folders too clear the appropriate check box If you do not need to overwrite some files Select
113. Web page for completing the acceptance 3 Start True Image 2013 Find the required sync box and click Join this sync 4 New project Participants GJ TESTERIZ 5 Inthe Browse for Folder window select the folder that you want to synchronize and click OK Sync between three or more computers If you create a sync between three or more computers invite to sync your next colleague Type your colleague s e mail address The computer s owner needs to perform the steps listed for the invited person The procedure is similar for all other persons Hint When you synchronize files with your friends we recommend that each of you select for synchronization an empty folder and then move folders with files inside the empty folder As a result your files and your friends files will be stored in separate subfolders This allows you to avoid muddle in the synced folder 5 7 3 1 Sync conflict resolution A sync conflict may only happen between two or more computers This may happen when you synchronize data with another user your relative friend or colleague For example you and your friend work with the same file located in your sync folders Both of you have changed it and simultaneously saved the changes This is a sync conflict because True Image 2013 must process two changes of the file yours and your friend s within one sync operation Usually there is only one file change This conflict will be resolved by renaming the file w
114. Windows Backup c csscssssssseescescssesecssesessesscssessceseeesessessesseeseeees 8 11 3 Booting from a tib image of your Windows 7 system partition 8 11 4 Acronis Boot Sequence MANAE S cssccsccscsssssscssecsessecsscesecsesssesssscseceusesssessesecessaeseeseseceseaeseseaesnseaes 8 12 Importing and exporting backup SettiNgS c ccccccccssessssececececsssesssaeeeeecsseesesseaeeeeeesseeseaaees 9 Troubleshooting eserse ar SAA E E SEANSTA ENEE A EEEE 230 9 1 Acronis System Report is Aa es OA a a haa eas ec cles 230 9 2 ACrONIS SMart Error REPOting cccccccccccccccccccccecccececececececececececeseceeecesececeseseseseeesesesesesesesess 231 9 3 How to collect crash CUMS ccessssccececsssessnnececececseseseeaeseceeseseseeaaeeeeeesseeseeaeeeesesseeseaaeas 232 gA General recommendations siesena eA NAER ENE 233 9 5 Greati ng a custom rescue CD aae E iA REER E ce cision AR AA EA E A AEA ES 233 96 Viewing OB nnnenmaanne n a a veda bites Heke ee E 234 9 7 Acronis Customer Experience Program cccccccccccccccecececececececececececececececececesececesesesesesesesess 235 10 Glossary OF Tem ioaea EN EES se tececesbiascdesoeccewscotasccaessceavacudscdesseneevceuesscdesetesedesen 238 1 Getting started 1 1 Introduction In this section What is True Image 2013 by Acronis ccccccsscceessecesseecseeeessseessaeeesees 7 Whatis True Image 2013 Plus Pack by Acronis cccessseceesesteeeeeeaee
115. Y cceecessessesecsesscsscsscsscseesecsessesscsessecsessecsecsesssesesesoresesaessesaesaseasenees 51 3 7 3 Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage ccccscsssssssssscsscsscsssssesessessessesscsessessessecsessusessesoeenesaesaesauesseaseneaess 52 3 7 4 Nonstop Backup Frequently asked QUeStIONS c cccscescssesccssessesscscescssesecseesesaessecseeeesesseseesaeeaeeaeeaesesenees 53 3 8 Making reserve copies of your backups cccssscceccceesesesssaeceeecesesseaeaeeeeeeesessesaeaeeeeecesseseaaeas 54 3 9 Howto make bootable removable media with a DaCkUp cccsessssececeeessesssseseeeeeesseesseaees 55 3 10 Backup to VariOuUs Places sss sczcscc seseseceueecs Secseessicmdareedcaageaseceaee i aaa a Eaa iae eai iee iE eaii 56 3 11 Adding an existing backup to the list ccccccesscececeesesessssecececesesseeeaeeeesesseesesaeaeeeeeseseeseaaees 58 3 12 Deleting backups and backup versions 313 BACKUP OD OMS erea a 3 13 1 Backup SCHEMES cceeeeseesseseeseeseereeens 3 13 2 Single version SCHEME c ccsccseeeeeeeeees 3 13 3 Version chain SCHEME ccsecesceseeeeeeees 3 13 4 CUSTOM SCHEMES eeceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 5 Image creation MOdE ccceseeseeeeeeteees 3 13 6 Backup protection ccescseseesseseeeeees 3 13 7 Pre Post commands for DaCKUP cccsscsessssssesesessscscsecscssstscsesesesseecseacsesesesecesasacaceeees 3 13 38 Backup Splitting ecir ssri nrinn aeaea
116. a replaced hard disk drive will be similar with some minor differences You do not need to format the new disk as this will be done in the process of recovery Attach the external drive if it contains the backup to be used for recovery and make sure that the drive is powered on This must be done before booting from Acronis rescue media 1 Arrange the boot order in BIOS so as to make your rescue media device CD DVD or USB stick the first boot device See Arranging boot order in BIOS p 103 2 Boot from the rescue media and select True Image 3 Select My disks below Recover on the Welcome screen A Tools amp Utilities 7 Welcome to True Image What would you like to do Backup Back Up Recovery My Disks Files amp Folders L amp Recover og 3 My Disks Files amp Folders Tools amp Utilities D Local volumes letters may be different trom My favorites those in Windows Help Options 38 Tools amp Utilit r 4 Select the system disk or partition backup to be used for recovery Right click on the backup and choose Recover in the shortcut menu 5 Select Recover whole disks and partitions at the Recovery method step Choose recovery method gt Recovery method Recover whole disks and partitions Recover chosen files and folders Select files and folders to recover from the original disk backup Y tto recover Next gt Cancel
117. a will be overwritten with the chosen pattern Please enter the pattern 2aving Custom Algona write write P Write a random number Random length 00 A random value will be generated Then all the data will be overwritten with this number Please select the number of bytes in the random value The random value length can vary from 1 to 512 bytes long 15 _ Write complementary to previous pass pattern Select this operation if you want Acronis True Image Home to count complementary to the previous step pattern The data will be overwritten with the newly counted pattern D Verity Select this operation if you want the previously written data to be verified v Having created a custom method you can save the algorithm you created This will be handy if you are going to use it again Loading an algorithm from a file If you created and saved your algorithm for data destruction while working with True Image 2013 software you can use it in the following way In the Select algorithm window choose Load from file from the drop down list and select the file with custom data destruction algorithm parameters By default such files have a alg extension Algorithm definition The Algorithm definition window shows you a template of the future algorithm The window has the following legend The first column of the list contains the type of operation ona disk there are just two to write a symbol to disk writing
118. ace will be freed up Clean up your Storage by clearing version history D Used 4 34 GB Free 245 66 GB Will be cleared 234 15 MB How many versions would you like to remove from the history All versions 234 15 MB Versions older than 1 month 234 15 MB Versions older than 1 week 234 15 MB Advanced cleanup Clean up now Cancel Be careful Deleted versions cannot be restored 4 Clicking Advanced cleanup allows you to select more cleanup rules Clean up your Storage by clearing version history Specify cleanup rules V Delete versions older than 30 days v V Delete versions after 10 recent versions _ Clear history for deleted files Apply these rules for Sciis x Simple cleanup Clean up now Cancel You can apply the cleanup rules for individual syncs and online backups all syncs and online backups you have on Acronis Cloud 5 Choose the desired rules and click Clean up now One more way to clean up is to delete a sync or online backup which you no longer need In this case all version history for the sync or online backup is deleted from Acronis Cloud 5 11 How to recover a deleted file Sometimes you may delete a file from a sync by mistake Then you need to recover the deleted file This may be possible for the syncs that keep file versions on Acronis Cloud One condition the deleted file must not be removed during Cloud clean up To recover a deleted file
119. ackup cc ssscccceceeessesssaeeeceeesessesseaeeeeeeeseesees 48 Making reserve copies of your DACKUPS cccsccesssecseseecsneeesseessseeesnees 54 How to make bootable removable media with a backup csscccees 55 Backup to various PlaCeS cccccecssecccesssececeesneeeceeseeeceeqeeeceequeeecesseeeeeees 56 Adding an existing backup to the list ccceccssececeessececsesteeeessnaeeeeeeaaes 58 Deleting backups and backup versions sccccesssececeesteeeeeesteeeeeeseeeeeees 58 Backup OptiONs cccssicccevssccccesasscecevesccecevasccecessscaadesonteecevaaced cevenccecevasscedevanse 58 Validating DACKUDS ssercaisirarrni 75 Consolidating backup VErSiONS ccsccesessseceeeeeeeeceeneeeecseaeeeceenaeeeeeeaaes 75 Cloning backup settings cccsscccsssssecessesececseeececseaecesseaeeesseaeeseeeaaes 77 3 1 The difference between file backups and disk partition images When you back up files and folders only the files and folder tree are compressed and stored Disk partition backups are different from file and folder backups True Image 2013 stores a sector by sector snapshot of the disk or partition This includes the operating system registry drivers software applications data files and system areas hidden from the user This procedure is called creating a disk image and the resulting backup is often called a disk partition image By default True Image 2013 stores only the hard disk sectors that c
120. age 2013 has a plug in for Windows Search To speed up searches in your backups you can install the plug in for indexing the backups After indexing you will be able to search backup content by entering a filename into the Windows Search query field without opening True Image 2013 Using the search results you can Select any file and open it for viewing and or save that file back to anywhere in the file system not in the backup or where it was before See in which backup a given file is stored and recover that backup In addition to indexing the files in backups by their names Windows Search provides True Image 2013 with the ability to perform full text indexing of many files in your backups You will be able to use this feature and perform searches of the files content Full text indexing of files in backup is provided only for the file types recognizable by Windows Search It recognizes text files Microsoft Office files all Microsoft Office Outlook and Microsoft Outlook Express items and more The contents of password protected backups or backups protected by a password and encryption will not be indexed though Windows Search provides search for the tib files of such backups Furthermore Windows Search has no access to Acronis Secure Zone so it will be unable to search and index backups in the zone Windows Search does not support indexing of zip files content 1 Toregister the plug in click the down arrow to the right o
121. ain backup fails In addition to enhancing the backed up data security with replication this feature allows you to copy a set of documents for example to a USB stick for working on them at home So now you can perform a normal backup and copy the same files to a USB stick or any local hard drive A reserve copy always contains all the files selected for backup that is when creating a reserve copy the program always makes a full backup of the source data You cannot make a reserve copy in the form of an incremental or differential backup Also remember that the operation will take more time because normal backup and reserve copying are performed one after another and not simultaneously Furthermore you will need more storage space or an additional storage device For example to make a reserve copy of some files on a USB stick 1 While configuring a backup click the File backup options link expand the Backup reserve copy item and then select the Create a reserve copy of my backups box This opens the Browse for folder window 2 Select the destination and create a folder for a reserve copy by clicking the New folder button Browse for Folder Select destination f Desktop B tester a jE Computer Floppy Disk Drive A es KINGSTON D B My Internet D New project W oid B Project amp Local Disk C FAT32 E ca FAT16 F m Folder X New folder OK Cancel 3 Finish configuring
122. allocated space Partition size 249 GB Free space before 0 gt MB Free space after 0 MB Z Optional steps Carefully read the summary of operations to be performed and then click Proceed In the case being described recovery of the System Reserved partition steps 10 12 are optional You need to perform them when recovering a hidden partition created by the PC manufacturer When the operation finishes proceed to MBR recovery You need to recover the MBR because the PC manufacturer could change the generic Windows MBR or a sector on track 0 to provide access to the hidden partition Select the same backup again Right click and select Recover in the shortcut menu Choose Recover whole disks and partitions at the Recovery method step and then select the MBR and Track 0 box At the next step select the destination disk as the target for MBR recovery click Next and then Proceed After MBR recovery is complete exit the standalone version of True Image 2013 Windows should not see both the new and old drive during the first boot after recovery because this could result in problems booting Windows If you upgrade the old drive to a larger capacity new one disconnect the old drive before the first boot Switch off the computer if you need to disconnect the old drive Otherwise just reboot the computer after removing the rescue media Boot the computer to Windows It may report that new ha
123. and a component and customize the desired data destruction method files to clean clean up registry search strings you have used for finding computers in the local network etc To do this click the triangle near the component select an option from the list and specify the settings After you set the desired components properties click OK to save your settings These settings will be used as default next time you launch the Clean up wizard If you have already changed the clean up settings before you can always return to the program defaults by clicking the Restore Defaults button System components Recycle Bin Temporary files Hard disk free space Find Computer list Find File list Recently Used Documents list Windows Run List Opened saved files history User Credentials Windows Prefetch Directory 8 8 3 2 Default clean up options The default clean up options are available by clicking the Click to change this setting link on the Data Destruction Method option page To change the default clean up options Choose on the tree the component clean up settings which you need to change After you change the options click OK to save your settings If you have already changed the clean up settings before you can always return to the program defaults by clicking the Restore Defaults button General By default the summary dialog window is displayed after each clean up procedure ends the Sho
124. and choosing Recover in a shortcut menu This shortcut menu also enables you to open the file or view its versions When searching files in backups you can type all or part of the filename and use the common Windows wildcard characters For example to find all batch files in the backups type bat Typing my exe will allow you to find all exe files with names consisting of five symbols and starting with my It should be noted that search is case insensitive i e Backup and backup is the same search string When a file is included in several backups and it has been modified the search results will show the number of file versions in the appropriate column Please note that True Image 2013 does not search files in encrypted and password protected tib backups nor in the password protected Acronis Secure Zone In addition the program does not search files in zip backups created by True Image 2013 7 8 2 Using Windows Search with True Image 2013 If you use any edition of Windows Vista or Windows 7 that has built in Desktop Search functionality or Windows Desktop Search 3 0 or later you can enable indexing for tib files If you do not have Windows Search installed but would like to use it you can download Windows Search 4 0 for free from Microsoft s Web site To download click http www microsoft com download en details aspx id 23 Double click on the downloaded file and follow the instructions for installation True Im
125. and s execution is complete parameter enabled for Pre commands by default will permit the backup process to run concurrently with your command execution The Abort the operation if the user command fails enabled by default parameter will abort the operation if any errors occur in command execution You can test a command you entered by clicking the Test command button 3 13 8 Backup splitting True Image 2013 cannot split already existing backups Backups can be split only when being created Large backups can be split into several files that together make up the original backup A backup can also be split for burning to removable media The default setting Automatic With this setting True Image 2013 will act as follows When backing up to a hard disk If the selected disk has enough space and its file system allows the estimated file size the program will create a single backup file f the storage disk has enough space but its file system does not allow the estimated file size the program will automatically split the image into several files If you do not have enough space to store the image on your hard disk the program will warn you and wait for your decision as to how you plan to fix the problem You can try to free some additional space and continue or select another disk When backing up to a CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW BD R RE n True Image 2013 will ask you to insert a new disk when the previous one is
126. and the source archive name Your original archive will be overwritten To specify another location for the consolidated archive Select the New location item and click the Browse button Specify the location where you want the consolidated archive to be stored to from the drives tree If required you can create a new folder in the selected location by clicking the di Create new folder button or delete the unnecessary folder by clicking the x Delete button Inthe File name field enter a name for the consolidated archive or click the Generate name button to generate the name automatically If you don t need the original archive you may delete it by selecting the Delete the original archive check box m Click Next to continue You cannot choose another location when consolidating backups in an archive located in Acronis Secure Zone 3 15 4 Consolidation summary The summary window contains a list of briefly described operations that True Image 2013 will perform after clicking Proceed If some parameters need to be changed choose the necessary step in the left part of the window and correct the parameter Click the Proceed button to start the listed operations Click the Options button to perform the optional steps Click the Cancel button to exit the wizard without performing any operations 3 16 Cloning backup settings When you already have a backup and you need to create a new backup of the same type disk
127. ant to delete the vhd file used for booting If so open Windows Explorer and delete the file 8 11 4 Acronis Boot Sequence Manager The Acronis Boot Sequence Manager tool is only available for users of the Enterprise and Ultimate editions of Windows 7 Acronis Boot Sequence Manager allows you to add Windows 7 system partition images to the booting list and then manage the list You can add to the list images backed up both in the vhd and tib formats Adding a tib image requires converting it into the vhd format For more detailed information on booting from tib images see Booting from a tib image of your Windows 7 system partition p 227 Actual booting is carried out using Windows boot loader Acronis Boot Sequence Manager just adds virtual disks vhd files to the Windows boot loader list of disks available for booting to Windows 7 If you do not select from where to boot then by default the computer boots from the first entry in the booting list after waiting for a time interval specified in the Boot Timeout field To change the default boot disk either physical or virtual you can move entries up and down in the list using the corresponding buttons on the toolbar Clicking the Rename button allows you to assign a desired name to a list entry When you no longer need an entry in the list you can remove it by clicking Remove on the toolbar The Remove all button allows you to remove all entries related to virtual disks and rest
128. ars 8 6 3 1 Partition settings Specify the settings for the partition being created Size You can resize and relocate the partition being created If you want to resize the partition Point the cursor at the partition border If the cursor is pointed exactly at the partition border it will change into two vertical lines with arrows on each side Hold down the left mouse button and drag the selected partition border to enlarge or reduce the partition size You can also set the size of the partition manually by typing in the desired partition size in the Partition Size field If you want to relocate the partition Point the cursor at the partition The cursor will change into a crosshair Hold down the left mouse button and drag the partition until you get the necessary size of the Free space before and or Free space after fields You can also set the amount of unallocated space before or after the selected partition by manually typing in the necessary value in the respective fields If you create one or more logical drives the program will reserve some unallocated space for system needs in front of the created partition s If you create a primary partition or a primary partition together with a logical one then no unallocated space will be reserved for system needs 199 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 File System Choose the file system type for the partition being created Different partition
129. ary operating system duplicate made by updates Because of this you can safely install system updates when they appear When Windows Update informs you that updates for the system and Microsoft applications are ready for installation turn on the Try amp Decide and then proceed to install the updates If you encounter any sort of problem discard the changes and leave your real operating system and applications untouched You can leave the Try amp Decide turned on as long as you like because this mode survives across reboots of your operating system When your computer reboots for whatever reason while working in the Try mode before booting of the operating system starts you will be shown a dialog offering you two choices stop the mode and discard changes or continue working in the mode This will allow you to discard the changes that have resulted in a system crash On the other hand if you reboot for example after installing an application you can continue working in the Try mode after starting Windows Continue in the mode Stop and discard J Acronis Try amp Decide Serine When you decide to turn the mode off click the Try amp Decide icon The program will show a dialog where you should decide what to do with the changes to your system made in the Try mode apply or discard Choosing Apply changes will allow you to keep the changes made to the system and choosing Discard changes will return your s
130. as follows 1 Double click on the downloaded file to start installation 2 Having finished the installation you can proceed with creating a BartPE CD DVD with True Image 2013 plug in The below description is based on PE builder version 3 1 10a To create a BartPE CD withthe True Image 2013 plug in follow the instructions below Download the PE builder using link http nu2 nu pebuilder download and install it Gotothe True Image 2013 installation folder The default folder is C Program Files Acronis or C Program Files Acronis Media Add ons Rename the BartPE folder to Acronis Copy this folder into the Plugin folder in the BartPE builder installation directory The default directory is C pebuilder3110a or similar Run the PE builder put in the necessary paths the online help is available at http nu2 nu pebuilder help and click the Plugins button PE PE Builder v3 1 10a Builder Source Help Builder Source path to Windows installation files A Custom include files and Folders From this directory Output C pebuilder3110a BartPE BartPE Media output O None Create 150 image enter filename c pebuilder31 10a pebuilder iso O Burn to CD DVD Burn using StarBurn Plugin list AutoErase RW Eject after burn Enabled Name 443 File Management Utility Acronis True Image Ad Aware SE Adaptec ASPI Background info bginfo Bart s Stuff Test free edit
131. ate at the moment If not then the validation will not run Ina month August 15 at 12 15 the validation will start again As before your computer must be in the screen saver state The same will occur on September 15 and so on You can change the default settings and specify your own schedule This may be useful if you set a custom backup scheme with incremental backups For example you may want to schedule validation of all backup versions the initial full backup version and subsequent incremental backup versions once a week For more information see Scheduling p 157 3 13 10 Backup reserve copy Backup reserve copy is an independent full backup version created immediately after a normal backup and containing the same data You can save reserve copies of your backups on the file system a network drive or a USB flash drive To make a reserve copy 1 Select the Create a reserve copy of my backups check box 2 Specify a location for the backup copies All options of reserve copies such as backup compression backup splitting etc are inherited from the source backup A reserve copy always contains all the files selected for backup that is when creating a reserve copy the program always makes a full backup of the source data You cannot make a reserve copy in the form of an incremental or differential backup Also remember that you will pay for the enhanced convenience and increased security of your data by th
132. audio and USB Windows takes control over this process during the logon phase If some of the new hardware is not detected you will have a chance to install the drivers for it later manually 4 10 How to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager The Acronis Startup Recovery Manager enables you to start True Image 2013 ona local computer without loading the operating system If Windows won t load this feature allows you to use True Image 2013 by itself to recover damaged partitions To be able to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager at boot time Click the Tools and utilities tab and then select Acronis Startup Recovery Manager m Click the Activate button J Acronis Startup Recovery Manager E Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager allows you to recover your computer at boot time before the operating system starts gt Activate If F11 is pressed at boot time Acronis True Image will be run a Sancel amp Attention When Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is activated it overwrites the master boot record MBR with its own boot code If you have any third party boot managers installed you will have to reactivate them after activating the Startup Recovery Manager For Linux loaders e g LiLo and GRUB you might consider installing them to a Linux root or boot partition boot record instead of an MBR before activating Acronis Startup Recovery Manager If a failure occurs turn on the com
133. cal Support Maintenance and Support Program If you need assistance with your product please go to http www acronis com support Product Updates You can download the latest updates for all your registered software products from our website at any time after logging into your Account https www acronis com my and registering the product See Registering Acronis Products at the Website http kb acronis com content 4834 and Acronis Website User Guide http kb acronis com content 8128 1 1 6 7 Trial version information The trial version of True Image 2013 will work only during the trial period of 30 days It has the following limitations Disk cloning is disabled True Image 2013 Plus Pack is not available Only recovering is available when booting from an Acronis Bootable Media Data synchronization is available without any limitations but after the trial period expires Your computer will be excluded from all syncs After installing the full version of True Image 2013 you will be able to connect to the syncs again All the versions of synced files will be permanently deleted from the Acronis Cloud To purchase the full version please visit http www acronis com buy atih http www acronis com buy atih Click Go to main screen to start True Image 2013 trial version Click Buy now to go to the official Acronis online store Click Activate if you have already purchased the full version and have a valid prod
134. can select from a number of data destruction algorithms depending on the importance of your confidential information Be aware that depending on the total size of selected partitions and the selected data destruction algorithm the data destruction may take many hours Working with Acronis DriveCleanser With Acronis DriveCleanser you can perform the following Clean up the selected hard disks or partitions using preset algorithms Create and execute custom user algorithms of hard disk clean up Acronis DriveCleanser is based on a wizard that scripts all hard disk operations so no data destruction is performed until you click Proceed in the wizard s Summary window At any moment you can return to the previous steps to select other disks partitions or data destruction algorithms To permanently destroy data on your disk Click the Tools and utilities tab and then click Acronis DriveCleanser Follow the Acronis DriveCleanser wizard steps 8 8 1 1 Data selection First you must select the hard disk partitions where you want to destroy data Acronis DriveCleanser Required steps Select drives and partitions with data to erase Source selection Algorithm selection 16 GB New Volume E 16 00 GB NTFS oO Primary Logical Dynamic D Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported Cancel To select a partition click the corresponding rectangle You will see a red mar
135. card the changes accumulated in the system in the Try mode and the system will be rebooted and reverted exactly to the state it was in prior to turning on the Try mode including all those hidden files 7 7 Scheduling To open the Scheduler window click the Turn on link to the right of Schedule while configuring a backup Here you can specify the backup and validation schedule settings exe O Schedule your operation bad eel E Daily Monthly ama E Weekly Every Fourth vj Vednesday ama On 1 2 3 5 6 7 Monthly 8 9 2 S rE ET c Se Upon event 15 A Go RT Bn dD EJ 21 R2 2R aa a 2E 2a a28 Startat 7 00 PM Advanced settings A Run the backup only when the computer is idle v Prevent the computer from going to sleep hibernate V Wake up the sleeping hibernating computer Missed backup V Run at system startup Operation start delay in minutes GU 5B Do not schedule OK Cancel You can choose and set up one of the following backup or validation frequencies Daily p 159 the operation will be executed once a day or more frequently Weekly p 159 the operation will be executed once a week or several times a week on the selected days Monthly p 160 the operation will be executed once a month or several times a month on the selected dates Upon event p 160 the operation will be executed upon an event Clicking the Do not schedule button turns off
136. ckup Nonstop Backup will resume after you stop the Try mode When the Try mode is started you won t be able to use the Hibernate power saving mode 7 6 2 Starting the Try mode To start the Try mode Click Try amp Decide on the Tools and utilities tab Set up the Try amp Decide options Protected partitions p 155 Storage for virtual changes p 155 Alert settings p 156 Start the Try mode by clicking the Try amp Decide icon The program starts tracking all changes made to the OS and files and temporarily stores all the changes on the selected disk Every soft reboot of your computer while in the Try mode will result in adding up to 500 MB of Try amp Decide s housekeeping data into the storage selected for storing virtual changes This data will be added even if the protected partition has not changed between reboots Having performed all the changes you wanted to try click the Try amp Decide icon again to turn off the Try mode The program will ask if you want to apply or to discard the changes True Image 2013 will track changes until the disk space in the location selected for storing virtual changes remains sufficient for applying the changes if you choose to apply them Then the program will alert you that the time has come to make a decision on whether to apply or discard the changes made so far If you choose to not heed the alert message the program will automatically restart the system when the disk is
137. ckup versions then again 1 full and 6 incremental versions and so on The versions will be stored for 1 month After the period the program analyzes if the oldest backup versions may be deleted It depends on the version chain consistency To keep the consistency the program deletes the oldest versions by chains 1 full 6 incremental backup versions after creating a new analogous version chain Backup scheduler setting daily Result you have backup versions for every day of the last month Required storage space depends on the number of versions and their sizes 3 13 4 Custom schemes With True Image 2013 you also can create your own backup schemes Schemes can be based on the pre defined backup schemes You can make changes in a selected pre defined scheme to suit your needs and then save the changed scheme as a new one You cannot overwrite existing pre defined backup schemes In addition you can create custom schemes from scratch based on full differential or incremental backup versions So first of all select one of the backup methods in the appropriate box Full p 39 Select this method if you want to create only full backup versions Differential p 39 Select this method if you want to create backup chains containing only full and differential backup versions You can configure the scheme by using one of the following options Create only differential versions after the initial full version select this i
138. click OK 23 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 N N If you have mounted several partitions by default all of them will be selected for unmounting You can disconnect all mounted drives together or disconnect only those you do not need mounted anymore Unmount fas Unmount drive Select the drives you want to unmount Drive Letter Volume Label Disk Size File System v c New Volume 16 GB NTFS o You can also do this in Windows Explorer by right clicking on the disk icon and choosing Unmount 8 11 Working with vhd files In this section Converting tib images into vhd virtual disks and vice versa 224 Recovery using vhd files created by Windows Backup scssseeeees 226 Booting from a tib image of your Windows 7 system partition 227 Acronis Boot Sequence Mana get ccccccceseeseseceeceeeeeeeeseaneaeeeeeeeeeeeeas 228 8 11 1 Converting tib images into vhd virtual disks and vice versa The standalone versions of True Image 2013 that start when booting from the rescue media do not support conversion operations 8 11 1 1 Converting Acronis backup Users of the Enterprise and Ultimate editions of Windows 7 can convert a tib image of the system partition into the vhd format if they want to use the converted vhd file for booting the operating system Or they may want to get the ability to mount images without using True Image 2013 To convert an Acroni
139. clicking the down arrow to the right of the current destination and selecting Browse By default the program will assign the name of the folder to be backed up to the backup but if you would like to assign another name type the name in the Backup name field You can also add useful information to the backup name To do so click the down arrow to the right of the destination and click Browse Select the items you want to add in the right field of the File name line add date the backup creation date will be added add time the backup creation time will be added add user name the current user name will be added add machine name the computer name will be added add task name the name of the task that includes the backup will be added add task run number the sequence number of the task run will be added 4 Click the Back up now button if you want to run backup immediately You can also delay the start of backup for up to 6 hours by clicking the down arrow to the right of this button and selecting a delay interval from the dropdown list When you need to change the default backup options click File backup options and set the options you require You can also change the default backup scheme by clicking on the appropriate link For more information see Backup schemes p 60 You cannot change the backup scheme when backing up to optical media such as a DVD BD In this case True Image 2013 by default uses a
140. computer s disks This will allow for identification of the partitions by their names and not by the disk letters Disk letters may differ when booting from the rescue media The names will help you find the drive containing your backups as well as the target new drive Information on partition sizes drive capacities their manufacturers and model numbers can also help to correctly identify the drives It is highly recommended to install the new hard drive to the same position in the computer and to use the same cable and connector that was used for the original drive This is not always possible e g the old drive may be an IDE and the new drive may be a SATA In any case install the new drive to where it will be used 4 5 1 Recovering a disk with a hidden partition A hidden partition may be created by the PC manufacturer for diagnostics or system recovery Users of Windows 7 usually have the hidden System Reserved partition Recovering a backup of a system disk with a hidden partition requires that you to take into account some additional factors First of all it is necessary for the new drive to keep the physical order of the partitions that existed on the old drive In addition you should place the hidden partition in the same location usually at the start or the end of the disk space To minimize the risk of possible problems it is better to recover the hidden partition without resizing Here we describe recovery of a system disk wi
141. contains rue Image Heme by Acros ol gt Ea Oaks ajd parttons Pies and folders Ais S My system gt y 06 2011 11 09 4 2 Available for recovery 1 System Reserved 24 1 MB ued F Local Disk C 8 2 G8 used 2 2 terms 8 3 G8 eal Current item The selected Time line information area backup version Contains all versions Information on the current of the backup disk partition file or folder Right clicking on a backup version opens the shortcut menu with other available operations Recover select to recover the current backup version Validate select to check the integrity of the backup version data 27 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Convert to Windows backup for image backups select to convert the backup version s TIB file to VHD file Mount for image backups select to mount the backup version as a disk Delete version select to delete the backup version the backup chain will not be corrupted View select to set up the time line to show some additional information To find a file or folder you need to recover type the file or folder name in the search field Both tabs also show backup comments and allow for adding editing and deleting comments to the selected backup version If a backup version does not have comments click the Add comment icon then type your comments in the comments area and click the Save icon If there is already a comment you can edit
142. cremental or differential method the first backup chain will start from the second full backup version And only the third version of the backup will be incremental or differential one Note that when the check box is selected the Store no more than n recent versions check box will change to Store no more than 1 n recent versions 3 13 4 1 Managing custom backup schemes If you change anything in an existing backup scheme you can save the changed scheme as a new one In this case you need to specify a new name for that backup scheme You can overwrite existing custom schemes You cannot overwrite existing pre defined backup schemes Inascheme name you can use any symbols allowed by OS for naming files The maximum length of a backup scheme name is 255 symbols You can create not more than 16 custom backup schemes After creating a custom backup scheme you can use it as any other existing backup scheme while configuring a backup You can also use a custom backup scheme without saving it In this case it will be available only for the backup where it was created and you will be unable to use it for other backups If you do not need a custom backup scheme anymore you can delete it To delete the scheme select it in the backup schemes list click Delete and then click Delete scheme in the confirmation window The pre defined backup schemes cannot be deleted 3 13 4 2 Automatic version consolidation Automatic co
143. ct Set password Finish pa Enter new password 000000 Confirm LALLI Secret question What is your father s middle name Answer Next gt Cancel True Image 2013 repair or update will not affect the password However if the program is removed and then installed again while keeping the Acronis Secure Zone on the disk the password to the Acronis Secure Zone will be reset 8 4 5 4 Removing Acronis Secure Zone Select the partitions to which you want to add the space freed up from Acronis Secure Zone If you select several partitions the space will be distributed proportionally to each partition s size 187 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 To select a partition Select the appropriate partition s check box then click Next Acronis Secure Zone can be also removed while uninstalling the program You will have a choice between uninstallation of the program without removing Acronis Secure Zone and removing software along with Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Secure Zone deletion will automatically destroy all backups stored in the zone 8 4 6 Acronis Secure Zone summary The Acronis Secure Zone summary window displays a list of operations to be performed Creating or managing the Acronis Secure Zone operations may require reboot In that case after clicking the Proceed button you will be asked to confirm the reboot Manage Acronis Secure Zone Wizard Ee a G Manage Ac
144. ct the values in the appropriate boxes Online backup options o loJea Backup Performance Notifications Exclusions Acronis Cloud connection attempts Number of attempts 10 Time interval between attempts in seconds 30 Acronis Cloud cleanup v fay Encryption key v Windows account y Save the settings as default e Reset to initial settings OK Cancel 6 5 2 Acronis Cloud cleanup You can configure the cleanup settings for Acronis Cloud to optimize usage of its space To set the limits for the amount of versions on Acronis Cloud Select the Delete versions that are older than check box and enter a value that limits the maximum age of the older versions All other versions will be automatically deleted except the most recent versions Select the Store no more than recent versions check box and enter a value that limits the maximum number of all versions in the storage Online backup options bo baes Backup Performance Notifications Exclusions Acronis Cloud connection attempts y Acronis Cloud cleanup a V Delete versions that are older than 6 V Store no more than 10 recent versions fay Encryption key v Windows account y E Save the settings as default Reset to initial settings OK Cancel 6 5 3 Encryption key To protect your data on Acronis Cloud from unauthorized access you can use encryption In this case
145. d a backup of the system partition True Image 2013 provides for recovery from a disaster caused by system data corruption viruses malware or other causes If the operating system fails to boot True Image 2013 will recover the system partition The boxed product comes with a rescue CD Other legal owners of the program can create a rescue media by using the Media Builder tool Scheduling For your backups to be really helpful they must be as up to date as possible This means that you should run backups on a regular basis say once a day Although creating an True Image 2013 backup is quite easy on occasion you may forget to do a backup With the scheduler you do not have to remember You can schedule automatic backups ahead of time Your data will be backed up as long as there is sufficient storage space Understanding these terms and concepts will be helpful when using the program s features 1 1 4 New in True Image 2013 by Acronis Windows 8 support True Image 2013 supports the next version of the operating system released by Microsoft namely Windows 8 You can safely buy and install Windows 8 without worrying whether you will be able to restore your system if need arises New backup naming rules The new automatic backup naming is more flexible and convenient By default True Image 2013 creates for each backup task a folder with a backup task name and keeps in this folder all related backups A backup filename always c
146. d only in special cases For more information see Image creation mode p 65 While creating a sector by sector backup the program copies both used and unused hard disk sectors and the backup file will usually be significantly larger Will my system disk backup include drivers documents pictures etc Yes such a backup will contain the drivers as well as the contents of the My documents folder and its subfolders if you kept the default location of the My documents folder If you have just a single hard disk in your PC such a backup will contain all of the operating system applications and data have an old hard disk drive which is almost full in my notebook purchased a new bigger HDD How can I transfer Windows programs and data to the new disk You can either clone the old hard disk on the new one or back up the old hard disk and then recover the backup to a new one The optimum method usually depends on your old hard disk partitions layout have replaced my failed motherboard with a different one and now Windows does not start have backups of my system disk Is it possible to use them for restoring my computer back to life Yes this is possible but only with use of Acronis Universal Restore provided by the separately purchased True Image 2013 Plus Pack You will need to select the Use Acronis Universal Restore checkbox when configuring recovery For more information see Recovering to different hardware p 96 You
147. d syncs Show only my favorite syncs icon filters the syncs which you have marked as favorite Expand all syncs icon expands all collapsed sync boxes Collapse all syncs icon collapses all expanded sync boxes into narrow stripes Sort by Name sorts all syncs in alphabetical order Type sorts all syncs according to their types Sync list area The area shows the boxes of the syncs you already have It provides access to all operations with the existing syncs Operations menu Clicking the gear icon in the box of a selected sync opens the Operations menu containing the following items Sync now runs data synchronization process forcibly If a sync process has been interrupted for some reason for example your Internet connection has failed or it has completed with errors you can manually restart the sync process To do this first try to resolve the issue and then click Sync now Pause allows you to pause and resume the sync process Note that the action does not delete the sync itself and your data will not be lost Share opens the window where you can specify e mail addresses of persons you want to invite to share the selected sync Sync with Acronis Cloud allows you to store versions of the synced files on Acronis Cloud Local folder allows you to synchronize with a local folder for example located on an external hard drive Other computer allows you to
148. data Disks and partitions System files and folders Hidden files and folders Temporary files and folders m System registry Databases Data of e mail programs including Microsoft Outlook and others Other data that cannot be represented as separate files or folders for example contacts from your address book Windows 7 and Windows 8 libraries Documents Music etc 5 5 Sync icons While working with syncs you will see special icons The icons give you the following information Type and current state of your syncs the icons are shown on sync boxes and in the notification area Current state of synced files and folders the icons are shown in Acronis Time Explorer and Windows Explorer Sync boxes Sync type icons J Sync within one computer p 115 including sync with removable and remote storage devices Synchronization between computers with the same account for example between your home computers See details in How to sync data between your computers p 115 your computer and your friend s computer See details in How to sync data with another person Synchronization between computers which belong to different accounts for example between p 116 Sync state icons The last synchronization completed successfully a The sync is in progress at the moment The sync is paused xa An error occurred during the last synchronization Windows Explorer Sync state icons
149. dels ar A M amp True Image Pen a amp Ea Acronis System Report ae 2 Windows True Image 2013 by Acronis You can turn on MouseKeys to control the mouse pointer using the numeric keypad Press left ALT left SHIFT NUM LOCK or CTRL M or F10 and control the pointer using the numeric keypad keys save itto a USB flash drive Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 When the program starts we recommend you try recovering some files from your backup A test recovery allows you to make sure that your rescue CD can be used for recovery In addition you will check that the program detects all the hard drives you have in your system If you have a spare hard drive we strongly recommend you to try a test recovery of your system partition to this hard drive How to test recovery as well as check the drives and network adapter 1 If you have file backups start Recovery Wizard by clicking Recovery gt File Recovery on the toolbar If you have only disk and partition backup Recovery Wizard also starts and the recovery procedure is similar In such a case you need to select Recover chosen files and folders at the Recovery Method step Select a backup at the Archive location step and then click Next Flacovery Wizard LE E Recovery Wizard REIIUIERIE OS Select a backup from which to recover Archive selection Name Created Com
150. destination or browse for a destination after clicking on the current destination and selecting a suitable destination from the dropdown list You cannot select the partition to be protected as the destination for Nonstop Backup storage 4 The nonstop backup will get a default name but if you would like to assign another name type the name in the Backup name field 5 Click the Start now button to start protecting the selected partition s immediately Nonstop Backup and Try amp Decide cannot work simultaneously If you click the Start now button when the Try mode is turned on the program will display a message that Nonstop Backup cannot start while you are working in the Try mode To start Nonstop Backup you will need to finish a Try amp Decide session You can exclude from protection files that match the criteria you specify To add exclusion criteria click the Nonstop backup options link While adding criteria you can use the common Windows wildcard characters For more information see Excluding items from backup p 73 3 7 3 Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage can be created on local hard disk drives both internal and external In many cases an external hard disk will be the best choice for Nonstop Backup data storage You can use an external disk with any of the following interfaces USB including USB 3 0 eSATA FireWire and SCSI You can also use an NAS as the storage but with
151. detects both the source and target disks before starting the cloning operation Can clone or back up and recover a dual boot machine Yes this is possible in most cases If your systems are installed in separate partitions of the same physical hard disk drive cloning or recovery usually proceeds without any problems If the systems are on different physical hard disk drives there may be some problems with bootability after recovery Please note that activating Acronis Startup Recovery Manager on dual and multiboot systems with Linux loaders requires special preparation For more information see How to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager p 101 Furthermore recovering a backup of a dual boot machine to different hardware requires using Acronis Universal Restore Does True Image 2013 support RAID True Image 2013 supports hardware RAID arrays of all popular types Support of software RAID configurations on dynamic disks is provided only with True Image 2013 Plus Pack Even with the Plus Pack the program does not support software RAID 1 mirrored and RAID 5 Acronis Bootable Rescue Media supports most of the popular hardware RAID controllers If the standard Acronis rescue media does not see the RAID as a single volume the media does not have the appropriate drivers Owners of the True Image 2013 Plus Pack can try to create WinPE based rescue media This media may provide the necessary drivers Canluse True Image 2013 to migrate fro
152. displaying the tab that was selected when you exited the program 1 1 9 2 Backup and recovery tab The Backup and recovery tab provides quick access to all of the program functionality related to data backup and recovery If you have not created any backups yet the program will offer to create a new backup or add an existing backup If you have at least one backup the screen will display the list of your backups Tabs Settings button Use to switch between Opens menu with global the program main functions program settings Help button Opens Help menu lt p Tse Image Morne iry Acronis 4 1 Acronis Get tarted Backupandrecovery Synchronization Tooli and utilities Backup toolbar s 3 D kas PY tz Dis Oni end potten Onine bechup Ohe Create tect able Rax eve BI set ty The most frequently bectup bockups webs taisg used operations for backup management P ag Windows Contacts Today at 1445 ii Oo a My becteps Expanded a dl Documents backup box a EAM acts Contains detailed tenon information about 3 hate Todey at 1486 backup i 218 Fite bach Collapsed My system backup box baee beciag Takes less space than an expanded one Backup buttons Recovery buttons Click to create a new The most frequently backup version used recovery operation The toolbar See the toolbar commands description in Backup and recovery toolbar p 21 The backups area The area shows the backups yo
153. dow stating that the destination disk contains partitions perhaps with useful data To confirm deletion of the partitions click OK Carefully read the summary of operations at the Finish step and then click Proceed If the capacities of the source backed up disk and the destination disk are different the new disk space will be proportionally distributed between the recovered partitions After successfully recovering the system partition exit True Image 2013 Enter the BIOS make the system hard disk the first boot device and boot to the recovered Windows 99 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 9 Acronis Universal Restore 4 9 1 Purpose of Acronis Universal Restore Universal Restore is part of the True Image 2013 Plus Pack which must be purchased separately True Image 2013 Plus Pack has its own license and is installed from its own setup file You need to re create bootable media in order to make the newly installed Universal Restore add on operational in the bootable recovery environment A system disk image can be restored easily on the hardware where it was created or to identical hardware However if you change the motherboard or use another processor version a likely possibility in case of hardware failure the recovered system could fail to boot Trying to move the system to a new more powerful computer will usually produce the same result This is because the new hardware is incompatible with critica
154. ds You can select an appropriate data destruction method depending on the importance of your confidential information The File Shredder provides the same capabilities for individual files and folders Finally the System Clean up wizard ensures elimination of all of the traces of your computer activities When working on a PC you leave thousands of bytes of evidence showing your actions You may not even be aware of these traces This could include user names and passwords as well as other personal information that could be used to steal your identity if it fell into the wrong hands This utility wipes them all completely away from the disk drive The data destruction methods are described in detail in Hard Disk Wiping methods p 219 of this guide In this section AGronis Drive Cleansetinsiccescetdeeicecaiaeteetecevens hcceutetcvedies cae deloevecevarsiteeeutaten 204 Fil shr dder rene E E a 211 System CleanUp eseese eaea e eed eee E E E a 213 Hard Disk Wiping Methods cccsecsessscecececessesseaeceeeeecessesseaeeeeeeseeseees 219 8 8 1 Acronis DriveCleanser Many operating systems do not provide users with secure data destruction tools so deleted files can be recovered easily by using simple applications Even a complete disk reformat cannot guarantee permanent confidential data destruction Acronis DriveCleanser solves this problem with guaranteed and permanent data destruction on selected hard disks and partitions You
155. e In the Backup method box select Incremental from the drop down list Ot OD oe Click Create a full version after every n incremental versions and type or select 6 In that case the program will first create the initial full backup version no matter how you set up a backup process the first backup version will always be the full one and then 6 incremental versions day by day Then it will create 1 full version and 6 incremental versions again and so on So every new full version will be created in exactly a week s time 9 To limit the storage time for the versions click Turn on automatic cleanup 10 Click Delete version chains older than n days type or select 21 and click OK 11 In the File Backup window check that all settings are correct and click Back up now If you want your first backup to run only at the time you specified in the Scheduler click the down arrow to the right of the Back up now button and select Later in the drop down list 2 Disk backup Full version every 2 months differential version twice a month Case You need to back up your system partition twice a month and create a new full backup version every two months In addition you want to use no more than 100 GB of disk space to store the backup versions Let s see how you can do it using a custom backup scheme 1 On the Backup and recovery tab click Disk and partition backup 2 Inthe Disk Backup window select your system partition
156. e KB may have recommendations on solving your specific problem Acronis Support team continuously adds new articles to the KB If you are not able to find the solution to your problem in the KB or the suggested solution s does not help feel free to contact Acronis Customer Central at http www acronis com support When your issue is an error encountered during True Image 2013 operation the error message box will contain the Knowledge Base button Clicking the button will take you to a Support KB article offering solution s for the issue that caused the error The error message box will also have a link to the Acronis Support KB This link may be useful when the KB does not have the appropriate article yet Clicking the link will take you to a Web form There you can enter the event code displayed in the error box to search for a solution in the entire KB For more information see Acronis Smart Error Reporting p 231 System report Acronis Support personnel may request you to provide the system report To create the report select Generate system report in the Help menu then save the report and send it to Acronis Customer Central For more information see Acronis System Report p 230 9 5 Creating a custom rescue CD In most cases you can use a standard rescue CD created with a help of Acronis Media Builder For more information see Creating bootable rescue media p 169 If the recovery environment cannot detect some of the hard dis
157. e 2013 Plus Pack can try to create a WinPE based rescue media This may provide the necessary drivers For more information see Creating WinPE based rescue media p 176 One more option is to request a custom rescue media from Acronis Support For more information see Creating a custom rescue CD p 233 Please be aware that finding the appropriate drivers and making the custom rescue media may take time Furthermore finding the appropriate drivers may not be possible in some cases 7 5 3 Checking SSD partition alignment If you installed Windows Vista Windows 7 from the installation DVD to a new hard disk the operating system automatically aligns the hard disk during installation to a multiple of 4096 and usually to 1 024 MB In any case it will be useful to check Mount the SSD into the intended location in your computer Windows Vista Windows 7 1 Type cmd in the Search field and press Enter 2 Atthe command line prompt type wmic partition get BlockSize Index Name StartingOffset You will get the output looking like this iC Users tester gt uwmic partition get BlockSize StartingOffset Name Index BlockS ize ndex Name StartingOffset i gt Partition 32256 Partition 1076195635206 Partition 201371304968 Partition 203016360968 Partition Partition 17488 Partition 134235136 Partition 1648576 Partition 9 1648576 Ind Li 1 2 3 a Li 1 a a In the screen shot disk O
158. e Setup options window choose the installation option Change the installation folder if necessary 7 Click Proceed to begin installation To make changes in the setup use the Back and Next buttons Note If you purchased a boxed product the installation CD contains an installation file for installing an True Image 2013 plug in for the BartPE utility BartPE Bart Preinstalled Environment is a bootable Windows CD DVD created from the original Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 installation setup CD Applications are installed into BartPE in the form of plug ins and the True Image 2013 plug in can be included into the BartPE plug in tab Booting from the BartPE CD DVD with the included True Image 2013 plug in will allow you to work in a well known Windows environment and use practically all True Image 2013 functionality for recovering your system from a disaster For more information on the BartPE visit the BartPE homepage at http www nu2 nu pebuilder You can also download that installation file from the Acronis Web site Recovering from an True Image 2013 error If True Image 2013 ceased running or produced errors its files might be corrupted To repair this problem you first have to recover the program To do this run True Image 2013 installer again It will detect True Image 2013 on your computer and will ask you if you want to repair or remove it Removing True Image 2013 Select Start gt Settings gt Control panel g
159. e cause using the suggestions given in Trying to determine the crash cause p 78 If the crash is caused by corruption of the operating system use a backup to recover your system Make the preparations described in Preparing for recovery p 79 and then proceed with recovering your system 4 1 1 Trying to determine the crash cause A system crash can be due to two basic factors One reason is that your computer will not boot due to a hardware failure The second reason is that the operating system is corrupted and Windows will not start up In the first scenario it is better to let your service center handle the repairs However you may want to perform some routine tests Check the cables connectors power of external devices etc Then restart the computer The POST power on self test that starts immediately after you turn on your computer checks your system hardware If the POST has found a failure you will need to send the PC for repairs If the POST does not reveal a hardware failure enter BIOS and check whether it recognizes your system hard disk drive To enter BIOS press the required key combination Del F1 Ctrl Alt Esc Ctrl Esc or some other depending on your BIOS during the POST sequence Usually the message with the required key combination is displayed during the startup test Pressing this combination takes you to the setup menu Go to the hard disk autodetection utility which usually comes under Standard CMOS Setup
160. e first chain namely b1 You will have the following files left backup_full_b2_s1 tib backup_inc_b2_s2 tib backup_inc_b2_s3 tib If you continue creating backups the next chain will be named as follows backup_full_b3_s1 tib backup_inc_b3_s2 tib backup_inc_b3_s3 tib 3 4 Backing up partitions and disks To back up partitions or disks click Disk and partition backup on the Backup and recovery tab This opens the Disk Backup window Partition disk mode switcher Allows you to select partitions or whole disks Dink Bacto oto Configure disk backup process Source batch to Gtk mode What to back up z gy Loe Duk C P backup source Select the partitions or New Volume 0 whole disks you want to 7 back up New Volume O Destination DAMy backups Where to store The backup file will be stored in this location Sched Off Tuen on Beckup pheme Version chan Eockup name My petmons Disk backup options SS Click to configure Dist backup options additional settings Backup name box Schedule and Back up now Type a name for the backup scheme button Allows you to keep your Click when all settings backup up to date and are configured optimize backup strategy The steps below describe how to configure a backup using most of the available image backup settings 1 Select a partition to back up by selecting the corresponding check box If you want to back up more than one partition
161. e list or clear the partition s check box r Co a ees G Mount Wizard Required steps Drive letter YV Archive selection Select partitions to mount and assign drive letter V Finish amp Properties Partition Mount letter F Capa FreeS Tu Disk 2 M CA NTFS New Volume D G Pri 1600GB 15 39 GB NTFS Drive letter Z Mount the partitions in the read write mode 4 Ifyou select the Mount the partitions in the read write mode box the program assumes that the mounted image will be modified and creates an incremental backup file to capture the changes It is strongly recommended that you list the forthcoming changes in the Comments section to this file For you to be able to make comments the optional Comments step appears in the wizard 5 Having finished the settings click Proceed to connect the selected partition images as virtual disks 6 After the image is connected the program will run Windows Explorer showing its contents Now you can work with files or folders as if they were located on a real disk 8 10 Unmounting an image We recommend that you unmount the virtual disk after all necessary operations are finished as maintaining virtual disks takes considerable system resources If you do not unmount the disk it will disappear after your computer is turned off To disconnect the virtual disk click Unmount image on the Tools and utilities tab select the disk to unmount and
162. e of the Acronis Media Builder wizard Click Next to continue 9 2 Acronis Smart Error Reporting To help users with troubleshooting the new releases of Acronis products employ the so called Acronis Smart Error Reporting When an issue is caused by an error in the program s operation True Image 2013 displays an appropriate error message The error message contains an event code and a short description of the error sometimes with a possible solution for instance Check the disk and file system for errors and try to repeat the operation Event Code 0x000101F6 The error message may also include the program module where the error has occurred and the error message from the module You can view more detailed information about the error by clicking the More details link in the message box The detailed information may look like as is shown on the following screen shot Error Ba e Error while opening script file More information about this error and solutions may be available online in the Acronis Knowledge Base To access the online resource manually enter the event code at http kb acronis c rrorcode Event code Less details knowedge Base Quit To view the Acronis Knowledge Base article suggesting a solution s for correcting the error click the Knowledge Base button This will open a confirmation window that lists the information to be sent via Internet to the Acronis Knowledge Base Click OK t
163. e speaks of the necessity of complex multipass methods to guarantee information wiping The detailed theory of guaranteed information wiping is described in an article by Peter Gutmann Please see Secure Deletion of Data from Magnetic and Solid State Memory at http www cs auckland ac nz pgut001 pubs secure_del html 8 8 4 2 Information wiping methods used by Acronis The table below briefly describes information wiping methods used by Acronis Each description features the number of hard disk sector passes along with the number s written to each sector byte The description of built in information wiping methods United States Department of Defense 5220 22 M United States NAVSO P 5239 26 RLL 1 pass randomly selected symbols to each byte of each sector 2 complementary to written during the 1 pass 3 random symbols again 4 writing verification 1 pass 0x01 to all sectors 2 Ox27FFFFFF 3 random symbol sequences 4 verification 1t_ 6 alternate sequences of 0x00 and OxFF 7 OxAA i e 0x00 OxFF 0x00 OxFF 0x00 OxFF OxAA Russian GOST P50739 95 1 Logical zeros 0x00 numbers to each byte of each sector for 6 to 4 security level systems Randomly selected symbols numbers to each byte of each sector for 3 to 1 security level systems United States NAVSO 1 pass 0x01 to all sectors 2 Ox7FFFFFFF 3 P 5239 26 MFM random symbol sequences 4
164. e time required for performing the backup because normal backup and reserve copying are performed one at a time and not simultaneously Please be aware that CD DVDs are not supported as locations for reserve copies 3 13 11 Removable media settings When backing up to removable media you can make this media bootable by writing additional components to it Thus you will not need a separate bootable disk The following settings are available Place True Image on media True Image includes support of USB PC Card formerly PCMCIA and SCSI interfaces along with the storage devices connected via them and therefore is strongly recommended Place Acronis System Report on media Acronis System Report the component allows you to generate system report that is used for collecting information about your system in case of any program problem Report generation will be available before you start True Image 2013 from the bootable media The generated system report can be saved to a USB flash drive Place Acronis One Click Restore on media Acronis One Click Restore is a minimal addition to your bootable media allowing one click data recovery from an image backup stored on this media This means that when booting from the media and after clicking Recover all data will be silently recovered to its original place No options or selections such as resizing partitions will be possible Acronis One Click Restore can be added to the
165. e to be converted However you can select another location by clicking Browse The file can be directed to any storage supported by True Image 2013 except for Acronis Secure Zone The next step allows you to set options for the tib backup to be created You can protect the backup with a password and encryption select a desired compression level and split the backup for example for later burning to DVDs Add comments to the backup if you wish Click Proceed in the Summary window True Image 2013 cannot convert vhd files containing dynamic volumes which were originally located on more than one disk drive striped or spanned on two or more disk drives 8 11 2 Recovery using vhd files created by Windows Backup You may have vhd files if you used the Windows Backup utility included into Windows Vista and Windows 7 for backing up the system hard drive If you purchased True Image 2013 after using Windows Vista or Windows 7 backup utility you can recover your system hard drive from those vhd files using True Image 2013 When you need to recover your system using a vhd backup file proceed as follows 1 Arrange the boot order in BIOS so as to make your rescue media device CD DVD or USB stick the first boot device See Arranging boot order in BIOS p 103 Boot from the rescue media and select True Image After True Image 2013 starts click the My Disks link under Recover on the Welcome screen Choose the vhd backup file to be us
166. e will give you full control over the hard disk cloning procedure You will be able to adjust the size of the target partitions change their parameters and much more Next gt Cancel Automatic recommended in most cases In automatic mode you will only have to take several simple actions to transfer all the data including partitions files and folders to a newer disk making it bootable if the original disk was bootable Manual Manual mode will provide more data transfer flexibility Manual mode can be useful if you need to change the disk partition layout If the program finds two disks one partitioned and another unpartitioned it will automatically recognize the partitioned disk as the source disk and the unpartitioned disk as the destination disk In such case the next steps will be bypassed and you will be taken to the cloning Summary screen 190 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 5 4 Selecting a source disk You can determine the source and destination using the information provided in this window disk number capacity label partition and file system information If the program finds several partitioned disks it will ask you which is the source i e the older data disk re Clone Disk Wizard EIS Select the source hard disk from the list below Y Clone Mode L Disk properties Source Disk Destination Disk Drive Capacity B Disk1
167. eceesseeseesaeeeesesseeseaees 7 5 1 Preparing for migration naene Ee E E re EO A Aa Eea A a Eea iae e e Eas aE EEn aeae 7 5 2 What to do if True Image 2013 does not recognize your SSD ceseeseesseseeeeeeeees 7 5 3 Checking SSD partition alignMent sssessesesesesesssserisrsnsssrereesesesrssnsasesisrsrsrsrerenesesese 7 5 4 Fixing SSD partition alignment ccccccccsessssseseeessceseescsecssesessesscssceecsesseesesseeaseeeeeees 7 5 5 Migrating to an SSD using the backup and recovery method ssssssssesesssssssersnseseses 7 5 6 What to do if your SSD does not have enough space for all HDD content 7 6 Trying system changes safely ccccccccccccsssessssesecececessesseaeseeeesesesesnsaeeeseessesseasaeeeesesseeseaaaas TOA MAAN S VO DETO a EEA 7 6 2 Starting the Ty MOda a a E EAA A A EAA E AATE E EEA ANARE 7 6 3 Stopping the Try mode ssssessssseseseseseseeee 7 6 4 Try amp Decide options and notifications 7 6 5 Try amp Decide typical USC CASES ccceesecsesscssessessssseseesesscsseseesesseesecsusassseseesesseesessucaessesesseseeesesaeeaessesaeasonees Wy dames 01 1010 0 eee pee eS ee ee ee een 7 7 1 Daily EXECUTION PAFAMELELS ccccsccssesecscsscsscsscsesssssesssssesscsesesseessssessesecesesscsessesausaeaessssesoessecaeesesaseaseeeets 7 7 2 Weekly execution parameters ccccsccsccsesscsssssesessesscssesscsecsecsessessssseseeseseeesessessessesessecoeseeseesaesaueaeeaseneaees 7 7 3 M
168. ecovery Wizard Required steps Settings of Partition 1 1 i S Partition Flags Capac Free Sp Ty gs of Partition C Disk 1 LANTFS System Reserved C Pri Act 101 9MB 77 31 MB NTFS LANTFS System disk D3 i 15 9GB 7 755 GB NTFS Disk 2 NTFS Backups E i 16GB 12 05 GB NTFS Disk 3 NTFS New Disk F j 25 GB 24 91 GB NTFS Caneel 7 Clicking Accept returns you to the Settings of partition 1 1 screen Check the partition type and change it if necessary You should remember that the System Reserved partition must be primary and marked as active 91 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 Proceed to specifying the partition size by clicking Change default in the Partition size area By 92 default the partition occupies the entire new disk You need to keep the hidden partition size unchanged and place it in the same location on the disk at the start or the end of disk space To do this resize and relocate the partition by dragging it or its borders with a mouse on the horizontal bar on the screen Or you can enter corresponding values into the appropriate fields Partition size Free space before Free space after Click Accept when the partition has the required size and location and then click Next F x Facovary Wizard w sz 3 Recovery Wizard Specify recover settings of Partition 1 1 Partition location required Settings of Parti
169. ed a full backup once if you then create an incremental backup each day of a month you will get the same result as if you created full backups every day of the month As a rule incremental backups are considerably smaller than full or differential backups Such a backup scenario may consist of a weekly full system backup with intermediate daily backups that cover data that was changed since the LAST backup This scenario while requiring less storage space and time for the daily backups will require more work for the program to provide recovery after a system crash In the event of a Thursday crash the program would have to recover the Wednesday Tuesday and Monday incremental backups and the last FULL backup Differential is an intermediate between the first two approaches Each differential backup includes all the files changed since the last full backup It takes less time and space than Full but more than Incremental The good thing is that recovering is simpler than for 2 the program will have to recover the last differential backup and the last full backup To choose a desired backup method you usually need to configure a custom backup scheme For more information see Custom schemes p 61 An incremental or differential backup created after a disk is defragmented might be considerably larger than usual This is because the defragmentation program changes file locations on the disk and the backups reflect these changes
170. ed by default Show errors if this item is selected the time line shows failed backup versions and backup versions that have completed with errors 1 1 9 7 Integration with Windows During installation True Image 2013 provides closer integration with Windows Such merging allows you to get the most out of your computer The new user friendly interface makes starting backup and recovery much faster Integration adds True Image 2013 items to the Windows Start menu changes the properties of the True Image 2013 button on the taskbar and adds the ability to configure and perform True Image 2013 operations using Windows 7 Control Panel disabled by default The most significant changes occur in the System and Security category of Windows 7 Control Panel True Image 2013 replaces Windows Backup in the Backup and Restore item If you first installed True Image 2013 without performing backups the Backup and Restore window allows you to create a system partition backup Ceta EJS ole gt Control Panel Syster and Security Backup and Restore X 4 Search Backup and Restore 2 v Control Panel Home True Image 2013 Turn on Windows Backup RunTrue Image Add backups Disk and partition backup F Protect you mputer from a disaster Nonstop Backup Protect partitions and files continuously My backups i System disk Jpdated Today at 10 58 PM O7 Location Li My backups Total size 19 78 GB Jpdated See also Action
171. ed for recovery by its creation date When the required vhd backup is not shown click Browse choose Windows Backup Archives vhd in the Files of type field and locate the backup for recovery Even if the required vhd backup is shown on the screen after you choose it True Image 2013 may display the following message True Image 2013 cannot detect volume 1 of Backup_Name archive where Backup_Name is the name of the chosen backup This is because disk letters in the standalone True Image 2013 may differ from those in Windows and the path to this backup stored in the metadata information will point to the wrong location In such case click Browse choose Windows Backup Archives vhd in the Files of type field and locate the backup for recovery At the next step select Recover whole disks and partitions if it is not selected and click Next Select the system partition at the What to recover step Usually you will not need to recover the MBR 7 Then specify the settings of the selected system partition location type primary active and size When recovering the partition to the original location you do not need to make any setting changes 8 Read the Summary of the recovery operations and then click Proceed You can also recover partitions and disks from vhd files while working in Windows This is preferable for recovering data partitions and disks 8 11 3 Booting from a tib image of your Windows 7 system partition
172. eeeessaeessseeesenees 119 How to clean up your space On Acronis Cloud cceeeeeessneeeeeeeeeeeees 119 How to recover a deleted file cc cc eccecccesseneeceeseneeeesseeeeesseeeeseseaeens 121 HOw to shar folders reriket en ee ade Maven ee EEEE 122 How to create public links to files and folderS ccscccessceesseeesseeeeees 123 How to unlink a device from your ACCOUNL cecsececessceeessssceeeessseeees 123 How to revoke an invitation to Share a SYNC c cccccccesssssssseeeeeessesees 124 HOW TO 1GAVEASYNG coceccuseses tess es sdesdeecesdvseunenseelesdessstavenseeeceeteiereeeen 125 5 1 About the Sync feature The main highlights of the Sync feature You have the same data documents photos videos etc on all of your computers and mobile devices with iOS and Android operating systems Your data is within easy reach anywhere and anytime No more e mailing files to yourself or carrying a flash stick all the time With Acronis Sync you can sync your data with other people for example with your colleagues working on a joint project Sync will ensure that all of you always have the same project files You can create as many syncs as you need For example you can have separate syncs for keeping important data in sync on your computers and for sharing your photos with friends and relatives The Acronis Cloud keeps your synced files and versions of those files This lets you roll back to a previous file
173. eescesseseuaeaeeeeseneees 4 13 Arranging boot order in BIOS cccssessceceesesssssensececessessnssansececessessnssansececessessassansecsensseses 4 14 Recovery OPTIONS wi vecertet nee ecctvicedent hi veered ne tevietenedins Ga ernviiaerteinen intact ees 4 14 1 Disk recovery mode cceesesseseeseeseeeeees 4 14 2 Pre Post commands for recovery A 14 3 Validation ODtiOn retin tances ose EEA los 4 14 4 Computer restart ccccccseesessesseseeees 4 14 5 File recovery Options ccccscseeseeseeeeeee 4 14 6 Overwrite file Options cccceeeeeeeeees 4 14 7 Performance of recovery operation 4 14 8 Notifications for recovery operation ccccescsesscssessssssssssesscsscseessssessesscsscsecsessessesassscessessessesausaesaseeeeess 4 15 Restoring computer to factory settings ccccsesssecececessesscnsceeeeecessessaaeeeeeeseeseessaeaeeeesensees 5 SYNchronizing dalari asenn a S S ENESE AE NR ANS EEKAN 111 5S1 Ab utthe Syne TEATUIE ss ornen aei araa a raaa aa a Aaa a a aai ASEE ARE 111 5 2 How we ensure Security Of your d ta reier aiie ioiii aek a AREE REEE a E eira iE 111 S AON SSE VE O a a a E a a Rahs ee ee aaie 112 5 4 What you can and Cannot synchroniZze ssssssessseesssssseserressssesrerressssssrrernersssssreernessssesreenn 112 55 gt Syn ICONS Ae e A E ieee A E hee A ete E a 8 Na eae hates 113 5 60 DefAaullteSVAGs 8 miena a E E EEE TEA a a ws eae aerate hs 114 o I AEA 1AE DETAI E E
174. eeseaaaes 84 4 5 Recovering a disk backup to a different disk Under rescue MECia cccccceseesssseceeecessessnaees 88 4 5 1 Recovering a disk With a hidden partition cccceeescecsseessscecescsseeeseeceseeseseseescsseeeseesaeeeaeseeesseeeeaceesaeerees 89 4 6 Recovering data from file level backups cccssscececessesssseceeeeecessessaaeseceesensseceeaeeeeeeessesesaeas 94 4 7 RECOVEFINE TIlE VErSIONS ienas a a uae a a a a a a S a 95 4 8 Recovering to different hardware ccccccccccscssssssssecececessesscseseeeeeceesesesaeseeeessessesesaeeeeeeeseesenaeas 96 4 8 1 Recovering your system with the help of Acronis Universal Restore cccscsssescsesseeseseseeesseeeesceeeaeerees 96 4 8 2 Recovering your system with the help of Acronis Universal Restore under rescue Media 000 97 AS Acronis Universal REStore aranira te canes a i A aa i ee ieibee ews dee vines eiaa 4 9 1 Purpose of Acronis Universal Restore esesssssssssssesesesesesenrarasisrsrsrsrsrarenenistsrsrarasasisrsrsrsrsrenenenesesenrnnasenen 4 9 2 General principles of Acronis Universal R StOre ccccscsccsccscsscssesssssesssscsscssceecsecsessessesecsesseesesaussesseesenees 4 10 How to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ccccccccccsccececccecececececececececeeececeseeeeeeesess 4 11 About recovery of dynamic GPT disks and volumes 4 12 Backup protection dialog DOX eccecssssscececessesssssaeceeecessesesseseeeeeceseeseaaeaee
175. eessesaeeeeeeseeesaeeeeseeesseeeeeeaees 76 315 2 Back pselectioMssn irisean EN T A A A E I A ENER 76 315 3 Res lt locatione neke n e eatin sen e a AEREE E EEEE EEEa EEEE Eas 76 3 15 4 Consolidation SUMMALY ccccssesecssescsscescsscssesecssessessssssscsscsscseesessucssssesecsscsessscsucsssauesssssesseesoesaecaueasessenseess 77 3 16 Cloning DaCkUpSettlngsisies ccccc secs doari eian aaa a E a tunics aea taeda tardies chestinnateats 77 Recovering Gata iccs ios scescies cevctesscccetcciscaede be sceseee5 seescabecevebeodscascesesessca0daueetebsacseceodscasdesesesseaeb ane 78 4 1 Recovering your system after a Crash ccccccecssssssecececessesssseceeececeeseseaeseeeesesesesneaeeeesesseeseeaeas 78 4 1 1 Trying to determine the Crash CaUSC e aar a E Ea Ea aae aa aae Ae TA A AeA RAA AAAA NAAA ERORE KERESEK NEESS 78 4 1 2 Preparing for recovery 0c csccesdccdhi vtec sven ices n Eea ERA A Eei aonn Ea TERA AEA EE OAA AEAEE T EAR EAA SEREEN Ea ETE 79 4 1 3 Recovering VOUF SYStOM a ccsesseigecescececeveceadesedeatcseveescestaviedabevsveusuviesedciteuecsrebateloseseversoniadadesdedecsbesletelevei varvenes 79 4 2 Recovering partitions and iSKS ccccccccccsssssssscecececessesenneseeeeecesseseaaeseeeessesseseaeeeeeeeseeseaaeas 82 4 3 Recovering partitions protected with Acronis Nonstop Backup cccccccscsssesssseeeeeeesesseaees 84 4 4 Howto recover more than one partition at ONCE ccccsessssccececessesentececeeecessesneaeeeeeees
176. election Select a destination for bootable media creation CD R RW if you are creating CD insert a blank disc so that the program can determine its Capacity ISO image having created an ISO disk image you will be able to burn it onto any kind of recordable DVD using DVD recording software Creating a bootable DVD directly from Bootable Media Builder is impossible any other media your PC can boot from such as USB flash drives etc If you use non optical media the media must have a FAT file system This limitation is not applicable for an ISO image a Acronis Media Builder toj ka Bootable media type selection Select a drive to be used to create bootable media The list contains all available devices that can be used to create bootable media You can create CD DVD USB flash drive or other bootable media or build an ISO image of a bootable disc Name Type Floppy Disk Drive A Floppy Disk Drive ISO image ISO image file w Help l lt Back I Next gt Cancel 8 2 1 4 Destination file selection If you chose to create a bootable disk ISO image specify the ISO file name and the folder where to place it Select the destination folder from the folder tree Enter a name for the iso file in the File name field m Click Next to continue 8 2 1 5 Bootable media creation summary This page displays operations to be performed Click Proceed to start the bootable media creation proce
177. en provide a password for your new account and confirm the password by retyping it once more in the appropriate field When you have performed all actions necessary for account registration please wait for an e mail message that will confirm opening of the account To keep your personal data secure choose a strong password for your online backups guard it from getting into the wrong hands and change it from time to time After opening an Acronis account log in to your account page subscribe to the Acronis Cloud service and then wait for an e mail message describing the details of your subscription plan and expiration date Trial subscription If you would like first to try the Acronis Cloud service Acronis offers a 30 days free trial subscription to Acronis Cloud service You will have 250 GB of storage space for the trial period Be aware that after the trial period is over you won t be able to use the Acronis Cloud service and all your data on the Cloud will be deleted If you like Acronis Cloud service you can go to https www acronis com my online backup and select a suitable subscription plan To change your tariff renew the subscription or unsubscribe go to the same subscription Web page 6 3 Backing up to Acronis Cloud You can have only one active online backup on the current computer Let s consider how to configure an online backup if you have not used Acronis Cloud yet To create an online backup 1 Click On
178. eo 107 4 14 1 Disk recovery mode With this option you can select the disk recovery mode for image backups Recover sector by sector select this check box if you want to recover both used and unused sectors of disks or partitions This option will be effective only when you choose to recover a sector by sector backup 4 14 2 Pre Post commands for recovery You can specify commands or even batch files that will be automatically executed before and after the recovery procedure For example you may want to start stop certain Windows processes or check your data for viruses before recovery To specify commands batch files Select a command to be executed before the recovery process starts in the Pre command field To create a new command or select a new batch file click the Edit button Select a command to be executed after the recovery process ends in the Post command field To create a new command or select a new batch file click the Edit button Please do not try to execute interactive commands i e commands that require user input for example pause These are not supported 4 14 2 1 Edit user command for recovery You can specify user commands to be executed before or after recovery Inthe Command field type in a command or select it from the list Click to select a batch file Inthe Working directory field type in a path for command execution or select it from the list of previously entered paths
179. equired steps Clone Mode LA Disk properties Select the target hard disk from the list below Cola V Source Disk Drive Capacity Disk3 gt Destination Disk Model Interface a Disk 1 16 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 SCSI Finish Disk2 16 GB VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 SCSI 25 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 SCSI pn New Volume F 25 00 GB NTFS Oo Primary Logical Dynamic Acronis Secure Zone __ Unallocated Unsupported Next gt Cancel Select the destination disk and click Next to continue At this point the program checks to see if the destination disk is free If not you will be prompted by the Conformation window stating that the destination disk contains partitions perhaps with useful data To confirm deletion of the partitions click OK Note that no real changes or data destruction will be performed at this time For now the program will just map out cloning All changes will be implemented only when you click Proceed If any disk is unpartitioned the program will automatically recognize it as the destination and bypass this step 8 5 6 Move method When you select the manual cloning mode methods True Image 2013 will offer you the following data move Asis a new partition will be created for every old one with the same size and type file system and label The unused space will become unallocated Proportional
180. ersions in a backup Select a backup for consolidation on the Backup and recovery tab Click the gear icon on the selected backup s box point to More and then click Consolidate versions Follow the wizard s steps You cannot choose another location when consolidating backup versions located in the Acronis Secure Zone 3 15 1 Archive to consolidate protection The archive you chose is password protected in order to prevent it from unauthorized access You need to specify the previously entered password to obtain access to the archive To specify the password Type in the password in the Password field If you enter the wrong password the consolidate archive procedure will not be able to continue m Click OK to continue 3 15 2 Backup selection The Backup selection window displays a list of backups belonging to the selected archive with the backup creation date and time like in the Recovery wizard The top backup is the full backup the rest are incremental backups To select the backups you want to keep Select the backups you want to keep The other backups will not be included into the consolidated archive Information on the selected backup its name date of creation type and comments is displayed on the right pane of the window m Click Next to continue 3 15 3 Result location Specify the place where you want to save the archive copy and its name By default the program suggests the same location
181. es Acroris P y My backups Search result 116 items Name Size Date modifier Folder Ver Backup name 4 J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 30 C Program Files Acronis System C J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 32 C Program Files Common Files Acronis System C Q J Acronis 6 5 2012 4 C AProgramData Acronis System C 1 a Ji Acronis 6 5 2012 3 C AProgramData Microsoft Windows Start System CC J Acronis 6 8 2012 11 CAUsers tester AppData Local Temp acro System CCD J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 CAUsers tester AppData Roaming Acronis System CD d Acronis 6 5 2012 3 C AWindows System32 config systemprofi System C 1 J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 30 C Program Files Acronis System disk J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 32 C Program Files Common Files Acronis System disk I Acronis 6 5 2012 3 33 CAProgramData Acronis System disk d Acronis 6 5 2012 3 31 CAProgramData Microsofti Windows Start System disk J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 33 CAUsers tester AppData Roaming Acronis System disk J Acronis 6 5 2012 3 41 CAWindows System32 config systemprofi System disk E J Acronis 6 8 2012 11 25 CAUsers tester AppData Local Temp Acro System disk DL Acronis 6 8 2012 11 25 C Documents and Settings tester AppDat TESTER test F Acronis 6 5 2012 3 33 CADocuments and Settings tester AppDat TESTER test Wb Acroni 6 8 2012 11 25 C ProgramData Microsoft Windows Start System C 1 E amp Acroni 6 5 2012 3 31 CAProgramData MicrosoftiWindows Start
182. esssseesesscsecsessessessesscsecseesesseesesausaesseeeeaees 174 8 2 3 Creating WinPE based rescue MeCia ccsscssesessesscssessesecsesessesscssessesecssessssecsecsscasssceessesseesesaeeaeeeeeesaees 176 8 2 4 How to prepare a USB flash drive for Acronis Media Builder cccccccsccccscessesssscescsscsssescseseeseesessseeeees 181 8 3 Creating factory bootable media 8 4 Working with Acronis Secure Zone 8 4 1 Acronis Secure ZONE cccsceeeseeteeeeetseees 8 4 2 Acronis Secure Zone location 06 8 4 3 Selecting Partitions eein aR REE a EATE EE RAE 8 4 4 SIZE OF Acronis Set re ZONE minani n ii a E Ak 8 4 5 Managing Acronis Secure ZOne ssesssssssesssssesssssrsrrsrsresersrsresentisrsrestnsrsresensrsresenststent 8 4 6 Acronis S c reZon SUMMALSY cscescesscsscesscsssesecsescsecsceseceusesecesscsecusssecsssesecsussaesssesecuseaesesseaesesearenseees 8 5 Gl ning a harddisk ae a e ees tee se E E a AA A E areias 8 5 1 G ner linformati N esiennierinnra ar a aa e a A a EE 8 5 2 TT AA AASE AAE AE E AAE TEANA 8 5 3 Selecting clone mode e aree pr a e petetenn ese a or a e A e 8 5 4 Selecting a sourc disk Arees eerie eoe arrear aasa dedsreurcuh sulasegntet ou ca ladlaaseeh Eeti aiarar 8 5 5 Selecting a destination disk 8 5 6 MovVesmethod set cetacvontunetanitaantanilnnntalai dll iananhiiindlennl ivan 8 5 7 Data MigratiOn cccsccsccsecsecsseeseeeeeeeees 8 5 8 Manual partitio
183. etter to be assigned to the partition being created from the drop down list If you select Auto the program assigns the first unused drive letter in alphabetical order Partition label Partition label is a name assigned to a partition so that you can easily recognize it For example one could be called System a partition with an operating system Program an application partition Data a data partition etc Partition label is an optional attribute Partition type these settings are available only for MBR disks Choose the type of partition to be created You can define the new partition as primary or logical Primary choose this parameter if you are planning to boot from this partition Otherwise it is better to create a new partition as a logical drive You can have only four primary partitions per drive or three primary partitions and one extended partition Note If you have several primary partitions only one will be active at a time the other primary partitions will be hidden and won t be seen by the OS Mark the partition as active an active partition is used for loading an operating system Selecting Active for a partition without an installed operating system could prevent your computer from booting Logical choose this parameter if you don t intend to install and start an operating system from the partition A logical drive is part of a physical disk drive that has been partitioned and allocated as an
184. f the Search field at the upper right corner of the main program window and then click Use Windows Search 2 You can verify that the tib files indexing support is enabled Right click on the Windows Search icon in your system tray and select Windows Desktop Search Options in the context menu The following window appears Make sure that the tib item is present in the Included Locations list To open the Indexing Options window in Windows Vista or Windows 7 open the Control Panel and then double click the Indexing Options icon The Windows Vista and Windows 7 indexing options have some differences in content and appearance though most of the following information is applicable to those operating systems as well Indexing Options 31 986 items indexed ae Indexing complete Index these locations Included Locations Exclude Local Disk C Application Data Default User es Microsoft Outlook Express M tibs s 1 5 21 1645522239 Modify Advanced Close 3 Click Advanced select the File Types tab and then make sure that the tib extension is selected and tib IFilter is shown in the Filter Description field Select Index Properties and File Contents Advanced Options Index Settings File Types Add UNC Location Extension Filter Description E s _ Null filter E sym Null filter E sys Null filter tab Plain Text Filter tar Null filter Plain Text Filter File Properties fi
185. fication area iCONS ccscsesssssecececeseesscaeceeeeseessessaaeees 25 Acronis Backup Explorer c cccccssccccssssececeesececeesececeeueeecseaeeecsenaeeeseeaaes 26 Integration with WINdOWS ssssssssssessssssesernesssseserernrssssrsrrennnssnseeeneesnssne 32 LOSI MENU seise A aE EEE 35 Settings MENU aseene cocnce edi sichds oudbsacis Ea E Erea EEEa aE 35 aloa AE 010 EAE EE E E AATA A NE ae eae E A E RE 35 Installing Acronis HOtfiXeS ccccecsscceessecesecessecesaeeseseecseeessaeesssaeesnees 36 1 1 9 1 Get started tab Starting True Image 2013 for the first time opens the Home screen with the Get started tab selected RIMAGE 20 ey ALTON E fm I Acronis Get started ME a maneh aicadcn imtoo enauTiGe Bvivolkhonsky 10 gmail com How to back up When to recover What is sync ack up computer Learn how to recover your system and file ok through a simple slide show about sync B Back up system Recover data Dy Try sync The Get started tab will help you to begin using the main True Image 2013 features namely backup recovery and synchronization The program leads you through the actions required for performing those operations If you have not used previous versions of Acronis True Image Home we recommend you become familiar with the above features by going through the steps required for completing backup recovery and data synchronization After you begin using True Image 2013 it will start with
186. fications will be displayed to you if errors occur during backup Instead you can view the detailed log of all operations after the backup process finishes Ignore bad sectors the preset is disabled This option is present only for disk and partition backups It lets you run a backup even if there are bad sectors on the hard disk Although most disks do not have bad sectors the possibility that they might occur increases during the course of the hard disk s lifetime If your hard drive has started making strange noises for example it starts making quite loud clicking or grinding noises during operation such noises may mean that the hard drive is failing When the hard drive completely fails you can lose important data so it is high time to back up the drive as soon as possible There may be a problem though the failing hard drive might already have bad sectors If the Ignore bad sectors check box is left unselected a backup is aborted in case of read and or write errors that could occur on the bad sectors Selecting this box lets you run a backup even if there are bad sectors on the hard disk ensuring that you save as much information from the hard drive as possible When not enough space in ASZ delete the oldest backup the preset is enabled When this setting is disabled and there is not enough space in the Acronis Secure Zone for the backup file being created the program will display a dialog warning you that the zone is full and will
187. fixes Hotfix installation does not require much time and resources You do not need to wait until the next product update to fix a particular issue A hotfix package is much smaller than the product installation package though it may include files from previous hotfixes for consistency You can install only necessary hotfixes if several hotfixes are available All changes from hotfixes released between updates will be included in the new product versions updates or upgrades How to install Acronis Hotfixes To check whether new Acronis Hotfixes are available click Check for updates from the Help menu A list of available hotfixes for the current build will be displayed in a table where you can select those you want to install When you select an Acronis Hotfix its release notes changes and enhancements to be applied to the product will be displayed below Note ifanew True Image 2013 update is available Acronis Hotfixes will not be displayed since each update contains all hotfixes released before After selecting Acronis Hotfixes you want to install click Download and Install button Also if you select Do not notify me about the unselected hotfixes in the future option a hotfix window will not appear at the program startup until a new hotfix is available Though if you check for updates manually Help gt Check for updates the window will appear even when this option is selected After all selected Acroni
188. for files and folders F The file or folder is synchronized x The file or folder is being synced at the moment a The file or folder has not been synchronized because of an error The notification area Sync state icons B The last synchronization completed successfully The sync is in progress at the moment rotating Y prog static All syncs are paused or each sync has only one participant eS An error occurred during the last synchronization 5 6 Default sync When you install True Image 2013 the installer creates the default sync By default this sync is named Sync This sync has the following main features You can use it right after the installation finishes If you signed in to your Acronis account simply drag files you want to sync into the default sync folder The default sync always syncs with the Acronis Cloud You cannot unsync the storage It also always stores file versions on the Acronis Cloud As long as True Image 2013 is installed you cannot delete the default sync folder If you delete the folder for example using Windows Explorer it will be recreated during the next program start The contents of the default sync folder automatically sync with the default sync folders on other computers registered under the same Acronis account It also automatically syncs with your mobile devices that have True Image app installed Using the default sync is the easiest way to sync you
189. for virtual changes that will appear during a Try amp Decide session By default Try amp Decide saves the information to a free space on Disk C You can also choose as such place Acronis Secure Zone or another logical disk or hard drive When choosing to protect more than one partition you cannot select one of the partitions to be protected to store virtual changes In addition you cannot select an external hard disk drive To select a partition Click on the partition you want to store virtual changes on Click OK 7 6 4 3 Alert settings Specify whether Try amp Decide should alert you when it uses up all the space allotted for saving virtual changes and after a specified time period has elapsed By default the Alert is On The following options are available On free disk space remaining using this option the program automatically checks the amount of free space left on the disk used by Try amp Decide with values that you specify If the amount of free space becomes less than the specified value the program displays a notification message On time elapsed since Try amp Decide started using this option the program will notify you if Try amp Decide has been working for longer than the period of time you specified Having specified the alert settings click OK 7 6 5 Try amp Decide typical use cases The Try amp Decide feature can help you in various circumstances for example Software testing There are kno
190. full Alternatively you may select the desired file size from the drop down list The backup will then be split into multiple files of the specified size That comes in handy when backing up to a hard disk with the view to burning the backup to CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW or BD R RE later on Creating images directly on CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW BD R RE might take considerably more time than it would on a hard disk 3 13 9 Backup validation option You can specify the additional validation setting Validate backup when it is created When this option is enabled the program will check the integrity of the recently created or supplemented backup version immediately after backup When setting up a backup of critical data or a disk partition backup we strongly recommend that you enable this option in order to ensure that the backup can be used to recover the lost data Regular validation You can also schedule validation of your backups to ensure that they remain healthy By default regular validation is turned on with the following settings Frequency once a month Day the date when the backup was started Time the moment of backup start plus 15 minutes Advanced settings the Run the validation only when the computer is idle check box is selected Example You start a backup operation on July 15 at 12 00 The backup version is created at 12 05 Its validation will run at 12 15 if your computer is in the screen saver st
191. full discarding the changes in the process of rebooting At that point all changes will be lost 7 6 3 Stopping the Try mode When you decide to turn the mode off click the Try amp Decide icon in the Try amp Decide window Select Apply changes if you want to keep the changes made to the system Select Apply changes with reboot if you want to speed up the applying process When you click the button Try amp Decide restarts your computer and applies the changes during the reboot Select Discard changes if you want to return your system to the state it was in prior to turning on the Try mode If you have chosen Discard Changes and rebooted the computer with multiple operating systems installed you won t be able to boot other operating systems except the one used for working in the Try mode A second reboot will recover the original MBR and make other operating systems bootable 7 6 4 Try amp Decide options and notifications To view or edit the default options of the Try amp Decide feature select the Tools and Utilities tab and then click Try amp Decide The options and notifications will be displayed in the corresponding areas of the Try amp Decide window You can change the following Try amp Decide options and notifications Protected partitions specify the partitions you want to protect from unauthorized changes during a Try amp Decide session By default Try amp Decide protects the system partition Disk C though y
192. gical f Dynamic M Acronis Secure Zone _ Unallocated f Unsupported o gt You can also see the properties of all the hard disks installed in your system for example the name and the model of the selected disk drive its capacity file system and its interface 197 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 8 6 2 Selecting initialization method True Image 2013 supports both MBR and GPT partitioning GUID Partition Table GPT is a new hard disk partitioning method providing advantages over the old MBR partitioning method If your operating system supports GPT disks you can select the new disk to be initialized as a GPT disk E aee Add New Disk Wizard Required steps Select the required disk initialization method V Disk k Initialization options C hnitialize disk in GPT layout Disk will use GUID Partition Table GPT layout TE To add a GPT disk click Initialize disk in GPT layout To add an MBR disk click Initialize disk in MBR layout If you use a 32 bit version of Windows XP the GPT initialization method will be unavailable and the Initialization options step will be absent After selecting the required initialization method click Next 8 6 3 Creating new partitions To use the space on a hard disk it must be partitioned Partitioning is the process of dividing the hard disk s space into logical divisions Each logical division may function as a separate di
193. gn in your device automatically starts syncing If you do not change the default settings subsequent signing in and syncing will proceed automatically 5 8 1 How to install True Image app on your mobile device To sync with your mobile device you need to install the appropriate True Image app Depending on your mobile device go to App Store or Google Play and search for the True Image app For example to find and install True Image app for iOS 1 On your iPhone open App Store 2 Tap the Search icon 3 Enter acronis in the search field 4 Select acronis true image in the search results to go to the app page 5 Follow the standard installation procedure The procedure to find and install the Android app is similar 5 9 Versions of synchronized files True Image 2013 gives you an opportunity to undo the changes that were made to your files as a result of synchronization If you find that one of your files contains an undesirable change you can view previous versions of this file and then choose and rollback to its correct version See details in Reverting to a previous file version p 119 All versions are stored on the Acronis Cloud which is accessible via the Internet To use the Acronis Cloud you must have a subscription to the Acronis Cloud service If you do not have a subscription a trial subscription with 250 GB of storage space will be automatically provided See details in Subscription information p 127
194. gorithm window you will be able to save the algorithm you have created This will be useful if you are going to use it again In order to save your algorithm you need to give it a filename and define the path in the Select file field or locate an existing file on the disk Each custom algorithm is stored in a separate file with its own name If you try to write a new algorithm to an already existing file the existing file s contents will be erased 8 8 1 3 Post wiping actions In the Post wiping actions window you can select actions to be performed on the partitions selected for data destruction Acronis DriveCleanser offers you three options No action just destroy data using the algorithm selected below Delete partition destroy data and delete partition Format destroy data and format partition default _ Acronis DriveCleanser Required steps Post wiping actions ae Source selection Select actions to be performed after the data is wiped YV Algorithm selection P No action V Finish Do nothing with the wiped partitions Note that the wiped partitions will be unusable until formatted P Delete partitions Delete the partition from the partition table Format Format the wiped partitions with the current file systems Post wiping actions 8 8 1 4 Disk wiping summary The summary window contains the list of operations to be performed Note that after you
195. got your password and follow the instructions on the opened Web page A new password will be sent to you by e mail After providing the required information click Log in 5 4 What you can and cannot synchronize You can synchronize data stored in two or more folders Let s consider where these folders may be located and what data they may contain Storage types A synchronization process may be established between Two local folders on the same computer except a folder and its subfolder A local folder on a computer and a folder on a storage device such as a USB flash drive USB hard drive NAS etc Two folders on two storage devices Two or more folders on two or more computers Within one sync process you may assign only one sync folder on every computer and storage device except a sync between two local folders You cannot select for synchronization a single file To synchronize the file select for synchronization the folder that contains that file Data types You can synchronize the following data Files your photos music videos documents etc except those listed below Only the native FAT32 and NTFS file attributes are synchronized If the synced folders belong to different file systems the program synchronizes only the attributes supported by the both file systems Other folders inside the sync folder that is sync subfolders and their content You cannot synchronize the following
196. h as Acronis Disk Director Home installed on your computer you can include standalone versions of these programs on the same bootable media as well Notes fyou have chosen not to install the Bootable Media Builder during True Image 2013 installation you will not be able to use this feature When booting from the Rescue Media you cannot perform backups to disks or partitions with Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 ReiserFS and Linux SWAP file systems Please keep in mind that the backups created by the later program version may be incompatible with the previous program versions Due to this reason we strongly recommend that you create a new bootable media after each True Image 2013 upgrade When booting from the rescue media and using a standalone version of True Image 2013 you cannot recover files and folders encrypted with use of the encryption available in Windows XP and later operating systems For more information see File level security settings for backup p 71 On the other hand backups encrypted using the True Image 2013 encryption feature can be recovered 8 2 1 1 Rescue media contents selection You can select which components of Acronis programs you want to place on the bootable media If you have other Acronis products installed on your computer such as Acronis Disk Director Home the bootable versions of these programs components will be offered as well True Image 2013 offers the following components True Image include
197. has an incorrect alignment and disks 3 and 4 have the correct alignment Windows XP In this case the procedure requires more commands 1 Type cmd in the Run field and press Enter 2 Atthe command line prompt type diskpart list disk The screen will show the disks connected to your computer Find out the disk number for your SSD using its size as reference select disk N Here N is the number of your SSD list partition The output will show the size of SSD partition s and offset value If the SSD has an incorrect offset value see Fixing SSD partition alignment p 149 7 5 4 Fixing SSD partition alignment If you did not properly prepare your SSD before transferring your system to it the starting offset may turn out be incorrect For example this may occur if you upgraded Windows XP to Windows Vista 7 Let s see how to fix the alignment problem 1 Start True Image 2013 and click the Backup and Recovery tab Create a task for backing up your SSD in the disk backup mode 2 3 Back up your SSD using as destination for example an external hard disk 4 Shut down the computer and then boot using Windows installation CD If you have a WinPE based Acronis rescue media you can boot from it Boot to True Image and then exit it to go to the command line prompt At the command line prompt type oo oyu 9 10 11 12 13 14 diskpart select disk N where N is the number of your SSD clean create partition p
198. hat the critical data will be backed up and the computer will be turned off 3 13 16 File level security settings for backup You can specify security settings for backed up files these settings relate only to file folder backups Preserve file security settings in backups selecting this option will preserve all the security properties permissions assigned to groups or users of the backup files for further recovery By default files and folders are saved in the backup with their original Windows security settings i e permissions for read write execute and so on for each user or user group set in file Properties gt Security If you recover a secured file folder on a computer without the user specified in the permissions you may not be able to read or modify this file To eliminate this kind of problem you can disable preserving file security settings in backups Then the recovered files folders will always inherit the permissions from the folder to which they are recovered parent folder or disk if recovered to the root Or you can disable file security settings during recovery even if they are available in the backup The result will be the same In backups store encrypted files in a decrypted state the preset is disabled check the option if there are encrypted files in the backup and you want them to be accessed by any user after recovery Otherwise only the user who encrypted the files folders will be able to read
199. he menu bar Then click Import backup settings and show the path to the script files with the settings After importing the settings you may need to change some of them to suit the new environment For example it may be necessary to change the list of items for backup backup destination etc If you want to copy some of your backups to another computer it is recommended to export the settings of those backups too Thus you will not lose some of the copied backup s functionality 9 Troubleshooting In this section Acronis System R POFt ccecesssssssssssssssscssseeseeeseeesseeseeeseeeaeeeseaeaeaeaeena 230 Acronis Smart Error Reporting ssssssssseseseresrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrerrrrrersrrreeeee 231 How to collect crash AUMPS ccccsesssssececeeecessessaeceeeeecesseseeaeeeeeesseeees 232 General recommendations c cccccssccecssssececeesnececseneceeseqeeeeseneeseseaaes 233 Creating a custom rescue CD cccccccccececeeeceeececececececeeececeseeeseeeeeeeseseess 233 WIGWING 108 E caches sesbes sie E A eoeeeteee adetevieveeseekeeetepsoe ted 234 Acronis Customer Experience Program ccccssssssssssssscssscsssssssessaeenees 235 9 1 Acronis System Report When you contact the Acronis support team they will usually need information about your system in order to resolve your problem Sometimes getting the information is an inconvenient process and may take a long time The Generate system report tool simplifies the p
200. he unallocated space If the unallocated space is not enough to achieve the desired size the selected partitions will be decreased in size Resizing of partitions may require the computer to be rebooted When reducing the size of the Acronis Secure Zone if there is any unallocated space on the hard disk it will be allocated to the selected partitions along with the space freed up from the Acronis Secure Zone Thus no unallocated space will remain on the disk Please keep in mind that reducing a system partition to the minimum size may prevent your operating system from booting up To specify the size of the Acronis Secure Zone Drag the slider to the appropriate position or type an exact value into the Acronis Secure Zone size field 8 4 5 Managing Acronis Secure Zone You can manage the Acronis Secure Zone Increase size p 186 choose this item if you want to increase the size of the Acronis Secure Zone Decrease size p 186 choose this item if you want to decrease the size of the Acronis Secure Zone Remove p 187 choose this item if you want to remove the Acronis Secure Zone from your hard disk Change password p 187 choose this item if you want to change the password for accessing the Acronis Secure Zone 8 4 5 1 Increase size Select the partitions from which space will be used to increase the size of Acronis Secure Zone An unallocated space also might be selected To select a partition
201. hen click Recover files in case of a disk backup 2 In Backup explorer right click on the time line the version you want to delete and then click Delete version When you delete a backup version please remember that this version may have dependent versions In this case the dependent versions will be deleted as well because data recovery from such versions becomes impossible If you delete a full backup version the program will also delete all subsequent incremental and differential versions till the next full version If you delete an incremental backup version or a differential backup version the program will also delete all subsequent incremental versions till the next full or differential version 3 13 Backup options In the Disk Backup Options File Backup Options E mail Backup Options Nonstop Backup Options and Online Backup Options windows you can configure options for a disk partition file e mail nonstop and online backup processes respectively To open the options window click the appropriate link After you have installed the application all options are set to the initial values You can change them for your current backup operation only or for all backups that will be created in future Select the Save the settings as default check box to apply the modified settings to all further backup operations by default Disk Backup Options ES Backup scheme Advanced Performance Notifications Exdusions e
202. hen the number of backup versions fits onto the time line or folded into a square block When a time interval is expanded the squares representing backup versions may contain a warning or error icon Such an icon indicates that warning s or error s have been written into the Log during version creation If more than one backup version has been created during a day within week month year or older time interval such a date is shown on the time line using a special version pack icon If you hover over a folded block for more than half a second a balloon will show the information about the time interval start its end and the number of backup versions it contains If you hover over a backup version within an expanded time interval a balloon will show more detailed information about the backup version Clicking on a folded block or its name above or below the time line expands the corresponding time interval If the number of backup versions within the time interval is too big to fit onto the time line the horizontal scroll line allows you to navigate through the backup versions within the time interval If you select another folded block and there is no room for displaying all backup versions of the newly expanded block then the current expanded block will collapse By clicking on a backup version you select it in the Backup Explorer Shortcut menus Right clicking on the time line opens the shortcut menu The menu con
203. hich was saved first Then you and your friend have two files in your sync folders One of them has the original file name The other file name consists of the original file name the name of the computer where it was changed and the time when it was saved Example of file renaming You and your friend work with file file_name doc on the 15 th of April 2011 You saved your changes at 10 04 and your friend saved his changes at 10 06 After synchronization your folders contain the following files file_name doc the file with your friend s changes file_name your_computer_name 15 04 2011 10 04 doc the file with your changes A sync conflict occurs every time you and your friend simultaneously create save rename or delete files or subfolders inside the sync folders There are many different variations of this conflict but only one of them leads to deletion of a file or subfolder This happens when both of you simultaneously delete the same file or subfolder In all other cases True Image 2013 will keep either one or two files and one of them will be renamed 5 8 Synchronizing a mobile device Your mobile device automatically syncs with Acronis Cloud and with all computers where you have installed True Image 2013 To start syncing 1 Install Acronis True Image app See How to install True Image app on your mobile device p 118 2 Open the app 3 Type in the e mail and password for your account 4 Tap Sign in Once you si
204. i Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported 7 Options f Proceed f Cancel The completed steps are marked with green checkmarks The green arrow shows the current step After you complete all the required steps and come to the Finish step the program displays the Summary screen Check the summary of the operation to be performed and then click Proceed to start the operation Taskbar notification area icons During most of the operations special indicator icons appear in the Windows taskbar notification area the right portion of the status bar with the clock If you mouse over the icon you will see a tool tip indicating the operation s progress or state Right clicking on the icon opens a shortcut menu where you can change the operation s status or cancel the operation if necessary This icon doesn t depend on the main program window being open It is present for background execution of scheduled backups as well 1 1 9 6 Acronis Backup Explorer The Acronis Backup Explorer provides you with a wealth of information on your backups backup types backup versions number dates contents backup results etc In addition the Backup Explorer allows you to explore and recover backed up data both partitions and individual files and even file versions It also allows for operations with backups you can validate them convert to Windows backup only disk backups mount images as disks and delete backup versions you no
205. i Cookies File TE tester 7 i Desktop File arog v m Downloads File A Program m Bronram CIA m 2 ti Destination Acronis Cloud 250 GB Manage subscription Schedule Off Turn on Backup name TESTER test 2 Backup options 2 Back up now E Cancel 4 Specify items to include by selecting the corresponding check boxes You can include both file categories and individual files and folders For more information on categories see Data categories p 45 If you do not want to keep the custom contents of the current backup by creating a data category simply select the files and folders 5 You can exclude from online backups hidden or system files folders and files matching the criteria you specify For more information see Excluding items from backup p 73 6 The destination for the backup will be Acronis Cloud The destination field shows your quota of the storage space on Acronis Cloud and the approximate amount of data to be backed up 7 To set an online backup schedule click the Turn on link next to Schedule For more information on scheduling your online backup see Scheduling p 157 To run the backup on the schedule click the down arrow to the right of the Back up now button and select Later in the drop down list The backup with the settings you have made will run according to the schedule The backup will run even after you log off Acronis Cloud 8 Click the Back up now button if you want to run backup immed
206. iately You can also delay the backup start for up to six hours by clicking the down arrow to the right of this button and selecting a delay interval from the dropdown list The first online backup may take a considerable amount of time to complete Further backup processes will likely be much faster because only changes to files will be transferred over the Internet 6 4 Managing online backups You can have up to five online backups from up to five different computers but only one online backup can be active at the same time When you log in to your Acronis account True Image 2013 tries to find out whether you already have online backups If you already have online backups created under your account for example performed on another computer the program operates as follows It adds the existing online backups to the Backup and recovery tab and displays at the bottom of the screen a notification about the online backups it has found You can select any one of the existing online backups and then make it active by clicking the Continue backup here button It does not matter from which computer you backed up data using this backup earlier The backed up data remains available for recovery and you can back up more data from the current computer If you want to create a new online backup click Online Backup on the Backup and recovery tab When you have backed up data to Acronis Cloud from the current computer the Online Backup ite
207. icking Proceed you will be asked to confirm the reboot Canceling the reboot will cancel the entire procedure After the clone process finishes you will be offered an option to shut down the computer by pressing any key This enables you to change the position of master slave jumpers and remove one of the hard drives Cloning a non system disk or a disk containing an operating system but one that is not currently active will proceed without the need to reboot After you click Proceed True Image 2013 will start cloning the old disk to the new disk indicating the progress in a special window You can stop this procedure by clicking Cancel In that case you will have to repartition and format the new disk or repeat the cloning procedure After the cloning operation is complete you will see the results message 8 6 Adding a new hard disk If you do not have enough space for your data e g family photos and videos you can either replace the old disk with a new higher capacity one data transfers to new disks are described in the previous chapter or add a new disk only to store data leaving the system on the old disk If the computer has a bay for another disk it would be easier to add a disk drive than to clone one To add a new disk you must first install it in your PC To add a new hard disk m Click the Tools and utilities tab and then click Add new disk Follow the Add new disk Wizard steps Ifyou use a 32 bit version of Window
208. icon collapses all expanded backup boxes into narrow stripes This command sorts all backups by types The order is as follows disk backups file backups e mail backups nonstop backup Windows backups ZIP archives This command sorts all backups in alphabetical order Date created This command sorts all backups starting from the newest down to the oldest Sort by Date updated This command sorts all backups by date of the last version The newer the last backup version the higher the backup will be placed in the list Total size This command sorts all backups by size starting from the biggest down to the smallest Scheduling type This command sorts all backups into two groups backups with a schedule and backups without a schedule which can be started only manually Explore all backups This command allows you to explore all your backups in the Acronis Backup Explorer using the time line Validate all backups This command checks the integrity of all your backups 3 Update backup list Click to search for lost backups More features Remove from All backups This command removes all backup boxes from the the list backup list The removed backups can be returned to the list by using the Browse for backup tool Not backe This command removes all empty backup boxes d up yet from the backup list Be careful because after boxes removal such backup boxes cannot be returned to the list Search
209. ies it has found if any and offer you the opportunity to save whatever it can recover There is always a chance that you might pick the wrong file and while recovering it the utility may overwrite the very file you are trying to recover If not for the Try amp Decide this error would be fatal and the file would be lost irretrievably But now you can just discard the changes made in the Try mode and make one more attempt to recover the files after turning on the Try mode again Such attempts may be repeated until you are sure that you have done your best in trying to recover the files Software uninstalling It is well known that the Add or Remove Programs component of the Windows Control Panel cannot give a complete guarantee of cleanly uninstalling applications This is because most applications do not provide enough information for it to be able to uninstall them without a trace So almost every time you install a trial program and then remove it you have some garbage left on your computer and after a while Windows may get slower Even use of special uninstaller utilities cannot guarantee complete uninstallation The Try amp Decide feature however will ensure complete and perfect uninstallation of any software quickly and easily Here s how Turn onthe Try mode Install the software application you want to evaluate Try using the application When you want to uninstall it just discard all the changes made to your computer in the
210. iew and change the current settings for the selected item B l Caca PF System Clean up Items System Comp You can see a list of the files and folders to be cleaned b Recycle Bi 7 according to your mask 4 a Temporary gy Data Dg Search is completed 45 items found Fil ct m Files x Items a x Pad Dek wy Temporary file 3 C Users adm AppData Local Temp AcronisUpdates gt gd Recently U P Q C Users adm AppData Local Temp data amp Windows H r ak C Users adm AppData Local Temp data tnd gt EH Opened S for a specific purpose and C Users adm AppData Local Temp F10226E4 B294 40EF 91 User Crede retain them in a folder 3 C Users adm AppData Local Temp Low Windows A fics Clarion tetova ie C Users adm AppData Local Temp msdt files ensures that a C Users adm AppData Local Temp VMwareDnD confidential data that Q C Users adm AppData Local Temp VMwareDnD d3d810b7 kcl acai i a C Users adm AppData Local Temp WPDNSE a C Users adm AppData Local Temp 4649C409 8F03 4248 a C Users adm AppData Local Temp 4649C409 8F03 4248 a C Users adm AppData Local Temp 8032DEA8 A045 4EDE lt m r Under the Windows operating system a search string can represent a full or partial filename A search string can contain any alphanumeric symbols including commas and Windows wildcard symbols and can have values similar to the following to clean all files with any file name
211. if it was a regular physical hard disk Acronis Extended Capacity Manager wizard displays all hard disks larger than 2 TB unallocated or with MBR partition style You can see the disk space which Windows recognizes and allocates This space is called Windows Native Capacity in the wizard 201 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The space beyond 2 TB is displayed as Extended Capacity You can enable Extended Capacity Disks and once it is done this space becomes visible to the operating system and ready for disk management operations 1 Tostart Acronis Extended Capacity Manager select the Tools and utilities tab and then click Acronis Extended Capacity Manager If the program does not find any MBR disks with a capacity of more than 2 TB it displays a message that the entire disk space is accessible and you do not need to use Acronis Extended Capacity Manager 2 Acronis Extended Capacity Manager shows the Extended Capacity available for allocation Extended Capacity Manager x Allocate Extended Capacity Disc WDC WD25EZRS 00 99B0 Windows Native Capacity 2 27 TB D 2TB You can access this storage by Add New Disc or Windows disc management tools Extended Capacity Unallocated 0 27 TB You can create Extended Capacity Discs on this storage Cancel J Allocate space K 3 Click Allocate space to see the possible disk space allocation i
212. ill be assigned to all versions of the backup You can edit the comment of a specific backup version in Backup Explorer 3 13 13 Screenshot settings Along with backup comments screenshots help you to recognize a previous data state you need to recover True Image 2013 allows you to take screenshots at the moment of starting a disk or partition backup To enable the option select the Take screenshot upon a disk backup start check box The screenshots will be shown in Backup Explorer on the Disks and partitions tab Every screenshot corresponds to its own disk backup version Thus switching between the backup versions on the time line you will see different screenshots and will be able to find the required backup version faster 3 13 14 Error handling When the program encountered an error while performing backup it stops the backup process and displays a message waiting for a response on how to handle the error If you set an error handling policy the program will not stop the backup process and warn you about an error with a message but will simply handle the error according to the set rules and continue working You can set the following error handling policy Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode the preset is disabled You can enable this setting to ignore errors during backup operations This feature was mainly designed for unattended backups when you cannot control the backup process In this mode no noti
213. image as well If the backup was password protected True Image 2013 will ask for the password in a dialog box Neither the partitions layout will be shown nor will the Next button be enabled until you enter the correct password Mount Wizard Required steps Mount backup Archive selection Fach B Details Password Required Please specify the password to access the archive Password Optional steps Drive letter Path D My backups My_syster tib Select a partition to mount as a virtual disk Note that you cannot mount an image of the entire disk except in the case when the disk consists of one partition If the image contains several partitions by default all of them will be selected for mounting with automatically assigned drive letters If you would like to assign different drive letters to the partitions to be mounted click Options E Mount Wizard Required steps Summary Y Archive selection Partitions to mount 1 Mode Read Partition 1 Drive letter G File system NTFS Label New Volume Size 16 GB Cluster size 4 KB Optional steps Drive letter Options Proceed Cancel Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 You can also select a letter to be assigned to the virtual disk from the Mount letter drop down list If you do not want to mount a partition select Do not mount in th
214. independent unit but functions as a separate drive When you finish to specify the settings for the partition being created click Accept to continue 8 6 4 Add new disk summary The Add new disk summary graphically as rectangles illustrates information about the new disk layout before and after partitioning G Add New Disk Wizard Required steps Summary Location Disk 4 Before ee 20068 Unallocated 200 0 GB After hd D 200 GB 200 0 GB NTFS E Primary Logical Dynamic M Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported Click Proceed to start creating new partition s Click Cancel to cancel the procedure and quit to the main program window After you click Proceed True Image 2013 starts creating new partition or partitions indicating the progress in a special window If you stop this procedure by clicking Cancel you will have to repartition and format the new disk or repeat the disk add procedure Before clicking the Proceed button you can use the sidebar to navigate through the Add New Disk Wizard steps and make changes 8 7 Acronis Extended Capacity Manager The Acronis Extended Capacity Manager allows your operating system support large capacity disks with the MBR partition style You are able to use the disk space beyond 2 TB This free space will be recognized as a separate disk and will be usable by your operating system and applications as
215. indows installation Restoring factory settings from factory bootable media These instructions apply to factory bootable media that you either created yourself or received from your hardware supplier together with your brand new computer For instructions on how to create factory bootable media see Creating factory bootable media p 182 To restore the computer to factory settings 1 Boot up the computer using the factory bootable media 2 Select Recover 3 Confirm the operation by clicking Yes Once the operation is complete the computer will be restarted or powered off At next computer boot up it will load the original Windows installation 110 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 Synchronizing data In this section About the Sync fEaturesscccc cesccccsessccucesssccecessecervssssccees soaccucesstccedesescedveses 111 How we ensure security Of your data eceecccssssstecesseneecesseeeeesseeaeens 111 Acronis SEVER lO BI Mic cisssdeeceectecs cansecneltcens cc cetensiencdendcesaussieieed ade ds cassuieuee 112 What you can and cannot SYNCHIONiZe cceceseseeeeeesteeeeessteeeeesseeeeeeas 112 SWING ICONS cden eneas eee eaae eane Ee ae Nee 113 WIE ELE E E N E S 114 Syne reati Naess teeiissrueis iue eene esei iede eeaeee eeii i eee 114 Synchronizing a mobile AEVICE cccccccccessesssseceeeeecessessaeeeceescesseseaaeess 118 Versions of synchronized files ccccccssccesscecsseeessaeessseecs
216. ing value you can browse the search strings found by the System Clean up Wizard in the registry To do so click Show Computers You will see the window with full and partial computer names searched for in the network These items will be deleted Commands setting Here you can select the commands to remove during Windows Run List clean up This template can contain any command names or their parts separated by semicolons e g help cmd reg This will result in removing commands with names corresponding to or containing any of the names or parts of names you entered System Clean up You can view and change the current settings for the selected item lt 2 Show Commands 4 BY System Clean up 1 4 BY System Components wy You can see a list of the commands to be removed from g Ri le Bi m payd bn the list according to your mask a Temporary file Hard Disk Free Sp gt D Recently Used Dod Show Commands 4 Windows Run List a item Windows Run apres Search is completed 1 items found g Commands b E Opened Saved Fil Windows remembers the programs that you have executed User Credentials and run Here you can clean up Windows Prefetch this list 10 1 176 72 Network places filter Here you can enter separated by semicolons any hostnames or IP addresses of network places servers FTP servers network shares etc to which you have made connection by su
217. into the backup file Enabling this option will include all unallocated disk space into the backup 3 13 6 Backup protection A backup file can be password protected By default there is no password protection for backups To protect the backup Enter the password for the backup into the Password field A password should consist of at least eight symbols and contain both letters in upper and lower cases preferably and numbers to make it more difficult to guess Retype the previously entered password into the Confirm field To increase the security of your confidential data you can encrypt the backup with strong industry standard AES Advanced Encryption Standard cryptographic algorithm AES is available with three key lengths 128 192 and 256 bits to balance performance and protection as desired The 128 bit encryption key is sufficient for most applications The longer the key the more secure your data However the 192 and 256 bit long keys significantly slow down the backup process If you want to use AES encryption choose one of the following keys AES 128 to use 128 bit encryption key AES 192 to use 192 bit encryption key AES 256 to use 256 bit encryption key If you do not want to encrypt the backup and only want to protect a backup with a password select None Having specified the backup protection settings click OK Note that you cannot change the password of a password protected backup after the
218. ion BartPE Installer v2 BARTPE Network Support Boot Fix Enabling Press any key to boot from CD Check Disk chkdsk exe Customize Deep Burner Free Disk Commander v1 1 Dos 16 bit support For WinPE Drive SnapShot ERD Commander 2002 Irfanview Keyboard Layout read PluginHelp McAfee Stinger McAfee VirusScan for Win32 Nero Burning Rom Nu2Menu Nu2Shell PENETCFG Automatically start PE Network configurator PENETCFG PE Network configurator theTruth PuTTY RAMDisk Nu2 Productions Remote Desktop Client Rpc55 needs to launch DComLaunch Service first SP2 only RT FO File a43 a43 inF Acronis acronis inf adawareseladawarese inf aspi aspi inf bginfo bginfo inf bstS bst5 inF peinst peinst inf bartpe bartpe inf bootfix bootfix inf chkdskichkdsk inf custom custom inf deepburner deepburner inf dskemd dskemd inf dospe Dospe inf snapshot snapshot inf erd2002 erd2002 inf irfanview irfanview inF keyboard keyboard inf stinger stinger inf meafee mcafee inf nero burning rom penero inf nu2menu nu2menu inf 225 nu2shell nu2shell inF penetcfg autorun penetcfg inf penetcfgipenetcfg inf putty putty inf ramdisk ramdisk inf mstsc mstsc inf dcomlaunch dcomlaunch inf EE Pee Close Enable Disable Close the Plugins window and click the Build button to start the building process If you want the image to be burned to CD select the Burn to CD option and choose the necessary burner in the Device menu
219. isconnected at the scheduled time If you want to regularly back up data located on a removable media for example USB flash drive or remote storage for example network folder or NAS we recommend that you select the Run when the current source device is attached check box This is useful because an external storage device may be often unavailable at the scheduled moment of backup In that case if the check box is selected the missed backup operation will start when the device is connected or attached Run the backup upon HDD alarm available when Acronis Drive Monitor is installed if enabled the backup will run as soon as there is an alarm on Acronis Drive Monitor about a potential problem with one of the hard disks in the backup source Acronis Drive Monitor is a hard drive health monitoring utility based on information received from hard drive S M A R T reports Windows logs and its own scripts Having finished scheduling click OK In this section Daily ex cution parameters ssion siseseid Een eieaa 159 Weekly execution parameters ccccscccccccsssssssseseceeecessesestsseeeeeesseesees 159 Monthly execution parameters ccccccccccecessesssseceeeeesessessaeeeeeessesees 160 Upon event execution parameters sssssssesssesrsrersrrrrrrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrererene 160 7 7 1 Daily execution parameters You can set up the following parameters for daily operation execution Start time or periodicity If you
220. isk In addition you can make more than one backup to create redundancy and increase security What should I back up a partition or the whole disk In most cases it is better to back up the whole disk However there may be some cases when a partition backup is advisable For example your notebook has a single hard disk with two partitions system disk letter C and the data disk letter D The system partition stores your working documents in the My documents folder with subfolders The data partition stores your videos pictures and music files Such files are already compressed and backing them up using True Image 2013 would not give you significant reduction of the backup file size In this case it may be better to use a local sync for the data partition files and a separate backup for the system partition However we also recommend creating at least one whole disk backup if your backup storage has enough space Could you tell me how to clone in Windows or after booting from the rescue media Even when you start cloning in Windows the computer will reboot into the Linux environment the same as when booting from the rescue media Because of this it is better to clone under rescue media For example there may be a case when your hard disk drives are detected in Windows and not detected in Linux If this is the case the cloning operation will fail after reboot When booting from the rescue media you can make sure that True Image 2013
221. it The program will delete the oldest backup chain consisting of a full backup version and 3 differential backup versions In the Disk Backup window check that all settings are correct and click Back up now If you want your first backup to be run only at the time you specified in the Scheduler click the down arrow to the right of the Back up now button and select Later in the drop down list 3 13 5 Image creation mode You can use these parameters to create an exact copy of your whole partitions or hard disks and not only the sectors that contain data Note that the Back up unallocated space check box is available only when the Back up sector by sector check box is selected To make a sector by sector backup check the Back up sector by sector parameter By default the program copies only the hard disk sectors that contain data However sometimes it might be useful to make a full sector by sector backup For example you have deleted some files by mistake and want to make a disk image before trying to undelete them because sometimes undeleting may create problems in the file system Please note that this mode increases processing time and usually results in a larger image file because it copies used and unused hard disk sectors The Back up unallocated space option becomes available if you have selected the previous parameter Back up sector by sector By default while performing sector by sector backup unallocated space is not included
222. ition will be enlarged according to the proportion of the old and new disk capacities FAT16 partitions are enlarged less than others as they have a 4GB size limit Depending on the selected combination you will proceed to either the cloning summary window or the Change disk layout step see below 8 5 7 Data migration True Image 2013 allows you to select a partition layout for a target disk after clone operation completion 8 5 8 Manual partitioning The manual transfer method enables you to resize partitions on the new disk By default the program resizes them proportionally This window displays rectangles indicating the source hard disk including its partitions and unallocated space as well as the new disk layout is International GmbH 2002 2012 Along with the hard disk number you can see disk capacity the label volume and file system information Different volum with different colors e types including primary logical and unallocated space are marked 9 Clone Disk Wizard Required steps Y Clone Mode Source Disk Select partitions on your new hard disk from the list below HB Properties aan Destination Disk Move Method Change Disk Layout Partition Flags Capacity Free Space Type Disk 3 NTFS Unlabeled C Pri 24 97 GB 16 62 GB NTFS NTFS System Reserved Pri Act 31 35 MB 7 215 MB NTFS C E 25GB G 24 Sood 3 24 97 GB NT
223. jjs m Folder F Trial recovery 5 Select the destination for the files and then click Next 6 Select several files for recovery by selecting their check boxes and then click Next Select files and folders to recover m Backup archive Name Date Type Size 4 Local Disk E B Corsica 002 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 404 MW Pictures J Corsica 003jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 692 Whatto recover E 0 Corsica 007 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 3 062 B Corsica 012 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 3 196 B Corsica 013 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 692 E 0 Corsica 017 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 3 280 k 0 Corsica 020 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 3 188 B Corsica 022 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 888 DB Corsica 024 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 704 B Corsica 025 jpg 4112 09 7 File 2 720 a B Corsica 030 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 3 452 0 Corsica 032 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 362 a 0 Corsica 033 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 376 i BD Corsica 034 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 724 wa B Corsica 038 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 376 a B Corsica 039 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 644 i BD Corsica 040 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 372 ional steps O Corsica 041 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 812 a B Corsica 042 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 256 i 0 Corsica 048 jpg 4 12 09 7 File 2 248 Options E arina 060 ino AANT Fila asne Finish
224. k drives the network adapter the mouse or the keyboard usually there is a problem with the drivers So when the standard rescue CD lacks some of your hardware drivers you need to create a custom one The Linux based recovery environment used by Acronis does not provide the ability for users to add new drivers Because of this you should request Acronis Customer Service Department to create a custom rescue CD that will have all the drivers you need Before making a request collect the information about your system Select Generate system report inthe Help menu True Image 2013 will automatically collect the required information and display a list of what is collected in the report In the process of creating the report the program may install some components required for collecting the necessary information When the report is complete click Save and select the desired folder or leave the default folder The program will archive the report into a zip file This report may also be useful when you request the Acronis Customer Service Department to help you with a problem Send the file to the Acronis Customer Service Department They will build an iso image of a custom rescue media compatible with your computer hardware and send you the iso file Burn this file to a CD DVD using a program that can handle iso files such as Nero Please be aware that finding the appropriate drivers and making the custom rescue media may take time Furthermore fi
225. k in the upper right corner indicating that the partition is selected You can select an entire hard disk or several disks for data destruction To do this click the rectangle corresponding to the hard disk with a device icon disk number and capacity You can simultaneously select several partitions located on different hard disk drives or on several disks as well as unallocated space on disks Acronis DriveCleanser cannot wipe partitions on dynamic and GPT disks so they will not be shown in the Source selection window Click Next to continue 205 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 If the disks and or partitions you have selected include the system disk or partition you will see a warning window ee Acronis DriveCleanser Required steps Select drives and partitions with data to erase Source selection Algorithm selection 4 Finish 16GB S G e gt Warning You have selected the active partition a Gea Optional steps Post wiping actions oO Primary Logical Dynamic D Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported Net gt Cancel Be careful because clicking OK in this warning window and then Proceed in the Summary window will result in wiping the system partition containing your Windows operating system 8 8 1 2 Algorithm selection Acronis DriveCleanser utilizes a number of the most popular data destruction algorithms
226. l the data selected to back up 2 A backup process that creates a full backup version p 239 Full backup version A self sufficient backup version p 238 containing all data chosen for backup You do not need access to any other backup version to recover the data from a full backup version I Image The same as Disk backup p 239 Incremental backup 1 A backup method used for saving data changes that occurred since the last backup version p 238 of any type within a backup 2 A backup process that creates an incremental backup version p 240 Incremental backup version A backup version p 238 that stores changes to the data against the latest backup version You need access to other backup versions from the same backup p 238 to restore data from an incremental backup version N Nonstop backup Nonstop backup actually is a disk partition or file backup that is created using the Acronis Nonstop Backup feature This is a set of one full backup version p 239 and a sequence of incremental backup versions p 240 that are created at short intervals It gives almost continuous protection of data that is it allows recovery of previous data state at any recovery point you need Nonstop protection Nonstop protection the process that the Nonstop Backup feature performs when it is turned on O Online backup Online backup a backup that is created using Acronis Online Backup Online backu
227. l drivers included in the image Microsoft System Preparation Tool Sysprep will not resolve this problem Sysprep allows you to replace only Plug and Play device drivers sound cards network adapters video cards etc However System Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL and mass storage device drivers must be identical on both the source and the target computers see Microsoft Knowledge Base articles 302577 and 216915 Acronis Universal Restore technology provides an efficient solution for hardware independent system restoration by replacing the crucial Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL and mass storage device drivers Acronis Universal Restore is applicable for 1 Instant recovery of a failed system on different hardware 2 Hardware independent cloning of operating systems 4 9 1 1 Limitations in using Acronis Universal Restore 1 The system recovered by Acronis Universal Restore might not start if the partition structure in the image or the target disk partitioning does not coincide with that of the source disk The loader restored from the image will point to the wrong partition and the system will not boot or will malfunction This may occur if you back up only selected partitions but not the entire source disk restore only selected partitions and not the entire source disk In some cases especially if your system resides on a partition other than the original one this can confuse the loader and prevent the restored sys
228. later you need to start the Extended Capacity Manager again and then repeat the wizard s steps You will be able to continue using the Extended Capacity Disks even after uninstalling True Image 2013 During uninstallation you will be asked whether you want to remove the Extended Capacity Disk If you choose not to remove the disk it will remain usable 8 7 1 If Acronis Extended Capacity Manager does not start Acronis Extended Capacity Manager may not start because one of the following reasons your system does not contain hard drives with MBR partition style larger than 2 TB you can allocate and manage the entire space on your hard drives with Add New Disk tool your system contains large size disks but they are not initialized yet sector s size on your disk is larger than 512 kB 8 8 Security and Privacy Tools True Image 2013 contains utilities for secure destruction of data on an entire hard disk drive and individual partitions It can also erase individual files and eliminate traces of user system activity When replacing your old hard drive with a new higher capacity one you may accidentally leave personal and confidential information on the old disk This information could be retrieved even if you have reformatted the disk The Acronis DriveCleanser provides for the destruction of confidential information on hard disk drives and or partitions with the help of techniques that meet or exceed most national and state standar
229. ld Enter the password in the Password field To check whether your settings are correct click the Send test message button Additional notification settings To send a notification concerning process completion select the Send notification upon operation s successful completion check box To send a notification concerning process failure select the Send notification upon operation failure check box To send a notification with operation messages select the Send notification when user interaction is required check box To send a notification with full log of operations select the Add full log to the notification check box 4 15 Restoring computer to factory settings If your brand new computer was bundled with a backup of the computer s factory configuration True Image 2013 can recover this backup and restore the computer to its factory settings The system will be reverted to the state it was in when the computer was received from the store Caution Restoration will erase all personal data and programs on the computer including all your backups in Acronis Secure Zone How to check if factory configuration can be restored on your computer True Image 2013 offers three ways to restore a computer to factory settings Directly in Windows by using the standard recovery feature of True Image 2013 When booting into Acronis Startup Recovery Manager When booting from factory bootable media Recovery of the
230. lean up Nonstop Backup data manually For more information see Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage p 52 In order to not worry about zone overflow during a scheduled backup it is recommended to select the When not enough space in ASZ delete the oldest backup box in the scheduled backup options Error handling 8 4 2 Acronis Secure Zone location If you are creating the Acronis Secure Zone select a disk and its partition whose space will be used to create Acronis Secure Zone You can also select free or unallocated space of other partitions if these partitions are located on the selected disk Note that the Acronis Secure Zone can be located on basic disks only you cannot create it on dynamic disks and volumes To specify a location for the Acronis Secure Zone m Click on a hard disk drive to create the Acronis Secure Zone on On the selected hard disk drive select one or more partitions from which unallocated and or free space will be taken The chosen partitions will be resized if necessary to give space to the Acronis Secure Zone Having selected the disk and partitions click Next to proceed to the Size of Acronis Secure Zone p 185 step To increase decrease the size of the Acronis Secure Zone Select the partitions from which space will be used to increase the size of the Acronis Secure Zone or that will receive free space after the size of the Acronis Secure Zone is reduced You can also select partitions with unall
231. lect the MBR check box If you recover the entire disk the Recover disk signature check box appears Disk signature is a part of a hard disk MBR It is used for uniquely identifying the disk media We recommend that you select the Recover disk signature check box due to the following reasons True Image 2013 creates scheduled backups using the signature of the source hard disk If you recover the same disk signature you don t need to re create or edit the backups created previously Some installed applications use a disk signature for licensing and other purposes We recommend that you clear the Recover disk signature check box when You use an image backup not for disaster recovery but for cloning your Windows hard drive to another one In this case True Image 2013 generates a new disk signature for the recovered hard drive even if you recover to the same drive Disk recovery options click to set up additional parameters for the disk recovery process Use Acronis Universal Restore click to use Acronis Universal Restore technology during recovery Acronis Universal Restore provided by separately purchased True Image 2013 Plus Pack will help you create a bootable system clone on different hardware for more information see Acronis Universal Restore p 100 Choose this option when recovering your system disk to a computer with a processor motherboard or mass storage device that is different from the one in place when the
232. lication and view the file contents Choose the version by its backup time and then click the Open button True Image 2013 will recover the file version to a temporary folder Then it will open the file using the associated application 4 8 Recovering to different hardware Using Acronis Universal Restore provided by separately purchased True Image 2013 Plus Pack will help you create a bootable system clone on different hardware For more information see Acronis Universal Restore p 100 Choose this option when recovering your system disk to a computer with a dissimilar processor different motherboard or a different mass storage device than in the system you originally backed up This may be useful for example after replacing a failed motherboard or when deciding to migrate the system from a desktop to a laptop You can use Acronis Universal Restore for recovering your system disk both from tib and vhd files Acronis Universal Restore is unavailable when recovering the system partition from an Acronis Nonstop Backup Before proceeding with recovery make sure you have drivers for the hard disk drive controller or chipset drivers for the new motherboard These drivers are critical for booting the operating system You can download the drivers for your motherboard on the Vendor s web site Please note that if you downloaded the drivers in exe cab zip format you should extract them first The driver files should have inf sys or
233. lick Cancel to cancel the backup operation In that case you may want to increase the size of the Acronis Secure Zone and then run the backup operation again If you want to free up some space in the zone click OK and the oldest full backup version of the type being created will be deleted with all subsequent incremental differential backup versions The backup operation will then recommence If deleting the oldest backup does not free up enough space you will get the same warning message again You may delete the next oldest backup if any and repeat this until all the previous backups are deleted If after deleting all the previous backups there is still not enough space for completing the backup you will get an error message and the backup will be canceled The program distinguishes only two types of backups in the zone image backups and file level backups File and E mail backups are considered as file level type backups For example if you have an e mail backup in the zone and there is not enough space for backing up a folder the program will delete the e mail backup to free up space for the folder backup You can use the Acronis Secure Zone as the storage for virtual system changes in the Try mode The Try amp Decide data will be automatically cleaned up after you stop a Try amp Decide session If the Acronis Secure Zone is used as the Nonstop Backup data destination the program does not clean up such data automatically You can c
234. line Backup on the Backup and recovery tab of the Home window 2 Enter the E mail address and password of your Acronis account in the login window and then click Log In Ea Enter your Acronis account credentials E mail tester acronis com Password eecccccccs Forgot your password Create account Computer name TESTER SET Login Cancel If you have already logged in to your account for example in order to use the Sync feature this window will be skipped If you Have forgotten your password click Forgot your password and follow the instructions on the opened Web page A new password will be sent to you by e mail Do not have an Acronis account click Create account and then fill in the appropriate fields on the opened Web page to create your account See details in Subscription information p 127 To use Acronis Cloud you must have a subscription to the Acronis Cloud service If you do not have a subscription a trial 1 month subscription with 250 GB of storage space will be automatically provided The trial period and the amount of storage space may be changed without prior notification 3 Logging in opens a window where you can configure online backup settings Online Backup o a Configure online backup process kd Source 4 A Docume Name Size Ty L PiS E AppData I File F Aces E ai Application Data File a abi g V amp Contacts File F ee v a
235. line backup options o toes Backup Performance Notifications Exdusions D Operation priority Low Normal High Network connection speed limit Limit transfer rateto 0 lt Mbps v Save the settings as default Reset to initial settings OK Cancel You can set up the backup process priority Low enabled by default the backup process will run slower but the performance of other programs will be increased Normal the backup process will have equal priority with other processes High the backup process will run faster but the performance of other programs will be reduced Be aware that selecting this option may result in 100 CPU usage by True Image 2013 6 5 6 Network connection speed limit You can reduce the influence of Acronis Cloud connection on other network connections of your computer Set the connection speed that will allow you to send e mail or surf the Web without annoying slowdowns while online backup is running To do so Select the Limit transfer rate to check box and specify an optimal value and an appropriate measurement unit kilobits or megabits per second Online backup options f fone Backup Performance Notifications Exclusions D Operation priority 9 Low Normal High A Network connection speed limit Limit transfer rate to 0 Mbps v Save the settings as default w Reset to initial settings OK Cancel 6 5 7 N
236. ller However using special equipment one can easily read the underlying sequence of 1 s and O s It only requires specialized software and inexpensive hardware to read data deleted this way by analyzing magnetization of hard disk sectors residual magnetization of track sides and or by using current magnetic microscopes Writing to magnetic media leads to subtle effects summarized as follows every track of a disk stores an image of every record ever written to it but the effect of such records magnetic layer becomes more subtle as time passes 8 8 4 1 Functioning principles of Information wiping methods Physically the complete wiping of information from a hard disk involves the switching of every elementary magnetic area of the recording material as many times as possible by writing specially selected sequences of logical 1 s and O s also known as samples Using logical data encoding methods in current hard disks you can select samples of symbol or elementary data bit sequences to be written to sectors in order to repeatedly and effectively wipe confidential information Methods offered by national standards provide single or triple recording of random symbols to disk sectors that are straightforward and arbitrary decisions in general but still acceptable in simple situations The most effective information wiping method is based on deep analysis of subtle features of recording data to all types of hard disks This knowledg
237. longer need Let s have a closer look on the Acronis Backup Explorer It has two tabs for viewing backups and their content Disks and partitions available for disk backups only and Files and folders Disks and partitions tab The Disks and partitions tab shows the backed up disks and partitions that the selected backup version contains The tab shows the disks and partitions state of when the current backup version was created You can switch between the backup versions by using the time line at the bottom of the screen For more information see Time line p 29 To recover disks and or partitions 1 Onthe time line select the backup version from which you want to recover your disks partitions The version s exact date and time will be displayed near the backup name Your data will be recovered to the state it was at that point in time 2 Select the corresponding check boxes of the disks or partitions you want to recover 3 Click the Recover button To recover specific files and folders from the disk partition backups 1 Click the Files and folders tab 2 Select files and folders you want to recover 3 Click the Recover button For more information on recovering files and folders see Files and folders tab p 28 Backup version Backup name date and time Backup version contents Name of the backup Date and time when the selected Disks and partitions that the being explored backup version was created backup version
238. lter Null Filter File Properties filter tib Filter Null Filter Plain Text Filter File Properties filter c ete Mull Filter How should this file be indexed Index Properties Only Index Properties and File Contents Add new extension 163 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 Click OK and while the Indexing Options window is open check that the disks where you store your backups are shown in the Included Locations list If the list does not contain those disks the backups will not be indexed To include the disks click Modify and select them in the window that appears Indexed Locations Change selected locations M Local Disk C Local Disk F lel Microsoft Outlook Express Main Identity Q4 XP K Administr M gt Local Disk E o M Summary of selected locations Included Locations Exclude Se Local Disk C Application Data Default User Local Disk E fe Microsoft Outlook Express M tib s 1 5 21 1645522239 If you store backups on a network share Windows Search can index them too You just have to add the share to the Indexed Locations list by typing the appropriate UNC path after selecting the Add UNC Location tab of Advanced Options Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Give Windows Search some time for indexing Acronis backups on your computer s hard disks and adding the i
239. m on the toolbar changes to Edit Online Backup settings This is because you can have only one active online backup at a time Online backups from other computers will only provide recovery of the backed up data In addition you can delete such online backups If you have five online backups True Image 2013 will display a dialog stating that you already have the maximum allowable number of online backups You can either activate one of them and edit its settings for your new computer or delete an existing online backup and create a new one 6 5 Online backup options The following options are available for online backup Acronis Cloud connection attempts p 130 Acronis Cloud cleanup p 131 Encryption key p 132 Windows account p 132 Operation priority p 133 Network connection speed limit p 133 Notifications p 134 Exclusions p 135 If you want to reset all the modified options to their initial values that were set after the product installation click the Reset to initial settings button 6 5 1 Acronis Cloud connection attempts You can specify the number of connection attempts and the time interval between the attempts In case of any network problems if the first connection attempt fails the program will repeat the attempts until a connection is successfully established You can set the number of connection attempts and the time interval between the attempts in seconds To do so type or sele
240. m a single disk to RAID This is possible in many cases However it is better to use the backup and recovery method rather than cloning If you recover a backup of a single disk to RAID you will usually need to use the Universal Restore feature provided by Plus Pack to add the RAID drivers during recovery The drivers must have the inf filename extension 1 1 6 System requirements and supported media 1 1 6 1 Minimum system requirements True Image 2013 has minimum hardware requirements corresponding to that of the operating system installed on the computer to be used for running True Image 2013 In addition True Image 2013 requires the following hardware CD RW DVD RW drive for bootable media creation Mouse or other pointing device recommended Using Acronis Nonstop Backup requires at least 1 GB RAM True Image 2013 rescue media has the following hardware requirements 512 MB RAM Processor Pentium 1 GHz or faster 1 5 GB of free space on a hard disk The recommended screen resolution is 1280 x 1024 The minimum screen resolution is 1024 x 768 1 1 6 2 Supported operating systems True Image 2013 has been tested on the following operating systems Windows XP SP3 Windows XP Professional x64 Edition SP2 Windows Vista SP2 all editions Windows 7 SP1 all editions Windows 8 all editions Windows Home Server 2011 True Image 2013 also lets you create a bootable CD R DVD R that can back up
241. may take a considerable amount of time 8 2 3 3 Adding the Acronis Plug in to WinPE 2 x or 3 0 WIM 1 Select Acronis True Image 2013 Plus Pack Acronis WinPE ISO Builder from the Start menu 2 Specify the path to the source WINPE WIM file The standard path to this file for x86 hardware is Program Files Windows AIK Tools PETools X86 winpe wim 179 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 3 Specify the full path to the resulting WIM file including the filename or leave the default path and filename AcronisMedia wim 4 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed To create a PE image ISO file from the resulting WIM file 1 Select Microsoft Windows AIK Windows PE Tools Command Prompt from the Start menu Users of Windows 7 should select Microsoft Windows AIK Deployment Tools Command Prompt from the Start menu 2 Run the copype cmd script to create a folder with Windows PE files For example from a command prompt type copype x86 c winpe_x86 3 Replace the default boot wim file in your Windows PE folder with the newly created WIM file For the above WIM file creation example with the default path to the newly created WIM file type copy c Program Files Windows AIK Tools PEToo1s x86 AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot wim Users of Windows 7 should type the following command move c Program Files Windows AIK Tools PETools x86 AcronisMedia wim c winpe_x86 ISO sources boot
242. media only when creating a full backup of an entire hard disk It cannot be added when creating an incremental or differential backup as well as backup of a partition In such case the Place Acronis One Click Restore on media check box will not be present on the General tab of the current backup options even if the box is selected in the default Removable media settings Ask for first media while creating backups on removable media You can choose whether to display the Insert First Media prompt when backing up to removable media With the default setting backing up to removable media may not be possible if the user is away because the program will wait for someone to press OK in the prompt box Therefore you should disable the prompt when scheduling a backup to removable media Then if the removable media is available for example CD R RW inserted the backup can run unattended If you have other Acronis products installed on your computer the bootable versions of these programs components will be offered as well True Image 2013 does not support creating bootable media if a flash drive is formatted in NTFS 3 13 12 Backup comment This option allows you to add comments to the backup Backup comments may help you to find the necessary backup later If a backup does not have comments type your comment in the comments area When a comment already exists you can edit it after clicking Edit Note that by default the comment w
243. message offers you three choices to ignore it and proceed with the backup to browse for another location for the backup or to cancel the backup If the free space becomes less than the specified value while the backup is being run the program will display the same message and you will have to make the same decisions To set the free disk space threshold Select the Show notification message on insufficient free disk space check box In the Size box type or select a threshold value and select a unit of measure True Image 2013 can monitor free space on the following storage devices Local hard drives USB cards and drives Network shares SMB NFS The message will not be displayed if the Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode check box is selected in the Error handling settings This option cannot be enabled for FTP servers and CD DVD drives E mail notification You can specify an e mail account that will be used for notifying you of the recovery process To specify the e mail settings Select the Send e mail notifications about the operation state check box Enter the e mail address in the E mail address field You can enter several e mail addresses in a semicolon delimited format Enter the outgoing mail server SMTP in the Outgoing mail server SMTP field Set the port of the outgoing mail server By default the port is set to 25 Enter the user name in the User name fie
244. mments if you have entered comments they will be shown here 7 11 Timeout settings Sometimes when the program performs an operation an error message or a warning message may interrupt the operation progress To resume the operation some additional information or a decision is required from the user For example such a situation may occur during a backup operation when the storage space in the destination location becomes insufficient for completing the backup The program will wait for your decision on whether you want to cancel the backup free some storage space or select another destination for the backup Timeout settings allow you to specify the time interval the program should wait for your response Move the slider to the right to set the time interval in minutes Note that the Infinite setting is not recommended If the response is not received during the interval the operation will be canceled 8 Tools and utilities Acronis Tools and utilities include Try amp Decide protection tools mounting tools backup conversion tools clone disk utility security and privacy utilities disk management utilities and backup settings transfer tools Try amp Decide Try any unsafe operation in the Try mode and then decide whether to apply or discard it Protection tools Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Allows you to start True Image 2013 without loading the operating system by pressing F11 at boot time before the operating system
245. n October 5 In this case all files related to the game will be deleted from Nonstop Backup One more example you started to write your master s thesis using Microsoft Word on November 16 In this case all thesis file versions backed up from November 16 to December 1 will be deleted and only the versions from December 2 to today will remain To sum up the above all data modifications made during the selected period will be lost All files that did not change since the initial full backup made on August 15 and all data modifications made before September 1 and after December 1 will be kept How to pause Acronis Nonstop Backup You can pause Nonstop Backup by clicking the gear icon on the Nonstop Backup box and selecting Stop in the menu To resume Nonstop Backup click the gear icon again and select Start in the menu If the Nonstop Backup box is expanded you can also pause and resume Nonstop Backup by clicking the corresponding buttons in the box How can I turn off and delete Acronis Nonstop Backup To turn off and delete Acronis Nonstop Backup click the gear icon on the Nonstop Backup box of the Backup and recovery tab and select Delete in the menu This deletes all the Nonstop Backup data 3 8 Making reserve copies of your backups You can create reserve copies of your backups and save them on the file system a network drive or a USB flash drive A reserve copy may help you if the main backup becomes corrupted or if the storage of the m
246. n how to create such a backup see see Backing up partitions and disks After creating the backup make sure that you validate it To clone a disk m Click Clone disk on the Tools and utilities tab of the Home screen Follow the Disk Clone Wizard steps 8 5 2 Security Please note the following if the power goes off or you accidentally press RESET during the transfer the procedure will be incomplete and you will have to partition and format or clone the hard disk again No data will be lost because the original disk is only being read no partitions are changed or resized The system transfer procedure does not alter the original disk at all After the procedure finishes you might want to format the old disk or securely wipe the data it contains Use Windows tools or Acronis DriveCleanser for these tasks Nevertheless we do not recommend that you delete data from the old disk until you are sure it is correctly transferred to the new disk the computer boots up from it and all applications work 8 5 3 Selecting clone mode There are two transfer modes available G Clone Disk Wizard Required steps Choose clone mode Clone Mode Automatic recommended Source Disk All your partitions from the source hard disk will be copied to the target disk in a few simple steps and your new hard disk will be made bootable Your existing partitions will be automatically resized to fit the target hard disk Manual Manual mod
247. n the next step After clicking the Apply button an Extended Capacity Disk will be emulated on your physical disk If your physical disk s capacity is more than 4 TB and your operating system does not support the GPT partition style the program creates several MBR Extended Capacity Disks Note that Extended Capacity Disks are not bootable though most of their properties are the same as that of physical disks 4 Click Close to exit the Acronis Extended Capacity Manager After allocating the space you can temporarily switch off the Extended Capacity Disks by clicking Temporary switch off Extended Capacity Disks This makes the Extended Capacity Disks invisible for disk management tools though the disk space will remain allocated and you will be able to make these partitions visible again later To do this start the Acronis Extended Capacity Manager and then click Allocate space Extended Capacity Manager x Acronis Extended Capacity Disc WDC WD25EZRS 00 99B0 Windows Native Capacity Extended Capacity bd 2TB D 0 27 TB Unallocated 27B 0 27 TB Temporary switch off Extended Capacity Discs Remove Extended Capacity Discs K To remove the Extended Capacity Disks click Remove Extended Capacity Disks and then click the Apply button in the next step These disks will be removed from your system and the disk space beyond 2 TB will become inaccessible To allocate this space
248. namic volume with manual resizing is not supported Try amp Decide cannot be used for protecting dynamic and GPT disks m Clone disk operation is not supported for dynamic disks True Image 2013 supports large hard disk drives with a capacity of more than 2TB This support is provided even if the operating system does not have support for such hardware For more information see Acronis Extended Capacity Manager p 201 An FTP server must allow passive mode file transfers For data to be recovered directly from an FTP server the backup must consist of files no greater than 2GB each The firewall settings of the source computer should have Ports 20 and 21 opened for the TPC and UDP protocols to function The Routing and Remote Access Windows service should be disabled Burned rewritable discs cannot be read in Linux without a kernel patch 1 1 6 5 SSD support The recommended offset for Solid State Drives SSD is a multiple of 64 KB most commonly 1024KB or 2048 sectors True Image 2013 provides full support of SSDs It keeps the proper offset of SSD during such operations as image recovery and cloning Specifically full support means that If you recover a disk image to an SSD or clone a disk to an SSD the offset will be automatically set to the default 1024 KB 2048 sectors If you recover a partition backup to a target empty partitioned disk SSD the target SSD will keep its original offset 1 1 6 6 Techni
249. nd my OS supports UEFI After operation completion the After operation completion the partition style will remain GPT the partition style will remain GPT the My source disk is GPT system will fail booting on BIOS operating system will be bootable on and my OS supports UEFI because your operating system UEFI cannot support booting from GPT on BIOS To ensure Windows bootability after recovery you must recover an image of your source disk in the disk mode 3 The target volume type does not change when recovering over an existing volume Examples When recovering a dynamic volume over a basic volume the target volume remains basic When recovering a dynamic striped volume over a dynamic spanned volume the target volume remains spanned 4 Recovering a basic volume or disk to the dynamic group When recovering a basic volume to an unallocated space of the dynamic group the recovered volume becomes dynamic When recovering a basic disk to a dynamic disk of a dynamic group consisting of two disks the recovered disk remains basic The dynamic disk to which the recovery is performed becomes missing and a spanned striped dynamic volume on the second disk becomes failed 4 12 Backup protection dialog box A backup file can be protected with a password You can set password protection in backup options while creating a backup If you try to recover data from a password protected backup mount it or append an
250. ndexing information to its index database The required time depends on the number of backups and the number of files they contain After completing the indexing the Windows Search will be able to search files in tib backups data Windows Desktop Search File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back amp pe Search E Folders Address g windows Desktop Search Results Windows P AllLocations Everything EEE E E mail Other v 1054results Hy up tib Acronis True Image Home Data Sources ODBC acronis htm 3ds_max xml access_2000 xml access_2003 xml access_2007 xml ses spn Unable to display preview adobe_photoshop_cs3 xml adobe_photoshop_cs_9 xml ig WS 0S 9 US S g Us eo after_effects_7 xml ig bittorrent xml diskeeper _administrator_10 xml lis easy _screensaver_4 _1 xml 8 i F secure_is_2007 xml The search engines in Windows Search and Windows Vista or Windows 7 have similar functionalities though search results are presented somewhat differently 7 47 my name myback Document Picture Music Other Advanced Search O Indexed Locations Name myback m 2 5 2008 Tags Addatag Z Authors Add an author W Save Search lo Search Tools i Burn Name Date modified Type Folder 3 MyBackup 3 5 2008 1 25 PM Acronis True Imag Desktop C Users Favorite Links E Documents Pictures Did you find what
251. nding the appropriate drivers may be not possible in some cases After burning your custom rescue CD test it to make sure that all your computer hardware is now detected in the recovery environment 9 6 Viewing log Most True Image 2013 operations write their own entries in the logs When issues with the Operations occur the log entries may provide information on their causes The log can provide information for example about scheduled backup results including causes for any failures If you want to view the log of True Image 2013 operations click the gear wheel icon on the toolbar to open the Settings menu and then select View log You can also open the log for viewing by selecting View log in the Operations menu of a backup box In this case you will see only the log items for the last run of the selected backup Event Log eon x A amp UF Time period Z 4 Save all to file Successes Warnings Errors amp Event source all gt Reset all 9 Delete all filters My system 29 June 2011 15 12 21 May 2011 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Windows Contacts 29 June 2011 15 11 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 adm 29 June 2011 14 38 31 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 x 29 June 2011 14 37 51 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Windows Contacts 29 June 2011 14 35 34 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 adm 29 June 2011 14 30 30 29 30 31 My system 29 June 2011 14 25 23 ix 29 June 2011 13 53 42 eae ee sync 00000000 0000 0000 0000 000000000000 29
252. nenasesesenrnnanenen 6 5 7 oiie ale E AEE E A E E A T 6 5 8 EXGIUSIONS ian iararererarinnaitisaii aiia a TEREE AEE S TEE NE ET 6 6 Recovery from Acronis COU cccccsccccecsssessneececceecessecseaeseeeeecessesuaeeeeeessesseasaeseesesseeseaaeas 6 6 1 Recovering data from online backups 6 6 2 Selecting a Version tO FECOVED ere eneee aaaea a e Aae aa AAE a ei a ATE aa Aaea a aade seoran ae Seii 6 7 Removing data from Acronis Cloud cccccseessssececeeeceesesssaececeesessseaaeeeeecsseeseasaeseesesseeseaaeas Useful information iess eisiirerrann israk irs cwaceeddedececceieiedetsccaceediccedsucesdensacsdeccsecscdouscedcweaseseedoe 138 7 1 PROTECTING yo r SySt Miriise terie doreste ietie ep E EER E E AE GE ia A Gae EA E Gaiaa 138 7 2 Deciding where to store your backupS ssssssesssesssssssesenressssssrrerressssesrrernessssesreernesnsseseeenn 140 7 2 1 FIPSCOMMOCUION AEREA AE EIA E EA AA E outa ead reveeendie 7 22 AUTM NTICATION setting Senser eiae aei nenir e arri aiia i es EE EEE ia e radiis 7 3 Making sure that your rescue media can be used when ne eded cccesessessseeeeeeseeesseaees 7 3 1 Selecting video mode when booting from the rescue MEdia ccccsseseesesssssesessesssesessesesseesesseeaessesseeees 7 4 Testing that your backups can be used for FOCOVETY ccccccccccecessessceceseessessesneaeeeeeeeseessaaees 7 5 Migrating your system from an HDD to an SSD ccececsessececeeeesssesnsaec
253. ning 8 5 9 Cloning SUMIMALY oea ir A R Aa E a A a A RN 8 6 lt AddINg a NEW hard diskresie cerceii ededatinevess sadeehanatneaste labs aeaaeai ERa ioe EEE anaia 26 1 Selectinga hard diskein aTa e r a E a a det oalsn 8 6 2 Selecting initialization method ccc ceecsesssssesseseescssesscecsessessessessesecsecsecsecsessessesscseceeeseseessesaueaseeeseeaess 8 6 3 Creating MEW partitions i eienenn araa aa Ea iaia A EE a a EEEa Aa EEE ALANAS EAEE 8 6 4 Addn wdisk s mmaN icen a i aa a a a 8 7 Acronis Extended Capacity Manager cccccssssssccccecessessaececeeecsesesnaaeceeeesseeseasaeeeesesseeseaaeas 8 7 1 If Acronis Extended Capacity Manager does not start ccccccesssscsssscsscsecsscseessssessessesesseesesseesessesaceesers 8 8 Security and Privacy Tools cccecsessscecececsssesseececececesseseeaeseseesessseaaaeeeseessessesaeaeeeeeesseeeeaaeas 8 8 1 Acronis DriveCleanser ccsccseeseeeeees 8 8 2 File SHEED eeeeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseees 8 3 3 USYSTEMECI AMEUD PEE SAET 8 8 4 Hard Disk Wiping methods 8 9 M tingan image s e ern cco a aaa E a E aa die eee ans ee AATE 8 10 Unmo nting an iMa g iseti ioanen ea arane R e ie aiana ie aee aaa EK eie EOAR AAEE EE aanas B11 Working WAAAH ES ae E A e AEE A viel descend cere 8 11 1 Converting tib images into vhd virtual disks and vice versa ccsesceseeseesesscsseseessessesesscsesseesecsessesseeseeees 8 11 2 Recovery using vhd files created by
254. nnel adapter for the hard disks specify where to find the driver or drivers for the specific hardware at the Drivers manager step If the driver is stored on a diskette or CD select the Search removable media for device drivers box If some drivers are stored on a local hard disk or a network share select the Search for device drivers in the following locations box when it is not selected by default Specify the path to the driver or drivers after clicking Add Search Path _ RECEN yy iran tr G Recovery Wizard Required steps Drivers manager Specify additonal locotions where you wantto search for custom drivers of installed devices F Search removable media for device drivers 7 Search for device drivers in te following locations Aid Seer Pas ea Eon Pan WTEMP SUPPORT Drivers When both boxes are selected at this step Acronis Universal Restore will use three sources for drivers the removable media the drivers storage folder or folders specified at this step and the Windows default driver storage folders in the image being recovered The program will find the most suitable of all available drivers and install them into the recovered system Select the system disk at the What to recover step Then specify the destination of the disk being recovered new system disk At this point the program checks whether the destination disk is free If not you will be prompted by the Confirmation win
255. nsi Browse tib L tmp Save the settings as default v Reset to initial settings OK Cancel What you can exclude and how 1 You can exclude hidden and system files from a backup by selecting the corresponding check boxes We do not recommend excluding hidden and system files from the backups of your system partition 2 You can exclude files meeting the criteria you specify To do this select the Files matching the following criteria check box enter the exclusion criterion and then click Add By default the program excludes from backups files with the following extensions tmp and tib How to add an exclusion criterion You can enter explicit file names for exclusion from the backup file ext all such files will be excluded from the backup C file ext the file ext file on the C disk will be excluded You can use wildcard characters and ext all files with a ext extension will be excluded name ext all files with a ext extension having six letters in their names starting with any two symbols and ending with name will be excluded To exclude a folder click Browse select the folder you want to exclude on the directory tree click OK and then click Add To delete a criterion for example added by mistake click the Delete icon to the right of the criterion 3 14 Validating backups The validation procedure checks whether you will be able to recove
256. nsolidation of a backup is enabled by setting the overall limitations for the backup These limitations include a maximum number of backup versions a maximum storage period for the backup files a maximum backup size Automatic backup version consolidation is available only for the incremental and differential methods of the custom backup version scheme By default there are no limits set and automatic consolidation is not performed To enable automatic consolidation you must select at least one of the limits and either leave its default value or change it according to your needs If limits are set then after creating a backup version the program checks the backup for quota violations such as exceeding a pre set maximum number of gigabytes set aside for backup versions and if any limitation is exceeded consolidates the oldest backup versions For example if you ve pre set your backup to store 50GB of backup files and your backup versions reach 55GB you have exceeded a quota and the system will respond automatically based on rules that you ve already set This operation creates a temporary file and thus requires disk space Consider also that the quota must be violated so that the program can detect the violation Therefore to be able to consolidate the files the program needs some space on the disk in excess of the backup quota The extra amount of space can be estimated as the size of the largest backup version in the backup
257. nt User s Guide Winpe chm Integrating True Image 2013 with WinPE 2 x or 3 0 ISO Acronis WinPE ISO Builder provides three methods of integrating True Image 2013 with WinPE 2 x and WinPE 3 0 Creating the PE 2 or PE 3 ISO with the plug in from scratch Adding the Acronis Plug in to the existing PE 2 or PE 3 ISO This comes in handy when you have to add the plug in to the previously configured PE 2 or PE 3 ISO that is already in use Adding the Acronis Plug in to a WIM file for any future purpose manual ISO building adding other tools to the image and so on To be able to perform any of the above operations True Image 2013 Plus Pack and Windows Automated Installation Kit WAIK must be installed on your PC If you have not installed WAIK install it as described earlier in this section Acronis WinPE ISO Builder supports only x86 WinPE 2 x and WinPE 3 0 This WinPE distribution can also work on x64 hardware A PE image based on Win PE 2 x or 3 0 requires at least 256MB RAM to work The recommended memory size for PE 2 x or 3 0 is 512MB 8 2 3 1 Creating a new Win PE 2 x or PE 3 0 ISO with the Acronis Plug in You must have True Image 2013 Plus Pack installed on your PC Creating a new Win PE 2 x or PE 3 0 ISO with the Acronis Plug in begins from creating a Windows PE build directory 1 Select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Windows PE Tools Command Prompt from the Start menu Users of Windows 7 should select Microsof
258. nted ISO files Selection rules Check boxes that correspond to the items may be in the following states Selected check mark in square this state indicates that the item is selected for recovery A selected folder means that all items in the folder are selected Cleared clear square this state indicates that the item is not selected Mixed filled square this state is available for folders only and indicates that some items in the folder are selected and the others are not Note that you cannot set the state by clicking the check box but you can change it to a cleared or selected state Selecting a disk partition file or folder to make it the current item in a list does not mean selecting it for recovery True Image 2013 by Acronis as Disks and partitions Files and folders Alm System disk gt Friday June 08 2012 11 38 39 PM al My computer 4 Name Size Type Date z amc Z AppData File Folder 7 5 2011 5 18 17 AM INPL amp v a Contacts File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 03 PM Recycle EW be Desktop File Folder 6 8 2012 11 30 28 PM WINDO v a Documents File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 04 PM Boot v a Downloads File Folder 6 8 2012 3 58 03 AM a Perflogs F B Favorites File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 03 PM jb Program 7 J Links File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 05 PM Program EA a Music File Folder 3 19 2012 11 38 03 PM Recovery v a Pictures File Folder 6 8 2012 2 18 22 AM i System v
259. o a hard disk with the aim of transferring the backup to an FTP later you may split the backup into files of 2GB each by setting the desired file size in the backup options An FTP server must allow passive mode file transfers The firewall settings of the source computer should have Ports 20 and 21 opened for the TPC and UDP protocols to function The Routing and Remote Access Windows service should be disabled 7 2 2 Authentication settings If you are connecting to a networked computer in most cases you will need to provide the necessary credentials for accessing the network share For example this is possible when you select a backup storage in the Browse for destination window The Authentication Settings window appears automatically when you click a networked computer name To open it manually click Specify credentials for this locations on the toolbar If you need to specify the user name and password User name enter a user name Password enter the user s password When you click the Test connection button the computer will try to connect to the selected network share If you receive an error message check if the credentials are correct and provide the correct user name and password for the selected network share To repeat the connection attempt click the Test again button Having provided the required information click Connect 7 3 Making sure that your rescue media can be used when needed To maximize the
260. o be performed True Image Ready to create the Windows PE ISO media Windows PE source c winpe_x66 jso Acronis WinPE directory ISO C Program RAlesiAcronis TruelmageHomelSartPEI ki Target 150 file name C vinpe_x86150 AcronisMedia iso 9 Acronis Compute with carfidence www acronis com Please click Proceed to start 8 Burn the ISO to a CD using a third party tool for example Nero and you will have a bootable Windows PE disc with True Image 2013 Once a machine boots into WinPE True Image 2013 starts automatically Be aware that startup may take a considerable amount of time 8 2 3 2 Adding the Acronis Plug in to the existing WinPE 2 x or 3 0 ISO To be able to add the Acronis Plug in you must first install True Image 2013 Plus Pack on your PC 1 Unpack all files of your Win PE 2 or 3 ISO to a separate folder on the hard disk 2 Select Acronis gt True Image 2013 Plus Pack gt Acronis WinPE ISO Builder from the Start menu 3 Specify the path to the folder with the WinPE files Specify the full path to the resulting ISO file including the filename or leave the default path and filename AcronisMedia iso 5 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed Burn the ISO to a CD using a third party tool for example Nero and you will have a bootable Windows PE disc with True Image 2013 Once the machine boots into WinPE True Image 2013 starts automatically Be aware that startup
261. o if you are able to boot from such a backup you almost certainly will be able to boot after an actual system recovery from that backup When you choose a tib file to boot from True Image 2013 temporarily converts it to a vhd file Your hard disk must have enough free space for storing it The program will then add a new item to the Windows boot loader list When you select the tib file in the boot loader list your computer will actually boot from that temporary vhd file After ensuring that the tib file stores a bootable backup you can remove the file from the boot loader list and delete the temporary vhd file For more information see Booting from a tib image of your Windows 7 system partition p 227 7 5 Migrating your system from an HDD to an SSD In this section Preparing for Migration c ccccccccsssssssscecceecessessneeeeeessesseseaeeeseesseesees 147 What to do if True Image 2013 does not recognize your SSD 5 147 Checking SSD partition aligNnMent ccccssssssecececessessseceeeeseessessaaeess 149 Fixing SSD partition aligNMent ccccccccccecsssssssseceeeeesessessaeeeeeesseesees 149 Migrating to an SSD using the backup and recovery method 150 What to do if your SSD does not have enough space for all HDD content151 7 5 1 Preparing for migration Solid state disks have become quite common Many users decide to replace their system hard disk with an SSD to enhance the disk system
262. o permit sending the information Feedback Confirmation The following information will be sent via the Internet Click OK to confirm Parameter name Value Always send without confirmation If in future you would like to send such information without confirmation select the Always send without confirmation check box If you do not have Internet access when such an error message is shown this may happen for example when booted from the rescue media please write down the event code When you establish Internet connection or if you can use another computer where Internet connection is available use the following URL to go to the Acronis Web site error reporting form http kb acronis com errorcode Select the Acronis product version you use and manually enter the event code into the appropriate field Then click the Search button to search for an article that may contain the solution to your issue Sometimes an error may occur in a low level program module and then propagate to higher level modules resulting in errors in those modules as well This is a so called composite error where every higher level module generates its own error event code The following error message is an example Failed to start Try amp Decide More information about this error and an applicable solution may be available online in the Acronis Knowledge base To access the online resource manually enter the event code at http kb acr
263. o your PC or another system that has True Image 2013 installed on it On the other hand Acronis Cloud is a Web application that allows you to recover and manage the data you store on Acronis Cloud You can use any computer with a Web browser without the necessity of installing True Image 2013 or other Acronis application that operates with Acronis Cloud Simply go to the Acronis Web site using this link https www acronis com my online backup and log in to your account When your subscription information page opens click Recover my data now After the Acronis Cloud page opens select the backup or sync that contains the files you need to recover and then download the files to your current computer You can save documents photos music and more from up to five PCs on one account If a computer crashes no problem Just log in from another computer and retrieve your files 6 2 Subscription information Performing backups to Acronis Cloud requires subscription to the Acronis Cloud service To subscribe start True Image 2013 and click the Create account link on the login window This will open your Web browser and take you to the main Acronis Web site to continue registration Fill in the appropriate fields and the account will be created for you Provide your first and last names and e mail address You will be offered a country selected on the basis of the IP address of your computer though you can select another country if you wish Th
264. oad caused by other applications The overload can be caused by running resource intensive applications for example performing a deep system scan with your antivirus software In such a case Nonstop Backup automatically pauses and you cannot restart it After pausing Acronis Nonstop Backup gives the system one hour to relieve the load and then attempts to restart The automatic restart count for Acronis Nonstop Backup is 6 This means that after the first automatic restart Acronis Nonstop Backup will attempt to restart five more times with intervals of exactly one hour between attempts After the sixth unsuccessful attempt Acronis Nonstop Backup will wait for the next calendar day On the next day the automatic restart count will automatically reset When not interfered with Acronis Nonstop Backup performs six restart attempts per day The restart attempt count can be reset by doing any of the following Restarting Acronis Nonstop Backup service Rebooting the computer Restarting Acronis Nonstop Backup service will only reset the restart count to O If the system is still overloaded Acronis Nonstop Backup will pause again An Acronis Support Knowledge Base article at http forum acronis com forum 14958 describes the procedure for restarting the Acronis Nonstop Backup service Rebooting the computer will reset the load and the restart count If the system overloads again Acronis Nonstop Backup will pause Why does Acronis Non
265. ocated space Click Next to proceed to the Size of Acronis Secure Zone p 185 step 8 4 3 Selecting partitions Select the partitions from which space will be used to create Acronis Secure Zone You can also select an unallocated space to create the zone G Manage Acronis Secure Zone Wizard sn iad Create ASZ Partition content E Partition F Capac Free Sp Type Oniki 7 LANTFS New Volume E Pri 1600GB 15 56 GB NTFS Disk2 T i Unallocated 2MB Unallocated Disk3 Qe 16GB New Volume E U i 16 00 GB NTFS M Primary Logical Dynamic f Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported To select a partition Select the appropriate partition check box and click Next 8 4 4 Size of Acronis Secure Zone You can specify the size of the Acronis Secure Zone i Acronis Secure Zone Wizard b ba Jk G Manage Acronis Secure Zone Wizard Required steps Please specify settings for the partition being created Space allocation 59MB mee oO Acronis Secure Zone amp Space avaible Acronis Secure Zone 7 818 GB 185 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The minimum size is about 50 MB depending on the geometry of the hard disk The maximum size is equal to the disk s unallocated space plus the total free space on all partitions selected at the previous step When creating enlarging the Acronis Secure Zone the program will first use t
266. ommend to use the backup and recovery method in most cases This method provides more flexibility and control over migration See Migrating to an SSD using the backup and recovery method p 150 In the second case you will need to free up space on the system disk to make migration possible See What to do if your SSD does not have enough space for all HDD content p 151 7 5 2 What to do if True Image 2013 does not recognize your SSD Sometimes True Image 2013 may not recognize an SSD In such a case check whether the SSD is recognized in BIOS If the BIOS of your computer does not show the SSD verify that the power and data cables are properly connected You may also try to update the BIOS and SATA drivers If these suggestions do not help contact the Support of your SSD manufacturer If the BIOS of your computer does show the SSD you can try the following procedure For Windows Vista Windows 7 type cmd in the Search field and press Enter For Windows XP type cmd in the Run field and press Enter At the command line prompt type diskpart list disk The screen will show the disks connected to your computer Find out the disk number for your SSD Use its size as the reference select disk N Here N is the disk number of your SSD clean This operation removes all information from the SSD and overwrites the MBR with the default one exit exit Start True Image 2013 and check whether it detects the SSD If it detects
267. on 8 2 Creating bootable rescue media In this section Acronis Media Builder cccccccssccecssssececessnececeesueeeeessueeeessqeeeesssueeeeeees 169 Creating BartPE disc with True Image 2013 ccsssscccceeeesssssseees 174 Creating WinPE based rescue media cccececsseceeeesteceeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 176 How to prepare a USB flash drive for Acronis Media Builder 181 8 2 1 Acronis Media Builder You canrun True Image 2013 from an emergency boot media on a bare metal system or a crashed computer that cannot boot You can even back up disks on a non Windows computer copying all its data into the backup by imaging the disk in the sector by sector mode To do so you will need bootable media that has a copy of the standalone True Image 2013 version installed on it If you purchased the boxed product you already have a bootable CD because the installation CD itself is bootable If you purchased True Image 2013 on the Web or as a download from a retailer you can create bootable media using the Bootable Media Builder For this you will need a blank CD R RW a blank DVD R RW or any other media from which your computer can boot such as a USB flash drive Please note you cannot boot Windows operating system from a bootable media created on a USB flash drive True Image 2013 also provides the ability to create an ISO image of a bootable disc on the hard disk If you have other Acronis products suc
268. on Letter H Z Label Type Primary A Partition size Used space 29GB Total size 10252 0 New Volume H 10 GB Preserve source partition size 10 GB Reduce partition size Cancel If the image contains more than two partitions leave enough unallocated space for other partitions to be recovered and repeat steps 5 7 until you make the settings for all partitions 9 Click Recover now to recover the partitions to the destination hard disk Disk Recovery Show MBR Recovering VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 Version Today at 1 39PM v amp Disk recovery options seca Source Switch to disk mode I New Volume D NTFS DP ioc New Volume F VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 25 GB Partition properties eS New Volume G NTFS DD oon Unallocated space Mware VM 10 GB are Virtual 1 0 DA Partition properties Recover now Cancel 4 5 Recovering a disk backup to a different disk under rescue media Recovery of a disk backup containing several partitions to a hard disk that has a different capacity is one of the most complicated operations This is especially true when the original hard disk you have backed up has a hidden diagnostic or recovery partition Complete the preparations described in Preparing for recovery p 79 If you have not already done so assign unique names labels to the partitions of your
269. on at once Here we describe recovery of two partitions If an image of a hard disk has more than two partitions the procedure is similar The following procedure is valid only for recovery to a basic disk Recovery to a dynamic disk with partition resizing is impossible 1 85 Click Recover on the backup box of a disk containing several partitions The Disk Recovery window appears Recovering VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 Version Today at 1 39PM v Source Switch to disk mode New Volume D NTFS P 1 9 GB New Volume G NTFS 2 9 GB Show MBR Disk recovery options Click the down arrow next to Version and then select the backup version you want to recover by its backup date and time Select a partition to recover This opens the recovery destination field below the partition name label Recovering VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 Version Source Switch to disk mode New Volume D NTFS ITER U FF ioce New Volume F _ jee VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 New Volume G NTFS OF poe Show MBR P Disk recovery options Recover now Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 4 Click the down arrow to the right of the field and select the destination hard disk The partition to be recovered is then placed on the selected hard disk It occupies all the available disk space To reduce the partition size so as to leave enough disk space for
270. on message 126 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 6 Using online backup In this section What is Acronis ClOUC cscccccsssececsssnecececsneeeceeseeeceeaeeecsenaeeeceeneeeeeees 127 Subscription information cceececeesseeeceenteceeseaeeecseaaeeecseaaeeeeseaaeeseneaaes 127 Backing up to Acronis Cloud eeccecesseececesseeeeceeseeeecesseeeeceeseeeecessenaeess 128 Managing Online backup cccccccsesssssscecececessessseceecesseeseseaeeeeeesseseees 129 Online backup OPtiONS ccecssccccesstececeesneceeeesaeeeeeecueeeeseaeeeesenaeeeesenaes 130 Recovery from Acronis ClOU ccccccessececessececesseeeeceseeeeeeeeseeeeeesenaeens 135 Removing data from Acronis Cloud ccccccceseesssseceeeeesessessaeeeeeessessees 137 6 1 What is Acronis Cloud On the one hand Acronis Cloud is a remote storage which you may use for storing your data All you need for using this storage is an Acronis account You can save important files to a secure remote location and recover them when the need arises Because files are stored on a remote storage they are protected even if your computer gets stolen or your house burns down So the risk of data loss as a result of fire theft or other natural disasters is practically eliminated If something happens to your backup image PC or external storage device you can get your most important files back If your computer crashes you can recover your files back t
271. one limitation it must accessible with the SMB protocol It does not matter whether an NAS share you want to use for the storage is mapped as a local disk or not If the share requires login you will need to provide the correct user name and password For more information see Authentication settings p 141 True Image 2013 remembers the credentials and the subsequent connections to the share do not require login When an external hard disk or NAS is unavailable the Nonstop Backup destination can be an internal disk including a dynamic one Please note that you cannot use a partition to be protected as a Nonstop Backup storage If your computer has a single hard disk drive with a single partition but you want to use Acronis Nonstop Backup anyway you can create Acronis Secure Zone and use it as the Nonstop Backup data storage Before creating Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage True Image 2013 checks whether the selected destination has enough free space It multiplies the volume of data to be protected by 1 2 and compares the calculated value with the available space If the free space on the destination satisfies this minimum storage size criterion the destination can be used for storing Nonstop Backup data Managing Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage Inevitably the Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage becomes full after a period of time which depends on the selected Nonstop Backup destination and the volume and composition of the data pro
272. onis com errorcode Event code 0x00970007 0x00970016 0x00970002 The event codes from different modules are combined with symbols When manually entering such event codes into the appropriate field to search in the Knowledge Base enter the event code components without spaces around the symbols If the event code s is not recognized in the Knowledge Base the base does not yet contain an article to resolve the issue In such cases please open a trouble ticket with Acronis Customer Central 9 3 How to collect crash dumps Because a crash of True Image 2013 or Windows can be caused by different reasons each crash case must be investigated separately Acronis Customer Central would appreciate if you could provide the following information If True Image 2013 crashes please provide the following information 1 Adescription of the exact sequence of steps performed before you encountered the issue 2 Dr Watson crash dump For information on how to collect such a dump see the Acronis Support Knowledge Base KB article at http kb acronis com content 2192 If True Image 2013 causes a Windows crash 1 A description of the exact sequence of steps performed before you encountered the issue 2 A Windows dump file For information on how to collect such a dump see the Acronis Support KB article at http kb acronis com content 17639 If True Image 2013 hangs 1 A description of the exact sequence of steps performed before you encoun
273. ontain data Furthermore True Image 2013 does not back up pagefile sys under Windows XP and later and hiberfil sys a file that keeps RAM contents when the computer goes into hibernation This reduces image size and speeds up image creation and recovery A partition image includes all files and folders including hidden and system files boot record and FAT file allocation table It also includes files in the root directory and the zero track of the hard disk with the master boot record MBR A disk image includes images of all disk partitions and the zero track with the MBR 3 2 Full incremental and differential backups True Image 2013 offers you three backup methods 1 Full contains all of the data at the moment of the backup creation It forms a base for further incremental or differential backups It can also be used as a standalone backup 2 Incremental Only those files will be included which have been changed since the LAST backup 3 Differential Only those files will be included which have been changed since the last FULL backup We suggest you to choose one of the following three approaches of using the backup methods Full A standalone full backup might be an optimal solution if you often roll back the system to its initial state or if you do not like to manage multiple files Incremental These are most useful when you need frequent backups and the ability to roll back to a specific point in time Having creat
274. ontains a task name a backup method a backup number and a sequential file number if the backup is split into several files the suffixes will be v1 v2 etc Optionally you may add to the name date time etc by adding the appropriate macros Synchronization with mobile devices Now you can sync your data not only between your PCs but with your mobile devices as well Such devices include phones and tablet PCs with the iOS and Android platforms Simply go to App Store or Google Play install the free Acronis app and get access to your data on Acronis Cloud anyplace and anytime Easy sharing of files and folders Users subscribed to the Acronis Cloud service now can share files and folders with one click All you need to do is to right click the desired file or folder and choose Create public link in the shortcut menu The program creates a public link and places it in the Clipboard You can share the link with any person What is more you can create public links to any file or folder and not only to those which are included in syncs or online backups k 1 5 FAQ about backup recovery and cloning have a 150GB system partition but the occupied space on that partition is only 80GB What will True Image 2013 include in a backup By default True Image 2013 copies only the hard disk sectors that contain data so it will include only 80GB in a backup You can also choose the sector by sector mode Note than such a backup mode is require
275. onthly execution parameters cccccccscscssessesscssesssscsscsscssesesssssessessesecsecsessessessessesseessseseessesaussesaeeasseeers 7 74 Upon event EXECUTION PAPAMETELS cccsccscessesecssessecesscsecssesecesscecesecsecesscsesessceesesseseseeesaesessesesenssaesenseas 7 8 Searching backups and their content cceccesscecececsssessaececeesceeseesaeeeesesseesesaeeeesesseeseaaaas TB Vs SSARCIIAR A E E E A EA Sisal cnt cee clela sinus cate bce A a hdc A 7 8 2 Using Windows Search with True Image 2013 cc ceseesesssssessssesscsscsscsececsesseesessessesessessessessessesaseasers 7 9 Choosing columns for viewing in WiZArS cccccccecessessssececeeecessesnsaeeeeeesseeseasaeeeeeesseeseaaeas 7 10 BaCkupsinfOrMatiO nics osi408 cece EE E E EEA ESE esse ee Bac E Rae 7 11 TIM OUt settihgS eves sccdscceccucdeccabenvedeccueuladibcncekcgcutvessclueeedaccceu caatlucsacucuedeutateeeetteceeteacebunaateess Tools and Utilities reins ear E acces E EES E NENE teecevedevecesseitesedfiewectececnens 167 8 1 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ccccccccccccccccecececececececesecececececececesececesesecesesesesesesesesess 168 8 1 1 HOW It WOKS sennoina eau aaiae e aao E Eon EE Aata S Eaa e EEEa EEEN ENA aE 8 1 2 TOW ONU K SREE E ENEE E AE E T N EA A 8 2 Creating bootable rescue media 8 24 Acronis M dia Builderin iann e aa SEEE a ane r ei aaia ini eta 8 2 2 Creating BartPE disc with True Image 2013 ceescsssssessess
276. operation 3 To start the recovery process click the Recover now button 4 The recovery progress will be shown in a special window You can stop the recovery by clicking Cancel Please keep in mind that the aborted recovery may still cause changes in the original location 4 7 Recovering file versions If you need to recover a specific version of a file select the file in the Backup Explorer When you select the file the View versions link appears below the file size information Clicking the link opens the View Versions window with a list of all versions of the file in the backup Until you select a file version the Open and Recover buttons remain disabled Selecting a file version enables the buttons W View Versions to boles g Studio bmp v i Version Backup A 3 38 16 PM I 3 42 06 PM File backup 3 42 18 PM Thursday August 12 2010 3 28 50 PM Thursday August 12 2010 3 29 12 PM Thursday August 12 2010 3 29 22 PM Thursday August 12 2010 3 29 36 PM f Open Recovers Select the required version by its backup time and click the Recover button This will open the File Recovery window Select the destination and recover the file version to the folder of your choice For more information see Recovering data from file level backups You can also recover the version by dragging it into a selected folder in Windows Explorer To choose the correct version you can open the version in the associated app
277. or edit existing documents while in the Try mode and then decide to discard your changes those files document changes and mail will no longer exist If you use POP email make sure to change the settings in your e mail to leave your mail on the server before you activate the Try mode This way you can always retrieve your email again Similarly save new files and or edited documents to a drive not protected by Try amp Decide After starting the Try mode you can safely install any system updates drivers and applications without worrying about what might happen to your system If anything goes wrong you can simply discard the changes made in the Try mode E Try amp Decide Try amp Decide is off 7 Click to start When Try amp Decide is on you can install unsafe software visit untrusted Web sites open suspicious e mails and perform any other potentially dangerous operations without risk Try amp Decide lets you apply or discard changes to your computer Learn more Options Protected partitions C Storage for virtual changes C is Used space Used by Try amp Decide Available 7 454 GB 0 bytes 8 511 GB Notifications Notify me if free disk space is less than 500 MB and Try amp Decide has been working for 10 Minutes Change alert settings l Reset settings to default One of the best features of Try amp Decide is that it isolates your real operating system from changes to the tempor
278. ore the original booting configuration 8 12 Importing and exporting backup settings True Image 2013 allows you to import and export the settings of your backups This may be desirable if you need to transfer the settings to a new PC after installing True Image 2013 on that computer Saving the settings may also be useful if you later decide to upgrade to the next True Image 2013 version Such transfer will make configuring backups on the new PC much easier You only need to export the settings and then import them to the other PC The settings are exported in the form of script files The settings content can be different depending on a backup type In case of classic disk and file type backups the settings consist of the following items list of items for backup backup options backup location schedule backup scheme automatic clean up rules backup version naming rules The settings of Nonstop Backup are as follows list of items for nonstop protection Nonstop Backup data storage location a list of locations if there are several You cannot import Online Backup settings from one computer to another To export the settings of your existing backups click Tools amp Utilities on the menu bar Then click Export backup settings and browse for the destination to save the script files with the settings To import the settings start True Image 2013 on another computer and click Tools amp Utilities on t
279. original configuration under Windows or by using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is possible if the computer has an Acronis Secure Zone that has a backup of the computer s factory configuration This backup is normally created and provided to Acronis Secure Zone by a hardware supplier who delivers computers to end users When recovery is from factory bootable media the media includes a backup with factory image configuration Restoring factory settings under Windows In Windows the factory configuration is restored by using the standard recovery feature of True Image 2013 To restore the computer to factory settings 1 Start True Image 2013 Click the Backup and recovery tab In the list of backups choose the backup named Original configuration Click Recover OU ees When prompted click Reboot The operation will continue after the computer restart Once the operation is complete the computer will load the original Windows installation Restoring factory settings using Acronis Startup Recovery Manager To restore the computer to factory settings 1 Power on the computer 2 When prompted press F11 to run Acronis Startup Recovery Manager 3 Select Recover If the backup consists of several versions select the version that you want to recover 4 Confirm the operation by clicking Yes Once the operation is complete the computer will be restarted or powered off At the next computer boot up it will load the original W
280. ot displayed Deleting it will result in the startup messages being displayed as the Linux kernel is loaded and the command shell being offered prior to runningthe program nodma Disables DMA for all IDE disk drives Prevents kernel from freezing on some hardware nofw Disables FireWire IEEE1394 support nopcmcia Disables PCMCIA hardware detection nomouse Disables mouse support module name off Disables the module e g sata_sis off pci bios Forces to use PCI BIOS and not to access the hardware device directly For instance this parameter may be used if the machine has a non standard PCI host bridge pci nobios Disallows use of PCI BIOS only direct hardware access methods are allowed For instance this parameter may be used if you experience crashes upon boot up probably caused by the BIOS pci biosirq Uses PCI BIOS calls to get the interrupt routing table These calls are known to be buggy on several machines and they hang the machine when used but on other computers it is the only way to get the interrupt routing table Try this option if the kernel is unable to allocate IRQs or discover secondary PCI buses on your motherboard vga ask Gets the list of the video modes available for your video card and allows selecting a video mode most suitable for the video card and monitor Try this option if the automatically selected video mode is unsuitable for your hardware 8 2 1 3 Bootable media s
281. otifications You can specify an e mail account that will be used for notification of the backup process To specify the e mail settings Enter the e mail address in the E mail address field You can enter several e mail addresses in a semicolon delimited format Enter the outgoing mail server SMTP in the Outgoing mail server SMTP field Set the port of the outgoing mail server By default the port is set to 25 Enter the user name in the User name field Enter the password in the Password field Online backup options o o a Backup Performance Notifications Exclusions V Send e mail notifications about the operation state tester test com Server settings Port smtp test com 25 tester seoccees Additional notification settings Send test message Save the settings as default we Reset to initial settings OK To specify additional notification settings click the Additional notification settings link To send notification concerning process completion select the Send notification upon operation s successful completion check box To send notification concerning process failure select the Send notification upon operation failure check box Tosend notification with operation messages select the Send notification when user interaction is required check box To send notification with full log of operations select the Add full log to the notification check bo
282. ou may add other partitions or disks in your system Storage for virtual changes specify where Try amp Decide will store information about virtual changes to your system By default Try amp Decide saves the information to a free space on Disk C You can also choose as such place Acronis Secure Zone or another logical disk or hard drive When choosing to protect more than one partition you cannot select one of the partitions to be protected to store virtual changes In addition you cannot select an external hard disk drive Notifications specify whether Try amp Decide should alert you when it uses up all the space allotted for saving virtual changes and after a specified time period has passed By default all notifications are On To change the default settings click Change alert settings Note that after configuring the settings you will always be able to recover their default values To do so Click the Reset settings to default button 7 6 4 1 Protected partitions Specify the partition or partitions you want to protect from unauthorized changes during a Try amp Decide session By default Try amp Decide protects Disk C though you may choose to protect any other partition s in your system To select a partition m Check the corresponding partition box To select the entire disk you must select all its partitions Click OK 7 6 4 2 Storage for virtual changes Specify the partition you want to use as a storage
283. out risk p 151 create and use the Acronis Secure Zone p 182 recover your old backup to a new hardware migrate the system from one computer to another p 96 add and partition a new hard disk p 196 be sure that your data is not accessible to anyone else p 65 find a backup that contains the file you need to recover p 160 migrate your system to an SSD p 146 check SSD partition alignment p 149 fix SSD partition alignment p 149 create a custom WinPE 3 0 iso with your drivers p 180 3 Backing up data True Image 2013 includes a wealth of sophisticated backup capabilities that would please even an IT professional They allow you to back up your disks partitions files and e mail You can choose a backup feature that suits you most or use them all The sections below describe the backup features in more detail In this section The difference between file backups and disk partition images 38 Full incremental and differential backups cc cccccsssceeeesseceeeesteeeeeees 39 Backup file NAMING cccccsscccceessecececscceceeeeeeceesseeeceeaeeeseesaeeeeeesaeeeeees 39 Backing Up partitions and CiSKS cssccccceceeessesssaeeeeeeessssenseaeeeeeeseessees 42 Backing up files and folders ccccccecssscececsscceceescceceeaeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeees 44 Backing Up C Mail ccccccesccssssececeeecessesseaececececeeseeeeaeceeeeesessesseaeeeeeesseseees 47 Using Acronis Nonstop B
284. ovides you with all the essential tools to recover your computer system should a disaster occur such as losing data accidentally deleting critical files or folders or suffering a complete hard disk crash With the unique technology developed by Acronis and implemented in True Image 2013 you can perform exact sector by sector disk backups Such backups include all operating systems applications and configuration files personal settings and data True Image 2013 helps you protect your identity as well Simply deleting old data will not remove it permanently from your computer True Image 2013 includes Acronis DriveCleanser that permanently destroys files and wipes personal information from partitions and or entire disks as well as the System Clean up tool that cleans up your Windows system of all traces of user activity When performing scheduled backups True Image 2013 automatically selects a backup mode full incremental differential in accordance with the backup scheme set by the user You can store backups on almost any PC storage device Windows style interface and wizards will make your work easier Just perform a few simple steps and let True Image 2013 take care of everything else When a system problem occurs the software will get you up and running in no time 1 1 2 Whatis True Image 2013 Plus Pack by Acronis True Image 2013 Plus Pack is an add on to True Image 2013 It is purchased separately has a separate license and
285. p now z Cancel 5 Click Back up now If the backup does not fit one disc for example DVD the file will be split into several volumes The first disc will be the bootable one If you plan to perform this backup regularly you can make the appropriate settings in the Disk backup options See Removable media settings p 68 Bootable media with a backup file can only be created when using True Image 2013 in Windows It is impossible to create such media in a bootable environment Additional information Sometimes True Image 2013 may not recognize a USB flash drive as suitable for making it bootable In such a case you can try to prepare the drive See How to prepare a USB flash drive for Acronis Media Builder p 181 Though True Image 2013 cannot make a bootable USB hard disk you may try using third party tools For example see the procedure suggested by MudCrab an Acronis True Image Home Forum MVP at http www themudcrab com acronis_grub4dos php 3 10 Backup to various places True Image 2013 offers you flexibility in choosing destinations for your backups You can save full incremental and differential backup versions to different places including a network share CD DVD USB stick as well as any local internal or external hard drive You can save backup versions to different destinations by changing the backup destination when editing the settings of a selected backup For example after you save the initial f
286. pplying network credentials a user name and password While entering hostnames and IP addresses you can use and wildcards Click Show network places to view the list of network places that you visited using the credentials you want to delete 8 8 3 4 Preview When the scanning is finished its results will be available in the upper part of the wizard window By default all system components are scanned for clean up If you want to customize which of the system components should be scanned and which should not change the default clean up settings You can view the search results and manually select unselect the items you wish to clean up keep In order to help you with making the right choice all the components are provided with brief descriptions Just click on the component s name and its description will be displayed in the right side of the window To select unselect a component Expand the System Components item in the System Clean up tree and make sure that the component you wish to clean up is selected If you do not want to clean up a component simply clear its check box If required you can dig deeper by expanding a component and selecting unselecting its contents Having specified the components for clean up click the Clean up button to continue Windows Vista and Windows 7 do not keep information on file and computer searches Furthermore information on opened saved files is stored in the registry differently
287. ps are stored in a special storage named Acronis Cloud accessible over the Internet The main advantage of an online backup is that all backups are stored on the remote location It gives a guarantee that all backed up data will be safe independently of a user local storages To begin to use Acronis Cloud a user should subscribe to the service R Recovery Recovery is a process of returning of a corrupted data to a previous normal state from a backup p 238 S Sync 1 The same as Data synchronization p 239 2 Sync settings which were configured on the sync owner s computer A created sync is managed using the corresponding sync box Sync creation does not mean start of sync process Other users may join a created sync V Validation An operation that checks whether you will be able to recover data from a particular backup version p 238 When you select for validation a full backup version p 239 the program validates the full backup version only a differential backup version p 239 the program validates the initial full backup version and the selected differential backup version an incremental backup version p 240 the program validates the initial full backup version the selected incremental backup version and the whole chain if any of backup versions to the selected incremental backup version If the chain contains one or more differential backup versions the program
288. puter and press F11 when you see the Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager message This will start a standalone version of True Image 2013 that differs only slightly from the complete version Browse for a backup containing an image of your system partition and recover your system Disk letters in standalone True Image 2013 might sometimes differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D disk identified in the standalone True Image 2013 might correspond to the E disk in Windows The disk labels and information on partition sizes file systems drive capacities their manufacturers and model numbers can help in correctly identifying the disks and partitions You won t be able to use the previously activated Acronis Startup Recovery Manager if the Try amp Decide is turned on Rebooting the computer in the Try mode will allow you to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager again 4 11 About recovery of dynamic GPT disks and volumes 1 True Image 2013 supports recovery of dynamic volumes to the following locations on the local hard drives To the original location to the same dynamic volume To another dynamic disk or volume To unallocated space of the dynamic group Toa basic disk If a dynamic volume is recovered to an unallocated space of the dynamic group the recovered volume type will be the same as it was in the backup Manual resizing of dynamic volumes during recovery to dynamic disks is not
289. r True Image 2013 detects the selected backup storage You need to check this both in Windows and when booted from the rescue media To gain access to an NDAS enabled storage device in many cases you will need to specify the NDAS device ID 20 characters and the write key 5 characters The write key allows you to use an NDAS enabled device in write mode for example for saving your backups Usually the device ID and write key are printed on a sticker attached to the bottom of the NDAS device or on the inside of its enclosure If there is no sticker you need to contact your NDAS device vendor to obtain that information The certain NAS devices can be detected by True Image 2013 only if Bonjour software is installed Optical discs Blank optical discs such as DVD R DVD R are very cheap so they will be the lowest cost solution for backing up your data though the slowest one This is especially true when backing up directly to DVDs Furthermore if your backup consists of several DVDs data recovery from DVDs will require a lot of disc swapping On the other hand using Blu ray discs may be a viable option Due to the necessity of swapping discs we strongly recommend to avoid backing up to DVDs if the number of discs is more than three When there is no alternative to backing up to DVDs we recommend to copy all DVDs to a folder on a hard disk and then to recover from that folder Online backup True Image 2013 allows you to u
290. r data If needed you can also create other syncs 5 7 Sync creation Before you begin a new sync creation please choose which computers and or storage devices will take part in your new sync Then make sure that the following conditions are met True Image 2013 or True Image Home 2012 is installed on every computer If you connect your computers through a local area network make sure that local connection is established All owners of the involved computers have Acronis accounts Every computer has connection to the Internet Depending on which computers and or storage devices will be involved in your new sync select one of the following sync types Sync within one computer p 115 including sync with removable and remote storage devices Sync between two or more computers p 115 If needed you can combine these two sync types in one sync 5 7 1 How to sync data between your computers Let s see how to sync data between two or more computers which belong to the same Acronis account For example you need to sync data between your home computers or between your home computer and work computer If you use the default sync folder on both of your computers the procedure is very simple 1 Install True Image 2013 on both computers 2 Signin under your account on the computers 3 Drag the files you want to synchronize into the Sync folder and they will be automatically synced across the computers
291. r data from a particular backup version so when you select for validation on the time line a full backup version the program validates the full backup version only a differential backup version the program validates the initial full backup version and the selected differential backup version an incremental backup version the program validates the initial full backup the selected incremental backup version and the whole chain if any of backup versions to the selected incremental backup version If the chain contains one or more differential backup versions the program validates in addition to the initial full backup version and the selected incremental backup version only the most recent differential backup version in the chain and all subsequent incremental backup versions if any between the differential backup version and the selected incremental backup version This information can be helpful for example when you find out that a backup comprising a full backup version and a chain of incremental ones is corrupted To troubleshoot the backup do as follows First of all validate the full backup version by selecting it on the time line right clicking and choosing Validate in the shortcut menu If it is damaged all the backup chain will be useless When it is not damaged proceed to validating incremental backup versions starting from the oldest until you find the culprit All incremental backup versions made after the corr
292. rdware hard drive is found and Windows needs to reboot After making sure that the system operates normally restore the original boot order 4 6 Recovering data from file level backups You will usually start recovering files and folders from Acronis Backup Explorer When recovering a specific file version you will start recovery from the View Versions window In either case starting recovery opens the File Recovery window Let s consider recovery of files and folders from the Backup Explorer 1 Select in the Backup Explorer the files and folders you want to recover For more information on selection in the Backup Explorer see Files and folders tab p 28 Click Recover to start recovery This will open the File Recovery window File Recovery gt 2 Where to recover your files Choose recovery destination for the selected 48 files and 27 folders Original location New location File recovery options Cancel 2 Select a destination on your computer to where you want to recover selected files folders You can recover data to its original location or choose a new one if necessary To choose a new location click the Browse button 3 When you choose a new location the selected items will be recovered by default without recovering the original absolute path You may also wish to recover the items with their entire folder hierarchy In this case select the Recover absolute path check box 4 When needed
293. re Zone an icon appears under My Computer in the Other section Double clicking on the Acronis Secure Zone icon opens the Secure Zone and you can view all the backups it contains You can also open the Secure Zone by right clicking on its icon and choosing Open in the shortcut menu Double clicking on a backup icon shows all backup versions full incremental differential contained in that backup Right clicking on a specific backup version opens the shortcut menu allowing you to choose a desired operation For example you can choose explore mount for image backups recover validate update remove the backup and view the backup s details If Acronis Secure Zone is password protected any operation except viewing backup details will require entering the password Double clicking on a backup will open the backup The shortcut menu that appears after right clicking on the Acronis Secure Zone icon has two more items Open and Create Shortcut for placing it on the Desktop The Acronis Secure Zone is available as a location to store backup files as long as it has free space If there is not enough space older backups will be deleted to create free space True Image 2013 uses the following approach to clean up the Acronis Secure Zone If you are in the process of creating a backup and there is not enough free space in the zone to create it the program will display a dialog which warns you that the Acronis Secure Zone is full You can c
294. reen The Help menu contains the following items Help opens the program s Help Generate system report click to generate an Acronis system report for sending to Acronis Customer support Customer support takes you to Acronis Customer support Web page Check for updates click to check for True Image 2013 updates you can also disable or enable automatic checking for updates by selecting or clearing the Automatically check for updates at startup check box Activate click to activate the product Change serial number click to change the serial number of the product Upgrade to full version click to buy the full version of the product if you are using the trial version Acronis Web site takes you to the Acronis Web site About True Image shows information about True Image 2013 including the product s serial number and build number 1 1 9 11 Installing Acronis Hotfixes What is an Acronis Hotfix Acronis Hotfix is a small update for Acronis products It makes changes to one or more application files or registry keys but does not change an application version A hotfix targets only a specific True Image 2013 build and cannot be applied to any other build Acronis Hotfixes are distributed through Acronis Knowledge Base articles which describe the problem to be fixed in detail Each article can be accessed through SER or directly by searching Acronis Knowledge Base Advantages of installing Acronis Hot
295. reinstall and reconfigure all of your software True Image 2013 does not provide for cloning a single partition You can only clone the entire drive You can also transfer all the information from your hard disk drive to another one by backing up the entire old hard disk and then recovering the backup to the new disk Backup file format True Image 2013 usually saves backup data in the proprietary tib format using compression This reduces the amount of needed storage space When creating a tib file the program calculates checksum values for data blocks and adds these values to the data being backed up These checksum values allow for the verification of data integrity The data from tib file backups can be recovered only through the True Image 2013 program This may be done in Windows or in the recovery environment However True Image 2013 is also able to save data in the well known zip format This allows you to retrieve files from backups anywhere without using True Image 2013 The most widely used operating systems Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X have built in support for the zip file format Acronis Nonstop Backup uses a special hidden storage for data and metadata The backed up data is compressed and split into files of about 1 GB These files also have a proprietary format and the data they contain can be recovered only with the help of True Image 2013 Backup validation The backup validation feature allows you to confirm tha
296. require your action The backup is suspended until you take a desired action and this makes unattended backups impossible The dialog opens even when the Do not show messages and dialogs while processing silent mode setting is enabled So it is advisable to select the When not enough space in ASZ delete the oldest backup check box when planning unattended scheduled backups to the Acronis Secure Zone Repeat attempt if a backup fails This option allows you to automatically repeat a backup attempt if the backup fails for some reason You can configure this option by specifying two settings number of attempts and time interval between attempts According to these settings True Image 2013 will try to back up your data until the backup is successfully created But if the error interrupting the backup persists then the backup will not be created 3 13 15 Computer shutdown If you know that the backup process you are configuring may take a long time you may select the Shut down the computer after the backup is complete check box In this case you will not have to wait until the operation completion The program will perform the backup and turn off your computer automatically This option is also useful when you schedule your backups For example you may want to perform backups every weekday in the evening to save all your work Schedule the backup and select the check box After that you may leave your computer when you finish your work knowing t
297. results will be available at the top of the wizard window lt System Clean up ce t Sa Scan is completed 135 items found Below is a detailed list of the found items 4 ws System Clean up PAR System Components a System Clean up B Recycle Bin Cleans all your Windows activity traces and securely v a Temporary file wipes hard disk free space Wl Hard Disk Free Space V X Recently Used Documents List vE Windows Run List VIE Opened Saved Files History v g User Credentials v Windows Prefetch Directory Please press the Clean up button to continue Click here if you want to change the clean up settings before proceeding You can view the search results and manually select the items you wish to remove If you want to change the default system clean up settings click the corresponding link in the first window of the System Clean up wizard Click Clean up to launch removing the found items 8 8 3 1 Clean up settings In the clean up settings window you can change the clean up settings for every system component Some of these settings apply to all components To change the clean up settings for a component Expand the System Components item in the tree and select the component clean up settings which you need to change You can enable or disable scanning of the component by the Clean up wizard To do this select or clear the Enable check box If required you can also exp
298. revious versions Recover 3 Select the version to which you want to rollback The version s exact date and time will be displayed Your current version will be reverted to the state it was at that point in time Click Recover to proceed The selected version will become the latest version on Acronis Cloud After the process finishes refresh the Files page in your Web browser Select the file once more and then click Download to download the selected version to your Downloads folder 6 7 Removing data from Acronis Cloud Because the available space on Acronis Cloud is limited you need to manage your Cloud space by cleaning up the obsolete data or the data you do not need anymore Cleanup can be done in a variety of ways The most drastic one is deleting the entire backup from a computer on Acronis Cloud To remove the backup click the gear icon in the box of the online backup to open the Operations menu and select Delete then click Yes in the confirmation window The Online backup options provide for automatic cleanup of Acronis Cloud You can specify deletion of files that have been kept longer than the specified number of months or days In addition you can set the maximum number of file versions to be kept on Acronis Cloud You can accept the default settings for those options or set the values you need For more information see Acronis Cloud cleanup p 131 You can also manage Acronis Cloud by deleting individual files and folders
299. rimary align 1024 active format fs ntfs quick exit exit Shut down the computer and then boot to Acronis rescue media Validate the backup to make sure that it can be used for recovery Click the Recovery tab and then click Disk recovery Select the backup of your SSD at the Archive selection step and then click Next If the disks have different disk letters in Windows and the recovery environment click Browse and show the path to the backup Select Recover whole disks and partitions and click Next Select the check box of the entire SSD disk and click Next Select the SSD as the destination and click Next When the confirmation window appears stating that the destination disk contains partitions perhaps containing useful data click OK Carefully read the summary of operations to check the settings you made and click Proceed After the recovery finishes check the partition offset once more to make sure it is fixed 7 5 5 Migrating to an SSD using the backup and recovery method You can use the following procedure for all supported operating systems First let s consider a simple case your system disk consists of a single partition Note that for Windows 7 the system disk usually has a hidden System Reserved partition 1 2 Start True Image 2013 and click the Backup and recovery tab Click Disk and partition backup and then back up your system disk in the disk backup mode to a hard disk other than your system hard
300. rms data recovery in the same way as with ordinary bootable media Limitations cannot be organized on a dynamic disk requires manual configuration of boot loaders such as LILO and GRUB requires re activation of third party loaders B Backup 1 The same as Backup operation p 238 2 A set of backup versions created and managed by using backup settings A backup can contain multiple backup versions created using full p 239 and incremental p 240 backup methods Backup versions belonging to the same backup are usually stored in the same location Backup operation An operation that creates a copy of the data that exists on a machine s hard disk for the purpose of recovering or reverting the data to a specified date and time Backup settings A set of rules configured by a user when creating a new backup The rules control the backup process Later you can edit the backup settings to change or optimize the backup process Backup version The result of a single backup operation p 238 Physically it is a file or a set of files that contains a copy of the backed up data as of a specific date and time Backup version files created by True Image 2013 have a TIB extension The TIB files resulting from consolidation p 239 of backup versions are also called backup versions Backup version chain Sequence of minimum 2 backup versions p 238 that consist of the first full backup version and the subsequent one
301. rocedure It generates a system report containing all the necessary technical information and allows you to save the information to file When it s necessary you can attach the created file to your problem description and send it to Acronis support team This will simplify and speed up the search for a solution To generate a system report On the main program window click the question mark symbol and select Generate system report or Press CTRL F7 Note that you can use the key combination even when True Image 2013 is performing any other operation After the report is generated To save the generated system report to file click Save and in the opened window specify a location for the created file To save the report to file and send it to Acronis support team by e mail click Save and send To exit to the main program window without saving the report click Cancel You can place the tool on your bootable rescue media as a separate component to be able to generate a system report when your computer cannot boot After you boot from the media you will be able to generate the report even without running True Image 2013 In this case you should plug in a USB flash drive before clicking the Acronis System Report icon The generated report will be saved on the USB flash drive To place the Acronis System Report tool on a bootable rescue media Select the Acronis System Report check box on the Rescue Media Content Selection pag
302. rogram itself You can create public links through the Acronis shortcut menu in Windows Explorer What is more you can create public links to any file or folder and not only to those which are included in syncs If you create a public link to a file for which you do not store versions on Acronis Cloud this file is uploaded to the storage into the default sync To create a public link to a folder 1 In Windows Explorer find a folder to which you want to create a public link un un Al Open in new window nloads Favorites Links Documents Share with Restore previous versions Include in library gt True Image P Back up to BitDefender Business Client a Recover Syncwith gt Send to gt Share Cut Publish Email link e SN Copy link Create shortcut Delete Rename Properties 2 Right click the folder point to True Image gt Publish and then select one of the following Email link select this item if you want to send the created link in an email message Copy link select this item if you want to copy the link into the Clipboard for example to paste it on a forum This item is available for all files and folders Public links to files you keep on Acronis Cloud always lead to the latest versions 5 14 How to unlink a device from your account Sometimes you may need to unlink one of your computers or mobile devices from your account For example when a computer fails or
303. ronis Secure Zone Wizard Required steps Su mmary V Space allocation V Si Location Disk 3 age Size 8 053 GB Password None The current disk state ul ao 16GB New Volume E U i 16 00 GB NTFS After ie wyr 16GB New Volume E ACRONIS SZ 7 945 GB NTFS 8 053 GB NTFS D Primary Logical Dynamic Acronis Secure Zone __ Unallocated Unsupported Options Proceed Cancel Click the Proceed button to start the listed operations Click the Options button if you want to protect Acronis Secure Zone with a password Click the Cancel button to exit the wizard without performing any operations 8 5 Cloning a hard disk In this section General information cccsccscscccssecesssecesssecsseeessueeseeessseeessuresssaeesseeeees 189 E LOLOT Ao VEA EE TE T A E E E 189 Selecting clone Mode as sinccicssierciss seegcadssctecidssannesaesacedisseareanvsntecttaseneavsace 190 Selecting a source disk cecccesssececeesteeeceesneeeceeceeeceeceeecssqeeeeeeeueeeeseas 191 Selecting a destination diSk essssssessseessssrrsssserssrsrrssrrrssrrnssseerssrrnnse 192 188 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 Move Method cccccccccccccccescccccccueeseeeecccceeccuseaueessceeeeseueeaueeceeeeeseuaueaeeeees 192 Datta MISFAtIOM i22 acs ssccessesewtaye a a E aE 193 Manual partitioning cccccccccccesessssssceceeecsssessaeeeeeessessseeaeeeseesseeees
304. rue Image 2013 on the computer where the shared folder resides If you disconnect the removable device or NAS the sync pauses It resumes when you reattach the device After the sync is created you can add to it another computer or Acronis Cloud Hint If you want your USB drive to have a regularly updated copy of a local folder create an empty folder on the USB drive in advance and select it afterwards as the sync folder Hint Keep your USB drive attached while working with the sync folder on your computer Firstly you will not forget to sync your files at the end of your work Secondly True Image 2013 will process data changes gradually and quickly 5 7 3 How to sync data with other people You can sync data between computers which belong to different Acronis accounts For example sync with your colleague who is working on the same project Steps to perform on a computer that will own the sync Only the sync owner can change settings of the sync invite other users delete the sync etc 1 Start True Image 2013 and then click New sync 2 Inthe opened window browse to the folder to synchronize and then click Select folder Select Folder Ovu ls Users gt tester gt Test Project gt Search Projec Organize v New folder Bz v a NetHood a Name Date modified a PrintHood EL Recent B Saved Games P Searches a SendTo a Start Menu M Templates 4 B Test d Project J Windows 23 C
305. rue Image 2013 will try to connect to the Acronis Activation Server every hour without the user interaction Activate from another computer you can activate the program manually from another machine that is connected to the Internet see below Activation from another computer If your computer is not connected to the Internet you may activate True Image 2013 by using another computer which has connection to the Internet To activate the product from another computer 1 Install and start True Image 2013 2 Onthe main program screen click Activate now on the information bar 3 Inthe opened window select Activate from another computer 4 Inthe True Image 2013 Activation window perform 3 simple steps 1 Save your installation code to a file by clicking the Save to file button and specify a removable media as the file location for example a USB flash drive You may also simply write down this code on a piece of paper 2 On another computer which has the Internet connection go to http www acronis com activation The instructions on the screen will help you to get your activation code by using the installation code Save the obtained activation code to a file ona removable media or write it down on paper 3 On your computer click the Load from file button and specify a path to the file with the activation code or simply type it into the box from the piece of paper 5 Click Activate Moving license between computers
306. s step then create the media as usual 7 4 Testing that your backups can be used for recovery Here are some recommendations 1 Even if you start recovery of the active partition in Windows the program will reboot into the Linux environment after the recovery process starts This is because Windows cannot be left running during the recovery of its own partition So you will recover your active partition under the recovery environment in all cases If you have a spare hard drive we strongly recommend you to try a test recovery to this hard drive It should be done after booting from the rescue media which uses Linux If you do not have a spare drive please at least validate the image in the recovery environment A backup that can be read during validation in Windows may not always be readable under Linux environment When you use the True Image 2013 rescue media it creates disk drive letters that might differ from the way Windows identifies drives For example the D disk identified in the standalone True Image 2013 might correspond to the E disk in Windows It is advisable to assign unique names labels to all partitions on your hard drives This will make finding the disk containing your backups easier 2 Users of the Enterprise and Ultimate editions of Windows 7 can test whether they will be able to boot from the recovered system partition True Image 2013 allows booting from a tib file containing a system partition image S
307. s 8 True Image 2013 basic CONCEPHS csscceceessececeeseeeeceeseeeceesneeeeeesneeeeeees 8 New in True Image 2013 by Acronis ccccssccccesssceceesneeeesssteeeeeesneeeeneas 10 FAQ about backup recovery and CIONING cccssccccessseeeesssteeeeessneeeesees 11 System requirements and supported media ccessceceestecesessteeeeeeaaes 12 True Image 2013 installation ccccccesscecccecesssssaeeeeeeesessesnsaeeeeeesseesees 15 True Image 2013 activation eee ee cssecececeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeas 16 Program WOIKSPACO neimite iinei desadocccertuevedssaatiacectecvesssane 18 1 1 1 What is True Image 2013 by Acronis True Image 2013 by Acronis is an integrated software suite that ensures the security of all of the information on your PC It can back up the operating system applications settings and all of your data while also securely destroying any confidential data you no longer need With this software you can back up selected files and folders settings and messages of Microsoft e mail clients or even the entire disk drive or selected partitions Online backup will allow you to store your most important files on a remote storage Your data will be protected even if your computer is lost stolen or destroyed Acronis Nonstop Backup continuously saves changes in your system and files as often as every five minutes so you can rollback easily to any point in time if needed True Image 2013 pr
308. s Hotfixes are installed click Close and run True Image button to start the product 2 Howto Due to the size of this User s Guide it is sometimes not so easy to find how to perform a particular task This section lists some frequently used tasks and provides links to the appropriate parts of the User s Guide Click the corresponding page number or the link if you are viewing the Help if you need information on how to protect your entire system from a disaster p 138 recover your system when your computer refuses to boot p 78 back up your photos finance documents music home video p 44 recover your photos finance documents music etc p 94 continuously protect your daily work p 50 back up your e mail p 47 recover your e mail p 94 synchronize the contents of your folder with a folder on a computer of your relative or friend p 116 synchronize two local folders p 115 share your folder with other people p 122 create public links to your files and folders p 123 subscribe to Acronis Cloud service p 127 back up your data to Acronis Cloud p 128 recover your data from Acronis Cloud p 135 clone your disk drive p 188 automatically refresh your backups Backup schemes p 60 or Scheduling p 157 create a bootable rescue media p 169 create a bootable USB flash drive p 174 make sure that your rescue media can be used when needed p 142 try some changes to your system with
309. s XP the wizard will not have the Initialization options step because this operating system does not support GPT disks In this section Selecting a Nard disk y2 lt sascecceccctesvacaceectvencdexctcucersbackedecedacetvenctesacteewaces 196 Selecting initialization method ccccccccessesssseceeececessessceeeeeeeeessessaeees 198 Creating NEW PartitiONs ccccccccccccccccccccececeeecececeeeeeeeseeeseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeess 198 Add new disk SUMMALY cccccccecessssssssecececeeseseensaeeeeeceseesesnsaeeeeeesseeeees 201 8 6 1 Selecting a hard disk Select the disk that you have added to the computer If you have added several disks select one of them and click Next to continue You can add the other disks later by restarting the Add New Disk Wizard If there are any partitions on the new disk they must be deleted first If the added disk contains partitions True Image 2013 will warn you by displaying the warning message Click OK to delete the existing partitions on the added disk gt Add New Disk Wizard Required steps Select your hard disk from the list below Disk selection Drive Capacity Model Interface J Disk 1 200 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 SCSI Disk 2 Dynamic 200 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 SCSI L Disk 3 Dynamic 200 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 scl tual 1 0 SCSI 16 GB VMware VMware Virtual S 1 0 200 Gp Unallocated 200 0 GB D Primary Lo
310. s and allows you to recover your data to the state it was in at a certain date and time The squares that represent backup versions have colored stripes at the bottom The color of the stripes depends on the backup types violet for disk backups turquoise for file backups green for Nonstop Backup and brown for other backups e g created by a previous Acronis True Image Home version The picture below shows various states of a time line The states vary depending on the number of backups and the time interval through which you are navigating Event in the system Now block Indicates a software This w eek b lock Today block collapsed and installations and Contains versions for he Contains versions for the ded i current week till today es 4 expanded software updates is week SERIES JAE aaa current day til the last hour Contains versions for the last hour 9 52 10 02 10 13 10 18 10 23 TeL E Older This month block The selected Collapsed block Contains several versions Contains versions forthe backup version Click to view all the versions for the day click to view current month till the next that the block contains block The Now interval shows backup versions created during the last hour When using Nonstop Backup backup versions may be created as often as every five minutes The Today interval shows backup versions created from the beginning of the current day
311. s and extensions doc to clean all files with a specific extension Microsoft document files in this case read to clean all files with any extensions and names beginning with read read to clean all files having five letter names and any extensions names beginning with read the fifth letter is random The last search string for example will result in the removal of read1 txt ready doc files but readyness txt will remain with its longer name excluding the extension You can enter several different search strings separated by semicolons for example bak tmp without spaces between the search strings All files with names corresponding to at least one of the search strings will be cleaned Upon entering the Files setting value you can browse the files matching the search strings To do this click Show Files You will see a window with the names of the found files These files will be cleaned Drive free space Here you can manually specify physical and or logical drives to clean up free space on By default System Clean up cleans up free space on all available drives If you want to change the settings of this parameter you can use the Remove button to delete from the list the drives you don t need to clean free space on If you wish to add these drives to the list again use the Add button qd System Clean up You can view and change the current settings for the selected item
312. s appear in the window below 3 5 2 Support for Zip format If you use the zip format instead of the tib format you will be able to retrieve files from backups anywhere without True Image 2013 For example you can back up files to a USB stick at the office and retrieve those backed up files on your notebook at home without installing True Image 2013 This is true because the most widely used operating systems Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X have built in support of the zip file format Please note that built in support of zip files in Windows does not cover operations with multivolume zip archives and zip backups exceeding 4GB in size or which contain files of more than 4GB each So if file size of your zip backup exceeds 4GB you will not be able to recover files from that backup without using True Image 2013 The Zip format is available when backing up files folders or when making reserve copies of your backups True Image 2013 gives the zip format most of the functionality available for the tib format You can schedule backups validate zip backups recover files and folders from zip backups make incremental and differential backups etc However it does not provide password protection and encryption True Image 2013 can recover and validate only its own zip backups If a zip archive was created by a file archiver program it cannot be recovered and validated by True Image 2013 3 6 Backing up e mail True Image 201
313. s disk image tib file to a vhd virtual disk 1 Click Acronis backup conversion on the Tools and utilities tab A n tekae Q Convert to Windows Backup Required steps Select an Acronis backup Archive selection Be Details Archive location Name Created Com Rating Method Path Images a a B Partition D 3 Partition_D 7 1 2011 5 43 59 PM WwW Full backup E Myk Ei My_system My_system 7 1 2011 6 32 37 PM AA k k Fullbackup D My m r Path D My backups My_system tib Browse Next gt Cancel 2 Select the disk image to convert If the backup is password protected True Image 2013 will ask for it Note that the resulting vhd file will lose password protection Converting an incremental backup requires all the previous incremental backups and the original full backup Converting a differential backup requires the original full backup The result of conversion is always a full backup 3 Specify the path to the file to be created The converted file will be saved to the default location but you can select another one by clicking Browse The file can be directed to any local storage supported by True Image 2013 except the Acronis Secure Zone and CD DVD In addition it can be directed to an SMB share 4 Click Proceed in the Summary window When a tib image selected for conversion contains partitions for example from two physical hard disk drives the program will
314. s may have different type of file system You can either leave the partition unformatted or choose between the following file system types NTFS is a Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 native file system Choose it if you use these operating systems Note that Windows 95 98 Me and DOS cannot access NTFS partitions FAT 32 is an improved 32 bit version of the FAT file system that supports volumes up to 2 TB FAT 16 is a DOS native file system Most operating systems recognize it However if your disk drive is more than 4 GB it is not possible to format it in FAT16 Ext2 is a Linux native file system It is fast enough but it is not a journaling file system Ext3 officially introduced with Red hat Linux version 7 2 Ext3 is a Linux journaling file system It is forwards and backwards compatible with Linux Ext2 It has multiple journaling modes as well as broad cross platform compatibility in both 32 bit and 64 bit architectures Ext4 is a new Linux file system It has improvements in comparison to ext3 It is fully backward compatible with ext2 and ext 3 However ext3 has only partial forward compatibility with ext4 ReiserFS is a journaling file system for Linux Generally it is more reliable and faster than Ext2 Choose it for your Linux data partition Linux Swap is a swap partition for Linux Choose it if you want to add more swap space using Linux Partition letter Select a l
315. s not support Unicode characters in the items backed up using the E mail backup type To back up your E mail 1 On the Backup and recovery tab click Other backups and then select Mail backup This will open the E mail Backup window 2 Select the mail items you want to back up in the What to back up area The right side will show the item contents with all subitems selected There you can unselect the subitems you do not need to back up if any 3 Select a destination for backup you can leave the default destination or browse for a destination after clicking the down arrow to the right of the current destination and selecting Browse 4 The program will assign a default name to the backup but if you would like to assign another name type the name in the Backup name field 5 Click the Back up now button if you want to run backup immediately You can also delay the start of backup for up to 6 hours by clicking the down arrow to the right of this button and selecting a delay interval from the dropdown list Note that you will have to specify your Windows account name and password This is done for confidentiality reasons See details in Windows account p 71 When you need to change the default backup options click E mail backup options and set the options as required You can also change the default backup scheme by clicking on the appropriate link For more information see Backup schemes p 60 If you want to run the backup
316. s support of USB PC Card formerly PCMCIA and SCSI interfaces along with the storage devices connected via them and therefore is strongly recommended Acronis System Report the component allows you to generate a system report that is used for collecting information about your system in case of any program problem Report generation will be available before you start True Image 2013 from the bootable media The generated system report can be saved to a USB flash drive r Acronis Media Builder Rescue media contents selection 4 True Image gt True Image Y True Image JII Acronis Systern Report Version 16 0 3082 Language English Start automatically after ig Space required 273 2 MB Help lt Back Next gt Cancel To select a component Select the check box of the program you want to include into the bootable media The bottom field displays the space required for the selected components If you have other Acronis products installed on your computer you can also include standalone versions of these programs into the same bootable media If automatic start of the program is necessary select the Starts automatically after check box The Start automatically after parameter specifies the timeout interval for the boot menu If this parameter is not specified the program will display the boot menu and wait for you to select whether to boot the
317. saeeeeeesseeseceaeeeeeeeseeseaaees 123 5 15 How to revoke an invitation to Share a SYNC cccccecsssessssececeeeceesesssaeeeeeesseeseceaeeeesenseeseaeas 124 5 16 HOW t leavea SVN meene ae sak cede e iaa ae a aaea a aaea octandsesdebtantedtvs jute Kanea 125 Using online Dackupiinsscedcsccveccccesiiecs svssticesesasecdsuaSedeaceshivcsoessds de onsaieccsedVedcasesVeecesuasts Ceonsasecsous 127 6 1 Whats Acronis Cloud i tciccscteicveccrcteienckdiesah dete aiai rE een aa aA OEE AS i AANE eaa Rakai 127 6 2 SUDSCriptiON INFOFMATION 0 0 0 ennerien eaa pre anie a Eae as aeiia 127 6 3 Backing up to Acronis Cloud cccccsesccececeseessaeceeeeecesseeaaeseeeescesseauaeseseesseeseaeaeeeesesseeseaaeas 128 6 4 Managing online back DS eeren ranea aaan aiarren e pana anaa ata aKa ranie ae taa a eaae aoaaa Ea Kia aE 129 6 5 Online Backup Opti N Siessen aeeoeia aeea sede ia aaaea n vaeantcbanie Eaa aaa Sees vate cs 130 6 5 1 Acronis Cloud connection attempts ccccccscsscsssscsscsscssesecsecsecsssssssessesesseesesssssessseaceeseeesessessesaesaeeesenees 130 6 5 2 Acronis Cloud cleanup arwsrer e nnne a e a olvedlewtinvabiliouaedve 131 6 5 3 Encryption key 6 5 4 Windows account for Online backup 6 5 5 Operation priority arar nnr eninin den cule EEN EE CEEE akc ENEA AREE aS Ea suid FEES aan Ea AEEA EA AEA 6 5 6 Network connection speed limMit s ssssssssssesesssssreresesisesrnsasasisrsrsrsrsrarenenesesrsrarasasisrsrsrsrsre
318. se the Acronis Cloud service for safeguarding your most important files by saving them to a secure remote location Because files are stored on a remote storage they are protected even if your computer gets stolen So the risk of data loss as a result of fire theft or other natural disasters is practically eliminated If something happens to your backup image PC or external storage device you can get your most important files back 7 2 1 FTP connection True Image 2013 allows you to store your backups on FTP servers To create a new FTP connection when selecting a backup storage click New FTP connection and in the opened window provide Path to the FTP server for example my server com Port User name Password To check your settings click the Test connection button The computer will try to connect to the specified FTP server If the test connection has been established click the Connect button to add the FTP connection The created FTP connection will appear in the folder tree Select the connection and browse for the backup storage that you want to use Please be aware that the mere opening of an FTP server s root folder does not bring you to your home directory For data to be recovered directly from an FTP server the backup must consist of files no greater than 2GB each Because of this True Image 2013 splits a backup into files with a size of 2GB when backing up directly to an FTP server If you back up t
319. select At set the operation s start time Enter hours and minutes manually or set the desired start time using the up and down buttons You can specify several start times by clicking Add If you select Every choose daily operation periodicity from the dropdown list for example every 2 hours Description of the Advanced settings see in Scheduling p 157 7 7 2 Weekly execution parameters You can set up the following parameters for weekly operation execution Week days Select the days on which to execute the operation by clicking on their names Start time Set the operation s start time Enter hours and minutes manually or set the desired start time using the up and down buttons Description of the Advanced settings see in Scheduling p 157 7 7 3 Monthly execution parameters You can set up the following parameters for monthly operation execution Periodicity or dates f you select Every choose a numeral and the day of the week from the dropdown lists example First Monday the operation will be performed on the first Monday of every month If you select On choose the date s for operation execution example you may want the operation to be run on the 10th 20th and last day of the month Start time Set the operation s start time Enter hours and minutes manually or set the desired start time using the up and down buttons Description of the Advanced settings see in Scheduling p 157 7 7 4
320. set the options for the recovery process recovery process priority file level security settings etc To set the options click the File recovery options link The options you set here will be applied only to the current recovery operation To start the recovery process click the Recover now button The recovery progress will be shown in a special window You can stop the recovery by clicking Cancel Please keep in mind that the aborted recovery may still cause changes in the destination folder How to recover mail application settings and system state This refers to recovering data from your E mail backups Application settings and system state can be recovered only from old backups created by an earlier Acronis True Image Home version for instance Acronis True Image Home 2010 Let s see how you can recover data from e mail application settings and system state backups 1 Select a required backup version in the Acronis Backup Explorer and click Recover to start recovery This will open the File Recovery window r File Recovery L Where to recover your files x The system state files will be recovered to the original location Recovery options d Recover now Cancel 2 Such data can only be recovered to the original location Therefore you can only change the recovery options To change the recovery options click the Recovery options link The options you set here will be applied only to the current recovery
321. settings Tosend a notification concerning process completion select the Send notification upon operation s successful completion check box Tosend a notification concerning process failure select the Send notification upon operation failure check box To send a notification with operation messages select the Send notification when user interaction is required check box To send a notification with full log of operations select the Add full log to the notification check box 3 13 20 Excluding items from backup If you want to exclude unnecessary files from a backup specify the appropriate file types on the Exclusions tab of the backup options You can specify exclusions for Disk and partitions backup File Backup or Online Backup How to use the default exclusion settings After you have installed the application all the exclusion settings are set to the initial values You can change them for your current backup operation only or for all backups that will be created in future Select the Save as default check box to apply the modified settings to all further backup operations by default If you want to reset all the modified settings to the values that they were originally set to when the product was installed click the Reset to initial settings button Disk Backup Options anm Backup scheme Advanced Performance Notifications Exclusions Hidden files m files V Files matching the following criteria e exte
322. single up to date full backup version Required storage space minimal 3 13 3 Version chain scheme This backup scheme differs for disk backup and file backup types Disk backup version chain At first the program creates the 1st full backup version The version will be kept until you delete it manually After that according to the specified schedule or when you run backup manually the program creates 1 full and 5 differential backup versions then again 1 full and 5 differential backup versions and so on The versions will be stored for 6 months After the period the program analyzes if the oldest backup versions except the 1st full version may be deleted It depends on the minimum number of versions eight and version chains consistency The program deletes the oldest versions one by one after creating new versions with the same backup method for example the oldest differential version will be deleted after creation of the newest differential version First of all the oldest differential versions will be deleted then the oldest full version Backup scheduler setting monthly Result you have monthly backup versions for the last 6 months plus the initial full backup version that may be kept for a longer period Required storage space depends on the number of versions and their sizes File backup version chain According to the specified schedule or when you run backup manually the program creates 1 full and 6 incremental ba
323. sk with an assigned drive letter its own file system etc Even if you do not intend to divide your hard disk into logical divisions it must be partitioned so that the operating system knows that it is intended to be left in one piece Initially all disk space will be unallocated This will change after you add new partitions To create a new partition Select the unallocated space and click Create new partition in the upper part of the window or right click on the unallocated space and select Create new partition in the shortcut menu Specify the following settings for the partition being created the size of the new partition file system of the new partition partition type available only for MBR disks 198 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 partition letter and label Add New Disk Wizard Required steps Create partitions ud gt Partition creation on at Please specify settings for the partition being created 15 a U Size Min 3 MB C 4 Partition D 200 GB NTFS Minimal space E Free space Unallocated space Partition size jz00 GB Free space before 1 MB Free space after 0 gt MB File system Partition letter Partition label NTFS X D X Select the type of partition Primary Mark the partition as active oO q Logical If you allocate all unallocated space on the disk to the new partition the Create new partition button disappe
324. so the wizard shows this information in a different way 8 8 3 5 Clean up progress The operation status window reports about the state of the current operation The progress bar indicates the level of completion of the selected operation In some cases the operation may take a long time to be completed If this is the case select the Shutdown the computer after completion check box When the operation finishes True Image 2013 will turn the computer off 8 8 4 Hard Disk Wiping methods Information removed from a hard disk drive by non secure means for example by simple Windows delete can easily be recovered Utilizing specialized equipment it is possible to recover even repeatedly overwritten information Therefore guaranteed data wiping is more important now than ever before The guaranteed wiping of information from magnetic media e g a hard disk drive means it is impossible to recover data by even a qualified specialist with the help of all known tools and recovery methods This problem can be explained in the following way Data is stored on a hard disk as a binary sequence of 1 and 0 ones and zeros represented by differently magnetized parts of a disk Generally speaking a 1 written to a hard disk is read as 1 by its controller and 0 is read as 0 However if you write 1 over 0 the result is conditionally 0 95 and vice versa if 1 is written over 1 the result is 1 05 These differences are irrelevant for the contro
325. ss Use the sidebar on the left to navigate through the wizard s steps for revision To cancel operation and quit Acronis Media Builder click Cancel After you create a boot disc mark it and keep it in a safe place Please keep in mind that the backups created by the later program version may be incompatible with the previous program versions Due to this reason we strongly recommend that you create a new bootable media after each True Image 2013 upgrade One more thing you should remember when booting from the rescue media and using a standalone version of True Image 2013 you cannot recover files and folders encrypted with use of the encryption feature available in Windows XP and later operating systems For more information see File level security settings for backup p 71 On the other hand backups encrypted using the True Image 2013 encryption feature can be recovered 8 2 1 6 Howto create a bootable USB flash drive You can create a bootable USB flash drive containing astandalone True Image 2013 This may be handy for example if your notebook does not have an internal CD DVD drive You will need a USB flash drive with a capacity of 256 MB or more The drive must be formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 file system To create a bootable USB flash drive attach the drive to a USB port Start Media Builder and then select the drive as the destination for the rescue media creation Then follow the Media Builder wizard steps For more informa
326. stop Backup The right side shows the item contents with all the files and subfolders selected There you can unselect the files you do not need to protect If you need to protect more items just continue selecting items on the directory tree in the same way Select a destination for nonstop backup you can leave the default destination or browse for a destination after clicking on the current destination Select a suitable destination from the dropdown list For more information on selecting and managing Nonstop Backup storage see Acronis Nonstop Backup data storage p 52 The Nonstop Backup will get a default name but if you would like to assign another name type the name in the Backup name field Click the Start now button to start protecting the selected data immediately Nonstop Backup and Try amp Decide cannot work simultaneously If you click the Start now button when the Try mode is turned on the program will display a message that Nonstop Backup cannot start while you are working in the Try mode To start Nonstop Backup you will need to finish the current Try amp Decide session You can change the Nonstop Backup settings any time To do so click the gear icon in the Nonstop Backup box and then select Edit settings in the Operations menu Save the edited Nonstop Backup settings by clicking the Save button and Nonstop Backup will immediately start working with the new settings If you have changed the Nonstop Backup destination
327. stop Backup sometimes cause a high CPU load This is the expected behavior of Acronis Nonstop Backup This may happen on restart of a paused Acronis Nonstop Backup if a considerable amount of protected data has been modified during the pause For example if you manually pause the Acronis Nonstop Backup that you use for protecting your system partition and then install a new application When you restart Acronis Nonstop Backup it loads the CPU for some time However the process afcdpsrv exe then goes back to normal This happens because Acronis Nonstop Backup needs to check the backed up data against the data that have been modified during the pause to ensure protection continuity If there was a considerable amount of data modified the process may load CPU for some time After the check is done and all the modified data is backed up Acronis Nonstop Backup goes back to normal Can have Acronis Nonstop Backup storage on an FAT32 partition of a local hard disk No only an NTFS partition can be used as the storage This limitation is due to the fact that Acronis Nonstop Backup needs the sparse file attribute to function for example to perform autoconsolidation The sparse file attribute was introduced in NTFS Can set up Acronis Nonstop Backup storage on a network share or NAS Yes Acronis Nonstop Backup supports network shares mapped drives NAS and other network attached devices with one limitation they must use the SMB protocol
328. supported If you need to resize a dynamic volume during recovery it should be recovered to a basic disk When performing a so called bare metal recovery of dynamic volume s to a new unformatted disk the recovered volumes become basic If you want the recovered volumes to remain dynamic the target disk s should be prepared as dynamic partitioned and formatted This can be done using third party tools for example Windows Disk Management snap in 2 The target disk s partition style after recovery It depends on whether your computer supports UEFI and on whether your system is BIOS booted or UEFI booted See the following table My system is BIOS booted Windows or My system is UEFI booted Windows or Acronis Bootable Media Acronis Bootable Media The operation will not affect neither After operation completion the My source disk is MBR partition layout nor bootability of partition style will remain MBR but and my OS does not the disk partition style will remain the operating system will fail booting support UEFI MBR the destination disk will be from UEFI since your operating bootable in BIOS system does not support it The operation will not affect neither The destination partition will be partition layout nor bootability of converted to GPT style that will make the disk partition style will remain the destination disk bootable in UEFI MBR the destination disk will be bootable in BIOS My source disk is MBR a
329. synchronize with your another computer This item is only present for syncs between local folders Cleanup options allows you to set automatic cleanup rules for versions of the synced files View log opens the log of True Image 2013 operations Remove deletes the sync Deleting the sync does not delete the synced folder and its contents However this action deletes on Acronis Cloud all versions of the synced files if they were kept there including the latest ones If you delete or rename the folder selected for synchronization True Image 2013 excludes your computer from that sync If you delete a subfolder inside the folder you have specified for synchronization this subfolder will be deleted on all other computers as well Taskbar notification area icon When at least one Sync is active the corresponding icon appears in the Windows taskbar notification area Right clicking the icon opens the shortcut menu with the following items Open True Image 2013 opens the program s main window with the Synchronization tab selected Open sync folder if you have a single sync choosing this item opens the synchronized folder If you have more than one sync this opens a submenu where you can select the desired sync folder Pause all syncs pauses all synchronization processes Resume all syncs restarts all synchronization processes if they have been paused Show notifications toggles the display of notifications at
330. system was originally backed up 4 3 Recovering partitions protected with Acronis Nonstop Backup You can recover partitions protected by Acronis Nonstop Backup as follows Let s first recover a data partition in Windows 1 Start True Image 2013 Click Explore and recover in the Nonstop Backup box on the Backup and recovery tab Select the backup version you want to recover on the time line at the Disks and partitions tab Select the partition to recover and click Recover oe lS The further operations are similar to those performed when recovering data partitions or disks from a classic image backup For further information see Recovering partitions and disks Depending on the circumstances recovery of the system partition may be performed both in Windows and after booting from your rescue media e g when Windows does not start Recovery in Windows is similar to recovery of a data partition However you will need to reboot Usually it is safer to recover the system partition using the rescue media When using the rescue media the recovery procedure is very similar to the procedure used for recovering the system partition from a classic disk or partition backup The only difference is the Recovery point step that allows you to select the point in time from which you can recover the system partition Recovery points correspond to backup versions shown on the time line of Backup explorer 4 4 How to recover more than one partiti
331. t Having provided the new location and size click Accept You will be taken back to the Change disk layout window You might have to perform some more resizing and relocation before you get the layout you need By clicking Next you will proceed to the Cloning summary window amp Be careful Clicking any previous wizard step on the sidebar in this window will reset all size and location changes that you ve selected so you will have to specify them again 8 5 9 Cloning summary The cloning summary window graphically as rectangles illustrates information about the source disk partitions and unallocated space and the destination disk layout Along with the disk number some additional information is provided disk capacity label partition and file system information E G Clone Disk Wizard Required steps Summary Y Clone Mode a Source disk Disk 1 Source Disk Target disk Disk 3 Y Destination Disk Move Method Ene Disk Layout Finish Before hj 55 gg New Volume F 25 GB 25 00 GB NTFS After o C J S4 C 3 24 97 GB NTFS 25 GB E Primary Logical Dynamic M Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported mem Click Proceed to start disk cloning Click Cancel to cancel the procedure and quit to the main program window Cloning a disk containing the currently active operating system will require a reboot In that case after cl
332. t Add or remove programs gt True Image 2013 gt Remove Then follow the instructions on the screen If you use Windows Vista select Start gt Control panel gt Programs and Features gt True Image 2013 gt Remove Then follow the instructions on the screen You may have to reboot your computer afterwards to complete the task If you use Windows 7 select Start gt Control Panel gt Uninstall a program gt True Image 2013 gt Uninstall Then follow the instructions on the screen You may have to reboot your computer afterwards to complete the task If you use Windows 8 click the Settings icon then select Control Panel gt Uninstall a program gt True Image 2013 gt Uninstall If you used the Acronis Secure Zone Acronis Nonstop Backup or Acronis Extended Capacity Manager select in the window that appears what to do with the zone Nonstop Backup storages or extended capacity disks Then click Next to proceed with the uninstallation procedure Upgrading from old versions of Acronis True Image Home If you already have Acronis True Image Home installed the new version will simply update it there is no need to remove the old version and reinstall the software Please keep in mind that the backups created by the later program version may be incompatible with the previous program versions Therefore if you roll back True Image 2013 to an older version you likely will have to re create the backups using the older
333. t Windows AIK gt Deployment Tools Command Prompt from the Start menu 2 Run the copype cmd script to create a folder with Windows PE files For example from a command prompt type copype x86 c winpe_ x86 When the operation finishes create an ISO 3 Select Acronis gt True Image 2013 Plus Pack gt Acronis WinPE ISO Builder from the Start menu 4 Specify the path to the folder WinPE ISO e g c winpe_x86 ISO Acronis WinPE ISO Builder Specify a path to the folder with the WinPE files Select a Folder with Windows PE files 9 150 D My Documents oe W My Computer Free space 815 7 MB EA 3 5 Floppy A Total size 4 658 GB Local Disk C SA Buids S Oocuments and Setting aL Program Fles 2D WIndows SC winpe_x66 Se 150 a boot GD EFI S sources iC mout e File name C winpe_x86 I50 Help Acronis WinPE ISO Builder Building Mode Add components to WIM image Description Acronis PE Bulder adds the necessary components to WilM image and builds a bootable PE2 or PE3 150 File 6 Specify the full path to the resulting image file including the filename or leave the default path and filename AcronisMedia iso 178 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 7 Check your settings in the summary screen and click Proceed Acronis WinPE ISO Builder Acronis The Acronis WinPE ISO Builder is ready to start the media crestion process Here is 4 complete ist of operations t
334. t your data can be recovered As mentioned above the program adds checksum values to the data blocks being backed up During backup validation True Image 2013 opens the backup file recalculates the checksum values and compares those values with the stored ones If all compared values match the backup file is not corrupted and there is a high probability that the backup can be successfully used for data recovery Consolidation Consolidation allows you to delete backups which you no longer need from a backup chain A chain to be consolidated can consist of a full backup and one or more incremental backups If necessary you can delete the base full backup from the chain The program will create a new full backup in place of the oldest remaining backup Consolidation keeps whichever backups you choose and deletes any backups that are not selected Because consolidation may require significant time and system resources including disk space we recommend using it sparingly In many cases starting a new backup chain and then deleting the old one will be a better choice Acronis Nonstop Backup uses a different consolidation mechanism The program consolidates the metadata it uses for managing the backed up data Because the metadata information volume is significantly less than the backed up data volume consolidation requires much less time and system resources Disaster recovery Recovering from a disaster usually requires a rescue media an
335. tate it was at that point in time 4 Click Recover to proceed The selected version will become the latest version on the Cloud Then it will be downloaded to the computer that owns the sync 5 10 How to clean up your space on Acronis Cloud You can clean up your Acronis Cloud space to free it up for fresher data This can be done in several ways The easiest way is to let the program clean up the space automatically By default the program keeps a maximum 10 versions of your modified files and deletes versions which are older than 30 days You can change these default values To view or change the cleanup options for a sync 1 Start True Image 2013 and click the Synchronization tab 2 Click the Settings icon s on the right hand side of the required sync and then select Cleanup options m Acronis Cloud Cleanup Options Set rules for synced file versions Y V Delete versions older than 30 Days X F Store no more than 10 recent versions OK Cancel 3 Change the options and click OK otherwise click Cancel How to clean up the Acronis Cloud space manually 1 Click the Acronis Cloud link on the box of the default sync and then click the Storage status tab 2 Click the Clean up space link in the center of the screen 3 When the appropriate dialog appears choose which versions you want to delete All versions m Versions older than 1 month Versions older than 1 week The program shows how much sp
336. tect your system from a disaster you need to make a full backup of your system We strongly advice you to create a system backup as soon as possible 2 Whenever possible you should store your system backup on a hard drive other than your primary disk C preferably on an external one This gives an additional guarantee that you will be able to recover your system if your primary hard disk drive fails 3 Because recovery of your system after a failure in most cases will be done after booting from the rescue media you must create the rescue media see Creating bootable rescue media p 169 and then test it as described in Making sure that your rescue media can be used when needed 4 It is recommended to scan your system partition for viruses before backing it up Backing up your system partition If you want to use your external drive for storing the backup attach and power it on before starting True Image 2013 1 Start True Image 2013 select the Backup and recovery tab and then click Disk and partition backup 4 r 4 Acronis Getstarted Backup and recovery Synchronization Tools and utilities amp login 3 3 9 Q 3 gt Disk and partition Online backup Other backups Create bootable Browse for backup Recover backup media No backups found on your computer Back up data Browse for old backups Protect computer from any disaster Add an existing backup to the list 2 This opens the Disk Backup
337. tected by Acronis Nonstop Backup When the free space on the storage becomes less than 200 MB the program will alert you You can choose another destination without losing the previously backed up data You will be able to recover the data backed up on the old storage Note that after selecting a new destination True Image 2013 creates a new full backup of the data selected for protection by Nonstop Backup One more way of managing the Acronis Nonstop Backup storage is by deleting the backup versions you no longer need To clean up the storage click the gear icon on the Nonstop Backup box to open the Operations menu and then select Clean up True Image 2013 displays a window allowing you to select a period of time for deleting the backup versions created during that period Select the required period and click OK You can clean up only the active Acronis Nonstop Backup storage You can also completely clean up the Acronis Nonstop Backup storage by selecting Delete in the Operations menu of a Nonstop Backup box If you select the active Nonstop Backup box the deletion stops operation of Acronis Nonstop Backup 3 7 4 Nonstop Backup Frequently asked questions Why does Acronis Nonstop Backup pause on its own This is the designed behavior of Acronis Nonstop Backup When the system load rises to a critical level Acronis Nonstop Backup receives the overload alarm from Windows and pauses itself This is done to aid Windows relieve the l
338. tem from rebooting To avoid this problem we recommend that you back up and recover the entire system disk 2 The Acronis Universal Restore option does not work if a computer is booted with Acronis Startup Recovery Manager using F11 or the backup image is located in Acronis Secure Zone This is because Acronis Startup Recovery Manager and Acronis Secure Zone are primarily meant for data recovery on the same computer 4 9 2 General principles of Acronis Universal Restore 1 Automatic selection of HAL and mass storage drivers Acronis Universal Restore searches the Windows default driver storage folders in the image being restored for HAL and mass storage device drivers and installs drivers that best fit the target hardware You can specify a custom driver repository a folder or folders on a network drive or CD which will also be used to search for drivers In addition Acronis Universal Restore can search drivers on removable media The Windows default driver storage folder is determined in the registry value DevicePath which can be found in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion DevicePath This storage folder is usually WINDOWS inf 2 Installing drivers for Plug and Play devices Acronis Universal Restore relies on the built in Plug and Play discovery and configuration process to handle hardware differences in devices that are not critical for the system start This includes video
339. tem to create only one backup version chain Automatic cleanup is not available for this option Create a full version after every n differential versions select this item to create several backup version chains This is a more reliable but more space consuming backup scheme Incremental p 39 Select this method if you want to create backup chains containing only full and incremental backup versions You can configure the scheme by using one of the following options Create only incremental versions after the initial full version select this item to create only one backup version chain Automatic cleanup is not available for this option Create a full version after every n incremental versions select this item to create several backup version chains This is a more reliable but more space consuming backup scheme Automatic cleanup rules To delete obsolete backup versions automatically you can set one of the following cleanup rules Delete versions older than defined period available for full method only Select this option to limit the age of backup versions All versions that are older than the specified period will be automatically deleted Delete version chains older than defined period available for incremental and differential methods only Select this option to limit the age of backup version chains The oldest version chain will be deleted only if after deletion the age of the oldest version exceeds
340. tents will change depending on the selected item Today 35 16 42 16 56 16 57 Recover UJ ad Validate Convert to Windows backup Mount Delete version View gt Disk backup version Recover Validate Convert to Windows backup Mount Delete version File backup version Validate Delete version Nonstop backup version Explore and recover Delete version Backup version packs and time blocks Right clicking on a folded version pack or time interval s block opens the shortcut menu with a single item Expand Viewing additional information on the time line You can also set up the time line to show additional information The appropriate commands are available in the View submenu The View submenu is opened by right clicking on a backup version or by right clicking on time line s free space 5 57 Show software installations Show software updates Show warnings LLE Show errors Show software installations if this item is selected the time line shows icons that indicate moments when new programs have been installed on your computer Show software updates if this item is selected the time line shows icons that indicate updates of Windows and programs installed on your computer Show warnings if this item is selected the time line shows all the backup versions that have been suspended or completed with warning messages select
341. tered the issue 2 Auserdump of the process See the Acronis Support KB article at http kb acronis com content 6265 3 The Procmon log See the Acronis Support KB article at http kb acronis com content 2295 If youcannot access the information contact Acronis Customer Central for an FTP link for uploading files This information will speed up the process of finding a solution 9 4 General recommendations The below information may help you in troubleshooting issues encountered during installation and use of True Image 2013 Quite often the cause of an issue may be trivial For example a loose connection of an external hard drive Before trying other solutions described in this chapter it is advisable to check if the issue is caused by one of the following loose connections to the external drive poor quality connecting cable When using an external USB hard drive try the following additional suggestions if the drive is connected through a hub connect it directly to a rear connector of your PC to prevent conflict with other USB devices attached to your PC try disconnecting all the USB devices except the mouse and keyboard You can try to find the solution to your problem in the Acronis Support Knowledge Base KB To access the Support KB click on the following link http kb acronis com Then use the Search function Enter the key words related to your problem into the appropriate field and click Search Th
342. th Windows 7 and the hidden System Reserved partition Attach the external drive if it contains the backup to be used for recovery and make sure that the drive is powered on This must be done before booting from Acronis rescue media 1 Arrange the boot order in BIOS so as to make your rescue media device CD DVD or USB stick the first boot device See Arranging boot order in BIOS p 103 Boot from the rescue media and select True Image 3 Select Recovery Disk and Partition Recovery in the main menu Choose the image backup of your system disk that you want to use for recovery Before continuing with the recovery you need to know the sizes and physical order of all existing partitions To see this information click Details on the wizard s toolbar True Image 2013 displays information about the backup This includes a graphical view of all partitions the disk contains and their physical order on the disk Saiedus Inferrriation Backup information Detailed information on the selected backup Path Gily backupsiMy_System_disktib Name My_System_disk Backup method Full Backup file type tib Created 2 18 11 11 22 50 AM SS 16GB S System disk C 1 15 9 GB NTFS D Primary Logical Dynamic M Acronis Secure Zone Unallocated Unsupported 4 Select Recover whole disks and partitions at the Recovery method step 5 At the What to recover step select the boxes of the partitions to be reco
343. than the backed up data volume Accordingly consolidation requires much less time and system resources D Data synchronization Data synchronization is a process of keeping data identical in two or more synchronized folders These folders may be located on the same computer or on different computers connected via a local network or via the Internet When you create copy modify or delete a file or a subfolder in your sync folder the same action is automatically done in the other sync folders And vice versa when something changes in the other sync folders the same change is done in your folder Differential backup 1 A backup method used for saving data changes that occurred since the last full backup version p 239 within a backup 2 A backup process that creates a differential backup version p 239 Differential backup version A differential backup version stores changes to the data against the latest full backup version p 239 You need access to the corresponding full backup version to recover the data from a differential backup version Disk backup Image A backup p 238 that contains a sector based copy of a disk or a partition in packaged form Normally only sectors that contain data are copied True Image 2013 provides an option to take a raw image that is copy all the disk sectors which enables imaging of unsupported file systems F Full backup 1 A backup method that is used to save al
344. the SSD use the Add new disk tool to create a single partition on the disk occupying the entire disk space When creating a partition check that the free space before partition is 1 MB For more information see Adding a new hard disk p 196 The next step is to check whether your Acronis bootable rescue media recognizes the SSD 1 Boot from the rescue media 2 Select Tools amp Utilities gt Add New Disk in the main menu and the Disk selection screen will show the information about all hard disks in your system Use this for checking whether the SSD is detected in the recovery environment 3 If the screen shows your SSD just click Cancel If the rescue media does not recognize the SSD and the SSD controller mode is ACHI you can try to change the mode to IDE or ATA in some BIOS brands and see whether this solves the problem Attention Do not start Windows after changing the mode it may result in serious system problems You must return the mode to ACHI before starting Windows If after changing the mode the rescue media detects the SSD you may use the following procedure for recovery or cloning under rescue media Shut down the computer Boot to BIOS change the mode from AHCI to IDE or ATA in some BIOS brands Boot from Acronis rescue media Recover or clone the disk Boot to BIOS and change IDE back to AHCI Start Windows O UL Bw NS What to do if the above suggestions do not help Owners of True Imag
345. the same way as the real one open save copy move create delete files or folders If necessary the image can be mounted in read only mode The operations described in this section are supported only for the FAT and NTFS file systems Please keep in mind that though both file backups and disk partition images have a default tib extension only images can be mounted If you want to view file backup contents use the Explore operation How to mount an image 1 Start the Mount wizard by clicking Mount image on the Tools and utilities tab 2 Select the backup for mounting E Emm Mount Wizard Required steps Mount backup Archive selection Name Created Com Rating Method Path Images a a Partition_D g Partition_D 7 1 2011 5 43 59 PM WWW Full backup E My t a My_system My system 7 1 2011 6 17 37 PM Akk k Fullbackup E My lt m r Path E My backups My_system tib Browse Next gt Cancel 3 222 If you selected a backup containing incremental images you can select one of the successive incremental images also called backup versions by its creation date time Thus you can explore the data state at a certain moment To mount an incremental image you must have all previous backup versions and the initial full backup If any of the successive backups are missing mounting is not possible To mount a differential image you must have the initial full
346. the scheduler for the current operation In this case the backup or validation will run only when you click Back up now or Validate backup respectively in the main window Advanced settings Clicking Advanced settings allows you to specify the following additional settings for backup and validation To postpone a scheduled operation until the next time the computer is not in use a screen saver is displayed or computer is locked select the Run the backup only when the computer is idle check box If you schedule validation the check box will change to Run the validation only when the computer is idle If you want to wake up the sleeping hibernating computer to perform the scheduled operation select the Wake up the sleeping hibernating computer check box If the computer is switched off when the scheduled time comes the operation won t be performed You can force the missed operation to run at the next system startup To do so select the Run at system startup check box Additionally you can set a time delay to start backup after the system startup For example to start backup 20 minutes after system startup type 20 in the appropriate box If you schedule a backup to a USB flash drive or validation of a backup that is located on a USB flash drive one more check box appears Run when the current destination device is attached Selecting the check box will let you perform a missed operation when the USB flash drive is attached if it was d
347. the specified period Store no more than n recent versions available for full method only Select this option to limit the maximum number of backup versions When the number of versions exceeds the specified value the oldest backup version will be automatically deleted Store no more than n recent version chains available for incremental and differential methods only Select this option to limit the maximum number of backup version chains When the number of version chains exceeds the specified value the oldest backup version chain will be automatically deleted Keep size of the backup no more than defined size Select this option to limit maximum size of the backup After creating a new backup version the program checks whether the total backup size exceeds the specified value If it s true the oldest backup version will be deleted The first backup version option Often the first version of any backup is one of the most valuable versions This is true because it stores the initial data state for example your system partition with recently installed Windows or some other stable data state for example data after a successful virus check Do not delete the first version of the backup Select this check box to keep the initial data state The program will create two initial full backup versions The first version will be excluded from the automatic cleanup and will be stored until you delete it manually If you select in
348. the taskbar Acronis Web site opens in your default browser the page with information about synchronization on Acronis Web site Help opens True Image 2013 Help Exit removes the Sync icon from the taskbar and pauses all syncs 1 1 9 4 Tools and utilities tab This tab allows you to select the tools and utilities provided by True Image 2013 Launch the required tool or utility by clicking the appropriate link For more information see Tools and utilities p 167 True Image 2013 by Acronis eco CD fea 4 r J Acronis Get started Backup and recovery Synchronization Tools and utilities B vivolkhonsky 10 gmail com 3 J Try amp Decide as Clone disk Perform any unsafe operation in the Try mode and decide Copy partitions from one disk to another whether to apply or revert it pI Protection tools gt Security and privacy Los Va Rescue Media Builder System Clean up Create a rescue media to boot and recover your computer if it Destroy your computer usage history becomes unbootable Acronis DriveCleanser Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Permanently destroy all data on your old partitions or whole disks If Windows works unstably press F11 at boot time and recover your data or whole system File Shredder Guaranteed destruction of your files and folders Acronis Secure Zone A special secure partition for storing backups on your disk Boot Sequence Manager Boot your computer from a disk
349. them Decryption may also be useful if you are going to recover encrypted files on another computer If you do not use the encryption feature available in Windows XP and later operating systems simply ignore this option Files folders encryption is set in Properties gt General gt Advanced Attributes gt Encrypt contents to secure data These options relate only to file folder backups In addition they are unavailable for zip backups 3 13 17 Windows account When you create a backup you can specify a Windows account under which this backup should be performed This may be useful if your computer is used not only by you but also by your relatives In such a case each user often has personal documents e mail accounts settings and other personal data By default True Image 2013 backs up data of the current user We recommend that you change this setting if the Windows account under which you are currently working is not yours The program will back up only the data related to the specified account Data of all other accounts will not be backed up To change the current Windows account 1 Select the Run backup as different Windows account check box 2 Type the account name and password in the appropriate fields 3 13 18 Performance of backup operation On the Performance tab you can configure the following settings Compression level You can choose the compression level for a backup None the data will be copied without
350. tick device the first booting device If there are several hard disks installed in your computer labeled as C D E and F you can change the boot order so that an operating system is booted from for example disk E In this case you have to set the boot order to look like E CD ROM A C D This does not mean that booting is done from the first device in this list it only means that the first attempt to boot an operating system will be from this device There may be no operating system on disk E or it may be inactive In this case BIOS queries the next device in the list The BIOS numbers disks according to the order in which they are connected to IDE controllers primary master primary slave secondary master secondary slave next go the SCSI hard disks This order is broken if you change the boot order in BIOS setup If for example you specify that booting has to be done from hard disk E numbering starts with the hard disk that would be the third in usual circumstances it is usually the secondary master for IDE hard drives Some motherboards have a so called boot menu opened by pressing a certain key or key combination for instance F12 The boot menu allows selecting the boot device from a list of bootable devices without changing the BIOS setup 4 14 Recovery options In the Disk Recovery Options File Recovery Options and E mail Recovery Options windows you can configure options for a disk partition
351. tion 1 1 gs of Partition C Used space L Free space Unallocated space Partition size 106 we Free space before 1 MB Free space after 249 lt GB v Cie Ceana Specify the settings for the second partition which in this case is your system partition Click New location and then select unallocated space on the destination disk that will receive the partition 7 Pacovary Wizard a Recovery Wizard Settings of Partition C Partition iT FreeS Type Finish Disk 1 te LA NTFS System disk D i 15 9GB 7 755 GB NTFS Disk 2 NTFS Backups E i 16GB 12 05 GB NTFS Disk3 lf Unallocated Unallocated Sansa Optional steps Options Next gt Cancel Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 10 11 12 Click Accept check the partition type change if necessary The system partition must be primary Specify the partition size which by default equals the original size Usually there is no free space after the partition so allocate all the unallocated space on the new disk to the second partition Click Accept and then click Next a Flacovary Wizard w Specify recover settings of Partition C Partition location required Partition Size at You can change the size of the partition Settings of Partition C Finish _ _ O O 6 T Used space T Free space lemn Un
352. tion on creating the media see How to create bootable media If Media Builder does not recognize your USB flash drive you can try using the procedure described inan Knowledge Base article at http kb acronis com content 1526 8 2 2 Creating BartPE disc with True Image 2013 BartPE Bart Preinstalled Environment is a bootable Windows CD DVD created from the original Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 installation setup CD The current version of True Image 2013 does not have a plug in for a preinstalled environment based on Windows Vista and Windows 7 The main advantage of BartPE is that it uses Windows drivers and has a Windows like graphical user interface It also provides for adding any storage drivers at startup in the same manner as when installing Windows on the hard drive by pressing F6 and inserting a diskette with the drivers Applications are installed into BartPE in the form of plug ins andthe True Image 2013 plug in can be included into the BartPE plug in tab If you do not have the boxed version of True Image 2013 you will need to download a separate installation file from your Acronis account Go to https www acronis com my Log in Register the serial number for your copy of True Image 2013 if it is not registered yet Click My Products amp Downloads Expand True Image 2013 item Click on Free Plugins tab then click on BartPE Plugin This will start the download of the plugin Install the plug in
353. tly System Clean up With the System Clean up utility you can clean up components folders files registry sections etc related to general system tasks These Windows components retain evidence of user PC activity so they too should be thoroughly wiped to maintain confidentiality Disk management Add new disk Add new disk wizard helps you to add a new hard disk drive to your computer You will be able to prepare the new hard disk drive by creating and formatting new partitions on this hard disk Acronis Extended Capacity Manager If you use an operating system that has a 2 TB limitation on hard drive capacity this tool will help you to lift this restriction You will be able to use all the space of your 3 TB disk and not only 2 TB View current state of your disks This link opens an integrated Acronis Disk Editor in read only mode to show you the state of your cleaned up disks or partitions For more information see Disk Editor read only mode p 210 Image mounting Mount image With this tool you can explore a previously created image You will be able to assign temporary drive letters to the partition images and easily access these images as ordinary logical drives Unmount image With this tool you can unmount the temporary logical drives you have created to explore an image 8 1 Acronis Startup Recovery Manager 8 1 1 How it works The Acronis Startup Recovery Manager lets you start True Image 2013
354. tml 2 Login to your account 3 Click Synchronization in the left hand side of the screen 4 Click the Shared synchronizations tab in the Manage synchronization area 124 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 5 Click under the Mine heading the icon next to the synchronization from which you want to remove a participant This opens the list of the persons you invited to the sync J Acronis Business Virtualization Home and Home Office Partners Support Company My Account My Account Manage synchronization Personal Profile re Computers Shared synchronizations My Orders My Products amp These are synchronizations that you share with others Downloads Synchronizations Mine 1 Joined 2 Synchronization My Support Mine 1 Requests Online Backup amp Myproject 1 Remove all participants for Home Joined participants for Business VLADIM VOLKHONSKY Remove E Product Registration T Product Updates Joined 2 Subscriptions i Vacation Leave Contact Support Submit Feedback iy New project Leave 6 Click Remove to the right of the name of the participant you want to remove If you invited several users you can revoke all invitations at once by clicking Remove all participants 7 Click OK in the confirmation message 5 16 How to leave a sync You may leave a sync either by your own decision or when the sync owner revokes the
355. to line in the Search menu or by pressing the Alt P key combination Selecting this line opens the Go to dialog window The transition is performed by entering the absolute sector offset or cylinder head and sector numbers The listed parameters are bound by this expression CYL x HDS HD x SPT SEC 1 Where CYL HD SEC are numbers of the cylinder head sector in the CHS co ordinates Cylinder Head Sector HDS is the number of heads per disk SPT is the number of sectors per track You can return to a sector from another one by selecting the Back item in the Search menu or by pressing the Ctrl Backspace key combination 8 8 2 File shredder The File shredder enables quick permanent destruction of selected files and folders To permanently destroy files and folders m Click the Tools and utilities tab and then click File shredder Follow the File shredder wizard steps 8 8 2 1 Select files folders Select the files and or folders you wish to shred To select files and or folders Expand the drives tree and select the files and or folders you need to shred You can select a random set of files folders and even disks Be careful when selecting the contents for shredding to avoid the loss of necessary data Having selected the contents for shredding click Next to continue E File Shredder Wizard gt File Shredder Wizard Select files and
356. to the last hour The week interval can be named either Week ago or This week When today is Monday Tuesday or Wednesday the week interval is named Week ago In such cases the time line shows backup versions created during the previous week and from the beginning of the current week to the beginning of today When today is Thursday Friday Saturday or Sunday the week interval is named This week In such cases the time line shows backup versions created from the beginning of the current week to the beginning of today The month interval can be named either Month ago or This month When today is any date from the 1st to 15th day of the month the month interval is named Month ago In that case the time line shows backup versions created during the previous month and from the beginning of the current month to the week interval When today is any date from the 16th to 31st day of the month the month interval is named This month In that case the time line shows backup versions created from the beginning of the current month to the week interval 30 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 The This year interval shows backup versions created from the beginning of the current year to the month interval The Older interval shows backup versions created from earlier than the beginning of the current year Working with time intervals and backup versions Time intervals may be expanded w
357. to write a random value to disk and specify the length of the random value in bytes in the field below The U S standard provides the writing of random values to each byte of each disk sector during the first pass so set the switch to Write a random number position and enter 1 into the field Click the OK button to continue You will be taken to the algorithm definition window again and will see that the former record write 00 was replaced by write random 1 byte To define the next pass click the Add button You will see the already familiar window but this time there will be more switch positions available two additional positions will be available for selection Write complementary to previous pass pattern As during the second pass of the U S standard each disk sector is filled with hexadecimal values that are complementary to those written during the previous pass Therefore you should set the switch to the Write complementary to previous pass pattern position and click the OK button You will be taken to the algorithm definition window again In this window the second record looks like this write complementary to previous step pattern Verify Following the U S data destruction standard specification define third and fourth data overwriting passes In the same way you can create any data destruction algorithm to match your security requirements Saving custom algorithm In the next Saving Custom Al
358. tom data category click Add category To change the default name of a custom category double click the name and enter a new one Select the data source e g a folder for the new category by clicking the Browse button By default the new category will contain Only the following file types but you can apply filters to select the specific types of files that you wish or do not wish to back up iix N Configure file backup process What to back up 4 Q Categories E Images aes Category source C Users tester Browse W Images o Include only the Following file types xj E Finance E books Enter file extension B dd Documents O amp My category 1 Jpg 5a gif P Add category Rs png amp bmp Ai Desktop _ mpng L psd a B tester LI pdd fea rle 1 Computer amp dib tif Ge Network crm nef d Libraries Dx raf orf E a Homegroup m Exclusions Add LAMy backups 181 33 GB of 186 54 GB free Destination D Schedule Off Turn on Backup scheme Custom The scheme is based on incremental method Backup name Documents Add comment File backup options 4h Back up now B Cancel To set a filter select its type Only the following file types or All data except the following file types You can add file types for the selected filter by entering their extensions in the appropriate field one at a time and then clicking Add The added file type
359. torage folders in the image being recovered The program will find the most suitable of all available drivers and install them into the recovered system 6 To start recovery click the Recover now button 7 When a warning appears that you need to reboot the computer to continue the operation click Reboot to continue During recovery the program may be unable to find some driver in the specified sources and will display an error message In this case you can click Ignore to continue recovery or click Cancel to cancel the process and then try to find the required driver You can then continue with the recovery process Acronis Universal Restore patches the registry and installs the new drivers after the system is recovered Therefore make sure that the driver location will still be available For example do not specify the search path for the drivers on the same disk to which you are recovering the backup We recommend that you place the drivers on a separate USB hard disk USB flash stick or on a network share After successfully recovering the system partition boot to the recovered Windows During the first booting Windows will display numerous Found new hardware pop up messages and will then ask you to reboot the computer If you use Acronis Universal Restore for recovering a backup of multiboot configuration with two or more editions of Windows the most critical drivers will be replaced for all Windows installations 4
360. u already have It provides access to all operations with the existing backups and allows you to start recovery of your data Back up now adds a new backup version to the existing backup or replaces the existing backup version depending on the backup scheme being used Start available for a nonstop backup only starts nonstop backup protection Stop available for a nonstop backup only suspends nonstop backup protection m Recover click to recover data When a backup box is collapsed the backup and recovery operations can be started by clicking the appropriate icons These icons along with the Operations menu icon a gear appear when you move the pointer over a box area You can collapse and expand the backup box by clicking the triangle near a backup name Operations menu Updated 6 8 2012 2 SP B amp tal size 11 47 GB or ea er iew log Expand amp Explore and recover Recove J Back up now Open location Ay Edit settings Validate Delete Create shortcut More Consolidate versions Clone settings Move Remove from the list Clicking the gear icon in the box of a selected backup or right clicking in the free area of the box opens an Operations menu containing the following items View log click to open the log for the current backup Expand expands the selected backup box available for collapsed boxes Collapse collapses the selected backup box into a narrow stripe
361. uct serial number 1 1 7 True Image 2013 installation Installing True Image 2013 To install True Image 2013 1 Run the setup file Before starting the setup process True Image 2013 will check for a newer build on the Web site If there is one the newer version will be offered for installation In the install menu click Install to start the installation procedure Read and accept the terms of the license agreement in the License Agreement window Read the participation terms and decide whether you want to participate in the Acronis Customer Experience Program 5 Inthe Serial number window enter a serial number for the full or trial version Type or copy and paste the serial number in the text box To get a serial number for the free trial version at Acronis Web site click Get trial serial number The serial number will be sent to a specified e mail address The trial version of True Image 2013 works for 30 days Additional parameters Set additional options if this check box is selected the Setup options step becomes available Activate the product automatically select this check box to activate the product via the Internet during the installation You may clear the check box In that case you will need to activate the product after installation See details in True Image 2013 activation p 16 6 This step is available only if the Set additional options check box is selected in the Serial number window In th
362. udes a backup of a computer s factory configuration You can use such media to restore your computer to factory settings Note that the restoration will erase all personal data and programs on the computer You may have received factory bootable media with your new computer However if the hardware supplier did not include this media or if you do not have the media for any other reasons you can create factory bootable media yourself and save it for an emergency With True Image 2013 you can create factory bootable media on a USB stick CD DVD or as an ISO image that can be burned to CD DVD later To create factory bootable media 1 Click Create factory bootable media on the Backup and recovery tab A dialog window with bootable media parameters opens Define the parameters of the media Click Create The program starts creating the factory bootable media If you have selected to burn a CD or DVD the program will ask you to insert another blank disc once the first disc is burned Media creation wizard Use the wizard to choose the type of media USB CD DVD or ISO image If you are creating bootable media on a USB stick make sure to connect the USB stick to the computer before you begin The USB stick must be FAT 32 formatted If you select to create an ISO image you also need to specify its parameters Split into Choose whether the program should split the resulting ISO image into multiple iso files of certain size
363. ull backup to an external USB hard drive you can change the backup destination to a USB stick by editing the backup settings The subsequent incremental or differential backups will be written to the USB stick You cannot use Acronis Secure Zone as one of the places for storing a part of backup versions belonging to the same backup chain because such backup versions may be automatically deleted during automatic backup consolidation in Acronis Secure Zone As a result the backup chain will be corrupted In addition the feature does not work with FTP servers One more useful aspect of this feature is the ability to split backups on the fly Suppose you perform a backup to a hard disk and in the middle of the backup process True Image 2013 finds out that the disk to which you are backing up does not have sufficient free space for completing the backup The program displays a message warning you that the disk is full V Confirmation xi You must free additional disk space to continue You can either empty the Recycle Bin or delete old data files Click Browse to specify another location Retry to try again or click Cancel To complete the backup you may either try to free up some space on the disk and click Retry or select another storage device To choose the latter option click Browse in the confirmation window The Browse for Destination window appears a U Browse for Destination 9 Gon Ex New
364. upted one will be unusable but you will be able to recover the data at least from the previous backup versions To validate an entire backup 1 Select the backup to validate click the gear icon to open the Operations menu and select Validate If the selected backup is password protected True Image 2013 will ask for the password in a dialog box After you enter the correct password the program will start the validation procedure When the validation is complete you will see the result in the line below the backup s box You can cancel validation by clicking Cancel 3 15 Consolidating backup versions Using consolidation of backup versions you can create a consistent copy of backup while deleting selected backup versions This allows you to delete the backup versions you no longer need from any backup without harming that backup Consolidation creates a consistent copy of the backup that does not contain deleted backup versions If you select a new location for the consolidated backup the source backup stays as is unless you delete it This requires more disk space but ensures security of the backup in case the consolidation fails because of power failure or a lack of disk space The current True Image 2013 version does not support consolidation of backups created in the zip format True Image 2013 cannot consolidate backup versions created when editing partition images mounted in the Read Write mode To consolidate backup v
365. ur account opens a menu with the following items My account click to go to the screen where you can view and change your account information Acronis Cloud click to go to your account page on the Acronis Web site The line below shows the percentage of your used space on Acronis Cloud Upgrade account click to start the procedure of upgrading to a paid subscription Log out click to log out from the current account This may be useful if you have more than one account 1 1 9 9 Settings menu With the Settings menu you can make or change some settings of True Image 2013 To open the menu click the gear icon at the upper right corner of the program screen The Settings menu contains the following items View log opens the log of True Image 2013 operations Integrate True Image into Windows allows selecting the Acronis components to be integrated into Windows Customer Experience Program allows joining or leaving Acronis Customer Experience Program For more information on the program click the Learn more link in the opened window Timeout settings allows you to specify the time interval the program should wait for your response For more information see Timeout settings p 166 1 1 9 10 Help menu The Help menu allows you to open the program s Help perform certain operations view product s build number etc To open the menu click the question mark icon at the upper right corner of the program sc
366. vered Do not select the MBR and Track 0 box because this will result in selecting the entire disk for recovery Recovering the entire disk does not allow you to resize partitions manually You will be able to recover the MBR later Select the partitions and click Next Placovary wiza G Recovery Wizard Select the items to recover Partition Fla E Disk 1 Capa UsedS Type VI NTFS System disk C Pri 15 9GB 8 145 GB NTFS Joe v U O MBR and Track 0 NTFS System Reserved PriAct 101 9 MB MBR and Track 0 24 63 MB NTFS Selecting partitions leads to appearance of the relevant steps Settings of partition Note that these steps start with partitions which do not have an assigned disk letter as usually is the case with hidden partitions The partitions then take an ascending order of partition disk letters This order cannot be changed The order may differ from the physical order of the partitions on the hard disk Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 6 You can specify the following partition settings location type and size You first need to specify the settings of the hidden partition System Reserved partition in our case as it usually does not have a disk letter Because you are recovering to the new disk click New location Select the destination disk by either its assigned name or capacity ae Placovary Wizard 3 R
367. w summary check box is selected If you do not need this window to be displayed uncheck the box Clean up options System Clean up utilizes a number of the most popular data destruction methods Here you can select the common data destruction method which will be used by default for all other components The data destruction methods are described in detail in Hard Disk Wiping Methods p 219 of this guide 8 8 3 3 Specific clean up options You can customize the following clean up options Data destruction method Default options Files Drive free space Computers Commands Network places filter Data destruction method System Clean up utilizes a number of the most popular data destruction methods Here you need to select the desired data destruction method Use common method if you leave this parameter selected the program will use the default method the initial setting is Fast method If you need another destruction method to be set as a default click on the corresponding link Use custom method for this component selecting this parameter allows you to choose one of the preset data destruction methods from the drop down list The data destruction methods are described in detail in Hard Disk Wiping Methods p 219 of this guide Files The Files setting defines the names of files to clean with System Clean up wizard and can be used with a search string lt System Clean up You can v
368. wim 4 Use the Oscdimg tool To create an ISO file type oscdimg n bc winpe_x86 etfsboot com c winpe_x86 ISO c winpe_x86 winpe_x86 iso 5 Burn the ISO toa CD using a third party tool for example Nero and you will have a bootable Windows PE disc with True Image 2013 8 2 3 4 Creating a custom WinPE 3 0 ISO with your drivers Sometimes a basic WinPE disk with Acronis Plug in does not have drivers for your specific hardware for example for storage device controllers Users of Windows 7 can add such drivers to the basic WinPE 3 0 image WIM before creating an ISO file with Acronis Plig in Attention You can only add drivers which have the inf filename extension The following procedure is based on an MSDN article that can be found at http technet microsoft com en us library dd799244 WS 10 aspx To create a custom Windows PE image proceed as follows 1 Select Microsoft Windows AIK gt Deployment Tools Command Prompt from the Start menu 2 Run the copype cmd script to create a folder with Windows PE files For example from a command prompt type copype x86 c winpe_ x86 3 Mount the base image by using the DISM tool to a local directory For example Dism Mount Wim WimFile C winpe_x86 winpe wim index 1 MountDir C winpe_x86 mount 4 Add your hardware driver by using the Dism command with the Add Driver option For example Dism image C winpe_x86 mount Add Driver driver C drivers mydriver inf
369. window with your system partition usually C selected by default Disk Backup Configure disk backup process Source Switch to disk mode p System Reserved NTFS l u 0 1 GB of 0 1 GB used F Local Disk C NTFS a 3 a 8 65 GB of 159GB use A New Volume D NTFS 7 0 2 GB of 6 GB used E Esti edt u e 5 2 GB Destination F My backups NTFS a 24 88 GB of 25 GB free Make this media Schedule Off Turn on Backup scheme Incremental The most frequently used scheme based on incremental method Backup name System disk amp Disk backup options P Back up now Cancel 3 Select a destination for backup you can leave the default destination or browse for a destination after clicking the down arrow to the right of the current destination and selecting Browse 4 Click Back up now Additional recommendations Many IT professionals recommend that you have at least two copies of your system backup three are even better It is further recommended to keep one copy of a backup in a different location from 2 A the other preferably on other premises for example at work or at a friend s home if you use the backed up computer at home One more argument in favor of several backups when starting recovery True Image 2013 deletes the target partition or disk If you have just a single backup you are at great risk The moment the system partition is deleted on the computer being recovered
370. without loading the operating system With this feature you can use True Image 2013 by itself to recover damaged partitions even if the operating system won t boot Unlike booting from Acronis removable media you will not need a separate media or network connection to start True Image 2013 8 1 2 How to use To be able to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager at boot time prepare as follows 1 Install True Image 2013 2 Activate Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager ES Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Acronis Startup Recovery Manager allows you to recover your computer at boot time before the operating system starts gt Activate If F11 is pressed at boot time Acronis True Image will be run Ww Cancel When Acronis Startup Recovery Manager is activated it overwrites the master boot record MBR with its own boot code If you have any third party boot managers installed you will need to reactivate them after the Startup Recovery Manager has been activated For Linux loaders e g LiLo and GRUB you might consider installing them to a Linux root or boot partition boot record instead of MBR before activating Acronis Startup Recovery Manager If a failure occurs turn on the computer and press F11 when you see the Press F11 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager message This will start a standalone version of True Image 2013 that differs only slightly from the complete versi
371. wn cases when installation of antivirus software cripples functionality of some applications or they may even refuse to launch after antivirus installation The Try amp Decide utility can help you to avoid such a problem You may proceed as follows Download atrial version of the antivirus software from the Web site of the vendor whose product you wish to try Turn on the Try mode Install the antivirus software Try to work with the applications installed on your computer performing your usual tasks If everything works without any snags you can be reasonably sure that there will be no incompatibility problems and can buy the antivirus software If you encounter any problems discard the changes in your system caused by installing the antivirus and try antivirus software from another vendor The new attempt might turn out to be successful File recovery You have accidentally deleted some files and then emptied the Recycle Bin Then you have remembered that the deleted files contained important data and now you are going to try to undelete them using the appropriate software However sometimes you may do something wrong while trying to recover deleted files making things worse than before trying to recover them So you can proceed as follows Turn on the Try mode Launch the file undelete utility After the utility scans your disk in search of the deleted file or folder entries it will present you the deleted entr
372. ws Automated Installation Kit AIK installed Running True Image 2013 in the preinstallation environment may provide better compatibility with your computer s hardware because the preinstallation environment uses Windows drivers For more information see Creating WinPE based rescue media p 176 1 1 3 True Image 2013 basic concepts This section provides general information about basic concepts which could be useful for understanding how the program works Backup and recovery Backup refers to the making copies of data so that these additional copies may be used to recover the original after a data loss event Backups are useful primarily for two purposes The first is to restore a state following a disaster called disaster recovery The second is to recover small numbers of files after they have been accidentally deleted or corrupted True Image 2013 does both by creating disk or partition images and file level backups respectively Backup versions Backup versions are the file or files created during each backup operation If you do not use consolidation feature the amount of versions created is always equal to the amount of times the backup is executed or to the amount of stored points in time So a version represents a point in time to which the system or data can be restored To put it another way backup versions represent full incremental and differential backups see Full incremental and differential backups p 39
373. x After making the additional settings click OK to return to the previous window If you would like to use encryption select the required encryption protocol from the dropdown list in the Encryption field To check whether your settings are correct click the Send test message button 6 5 8 Exclusions You can exclude from online backup hidden or system files and folders as well as files matching the criteria you specify For more information see Excluding items from backup p 73 6 6 Recovery from Acronis Cloud 6 6 1 Recovering data from online backups With True Image 2013 you can browse and recover data that was backed up on Acronis Cloud If you have backed up data from several computers select the online backup box for the computer from which you backed up the data you want to recover 1 Click the Recover button on the box of the online backup from which you want to recover data You will be taken to Acronis Cloud Web site If the data from the selected computer is stored on the Cloud in encrypted form you will be asked to enter the encryption key which has been used for encryption You will not be able to access the data until you enter the correct encryption key 2 After the Files tab on the Acronis Cloud Web site opens select the required online backup in the Backups area 3 Select the files and folders you want to recover Click the Download button to start recovery Backups gt TESTER test gt
374. your backup as usual 4 Click Back up now Please be aware that CD DVDs are not supported as locations for reserve copies 3 9 How to make bootable removable media with a backup While configuring a disk or partition backup on removable media you can make the media bootable True Image 2013 can make the following media bootable DVD BD USB flash drive formatted in FAT32 This may be a viable option if your backup is not very large For example we strongly recommend not to back up to DVDs if the number of discs used will be more than three If your backup takes several DVDs recovery will require a lot of disc swapping Here is the procedure to use 1 Start True Image 2013 go to Backup and recovery and select Disk and partition backup 2 Select a partition or the whole disk to back up 3 As a backup destination select the removable media DVD BD Flash drive 4 Select the Make this media bootable check box If you select an internal or external hard disk as the destination this option will be disabled Disk Backup o Configure disk backup process we Source Switch to partition mode Se VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 200 GB ome VMware VMware Virtual 1 0 16 GB 7 F UR Destination A DA lt S sagt a L F Make this media bootable Schedule Off Turn on Backup scheme Custom The scheme is based on full method Backup name Project disk amp gP Disk backup options Back u
375. your data will be stored on Acronis Cloud in encrypted form To encrypt and decrypt your data the program needs the encryption key that you should specify when you register your computer An encryption key is a unique alphanumeric code like a password You can specify any set of characters you like Note that the key is case sensitive An encryption key cannot be retrieved Please memorize the key that you specify during your computer registration While attempting to access the encrypted data the program asks you to enter the encryption key 6 5 4 Windows account for Online backup By default True Image 2013 backs up data of the current user You can specify another Windows account The program will back up only the data related to the specified account For more information see Windows account p 71 6 5 5 Operation priority Changing the priority of an operation process can make it run faster or slower depending on whether you raise or lower the priority but it can also adversely affect the performance of other running programs The priority of any process running in a system determines the amount of CPU usage and system resources allocated to that process Decreasing the operation priority will free up more resources for other CPU tasks Increasing operation priority may speed up the backup process by taking resources from the other currently running processes The effect will depend on total CPU usage and other factors On
376. ystem Clean up The System Clean up wizard enables you to securely remove all traces of your PC actions stored by Windows It can carry out the following operations Securely destroy data in the Windows Recycle Bin Remove temporary files from appropriate Windows folders Clean up hard disk free space of any traces of information previously stored on it Remove traces of file and computer searches on connected disks and computers in the local area network Clean the recently used documents list Clean the Windows Run list Clean the opened saved files history Clean the list of network places to which the user has connected using network credentials Clean the Windows prefetch directory where Windows stores information about programs you have executed and run recently Windows Vista and Windows 7 do not store information on file and computer searches Furthermore information on opened saved files is stored differently in the registry so the wizard shows this information in a different way KK Please be aware that Windows stores passwords until the session ends so cleaning the list of network user credentials will not take effect until you end the current Windows session by logging out or by rebooting the computer After you start the wizard by selecting the Tools and utilities tab and then clicking System Clean up it will search for any traces of user actions stored by Windows When the search is finished its
377. ystem to the state it was in before turning on the Try amp Decide Choosing Apply changes with reboot will speed up applying the changes Limitations in using Try amp Decide If you use Windows Vista or Windows 7 please be aware that in the Try mode the program may use free disk space quite intensively even when your computer is idle This is due to housekeeping activities such as indexing that run in the background Please note that while working in the Try mode you will experience slowing down of the system performance Furthermore the process of applying changes may take a long time especially if you leave the Try mode turned on days on end Please be aware that Try amp Decide cannot track changes in disk partitions so you will be unable to use the Try mode for virtual operations with partitions such as resizing partitions or changing their 153 Copyright Acronis International GmbH 2002 2012 layout In addition you must not use the Try amp Decide and disk defragmentation or disk error checking utilities at the same time because this can irreparably corrupt the file system as well as make the system disk unbootable When the Try mode is started you won t be able to use the previously activated Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Rebooting the computer in the Try mode will allow you to use Acronis Startup Recovery Manager again Try amp Decide and Nonstop Backup cannot work simultaneously Starting the Try mode suspends Nonstop Ba

Acronis True Image 2013

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents